Nokia 9110 User Manual
UserâÂÂs manual Electronic use r's guide release d subject to "Nokia Us er's Guides Terms an d Conditions, 7 th June, 1998". 9357 168 ISSUE 3 EN
ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Nokia is a registered t rademark of Nokia Corporation, Fi nland. Copyright. é 1995-1998 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Nokia Mobile P hones operates a policy of conti nuous improvement. T herefore, we r eserve the right to ma ke changes and improvements to any of t he products described in this guide without prior notice. Nokia Mobile Phones is not responsible for any loss of data, inco me or any consequential damage howsoever caused. Geoworks î application software and G EOSî operating system software copyright é 1990-1998 Geoworks. All rights reserved. United States Patent 5,327,529. Hardware and software floating point math library copyright é 1984-1991 Dimensions Research, Inc. This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkel ey and its contributors. Copyright 1979, 1980, 1983, 1986, 1988, 1989, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. The software is pr ovided by T he Regents and cont ributors âÂÂas isâ and any expr ess or implied warranties, including, but not limit ed to, the implied w arranties of merchantabilit y and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no ev ent shall The Regents or contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of subs titute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) ho wever caused and on any theory of liability, whethe r in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of this software, eve n if advised of the possibility of such damage. The GEOSî so ftware of this product include s Nimbus Q from Digit al Typeface Corp. and t ypefaces from URW, G mbH. This device contains Embedded DOS-ROM (R), Embedded BIOS (R) software licensed fr om General Software, Inc. Copyright é 1998 General Software, Inc. General Software, Embedded DOS, and Embedded BIOS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Ge neral Software, Inc. Portions of this work are derived from the Standard C Library, é 1992 by P.J. Plaguer, publi shed by Prentice-Hall, and are used with permission. HP Database Engine Version 1.0 copyright é Hewlett-Packard Company 1994. All rights reserved. The PPP software is copyright é 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 M o rning Star Technologies, all rights reserved. It contains software developed a t Carnegie Mellon Universit y, which is copyright é 1989 Car negie Mellon University, all rights reserved. It contains software developed at the University of California, Berkeley, which is copyright é 1989 Regents of the University of California, all rights reserved. It contains software t hat is copyright é 1990, RSA Data Sec urity, Inc., all rights reserved. C-client Internet ma il routines original version copyright 1988 by the Leland St anford Junior Unive rsity, copyright 1995 by the Unive rsity of Washington. The University of Washington a nd the Leland Stanford Junior University disclaim all warranties, express or implied, with regard to this software, including without limitation all implied warranties of mer chantability and fitness for a particular purpose, and in no event shall the Univ ersity of Washington or the Leland Stanford Junior University be liable for any special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an action of contract, tort (including negligence) or strict liability, arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of th is software. This product includes so ftware based in part on the work of the independe nt JPEG group. CellularWare is a trademark of Nokia Mobile Phone s. AT is a trademark of Hayes Microco mputer Products, Inc. Hayes is a register ed trademark of Hayes Microcomput er Products, Inc. Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered t rademarks and Windows is a trademark of Micr osoft corporation. Geoworksî and GEOSî are Registered Trademar ks of Geoworks, and GeoDOS is a Trademark of Geoworks in the United States of America and ot her countries. Intellisync is a trade mark of Puma Technology, Inc. All other brand and product names are t rademarks or registered tradema rks of their respective holders. This product contains the RSA Software. The products described in this ma nual conform to the European Council directives EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) and TTE Directive (91/263/EEC).
ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR SECURITY SOCKETS LAYER -SOFTWARE (âÂÂSSLâÂÂ) READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CO ND ITIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE USING TH E SSL. USE OF THE SSL SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR ACC E PTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDIT IO NS. In this license agreement ("Licens e Agreement"), you, the purchaser of the license rights granted by this Agreement , are referred to as "Licensee." In accordance with the term s and conditions of this License Agreement, Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd. ("Licens or") grants Li censee a non-exclusive sublicense to us e SSL Software (âÂÂSoftwareâÂÂ), which c ontains the RSA Software licensed to Licensor by RSA Data Security, Inc. ("RSA"). This License Agreement is effective until terminated. Li censor may terminate this Lice nse Agreement if Licensee breaches any of the t erms and conditions. In the event of termination by Lic ensor, Licensee will return t he communicator device of Licensor to Licensee for removal of the Sof tware. All provisions of this Agreement relating to disclaimers of warranties, limitation of liability, remedies , or damages, and Licensor's proprietary rights shall survive termination. The Software is delivered in objec t code only. Licensor shall utilize the Sof tware solely as part of the communicator device f rom Licensor and solely for pe rsonal or internal use and without right to license, ass ign or otherwise transfer such Software to any other person or ent ity. Licensee shall not modify, tra nslate, reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the Softwar e or any part thereof. Licensee agrees not to r emove or destroy any proprietary, trademark or copyright markings or notice s placed upon or contained within the Software or any r elated materials or documentation. By reason of this Agreement or the performance hereof, Lic ensee shall acquire no rights of any kind in any trademark, trade name, logo or product designation under which the Softw are was or is marketed and Licensee shall not make any use of t he same for any reason. IN NO EVENT WILL LICENSO R OR RSA BE LIABLE TO LICENSEE FOR INDIRECT, INCIDENT AL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR EXEMPLA RY DAMAG ES ARISING O UT OF OR RELATED T O THIS A GREEMENT, IN CLUDING B UT NOT LI MITED TO LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBIL ITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND REG ARDLESS OF WHETHER ANY ACTION OR C LAIM IS BASED ON WARRANTY, CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE. UNDER NO CIRCUM STA NCES SHALL LICENSOR'S OR RSA'S TOTAL LIABILITY A RISING OUT O F OR RELA TED TO THIS AGREEMENT EXC EED THE TOTAL A MOUNT PAID B Y LICENS EE. THIS AGRE E MENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT T O ANY LAWS, REGU L ATIONS, ORDERS OR OTHER R E STRICTIONS ON THE EXP ORT FROM THE UNITED S TATES OF AMERICA OF THE SOFTWAR E OR OF INFORMATION ABOUT T HE SOFTWAR E WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME BY THE GOVERNMENT OF THE UNITE D STATES OF AMERICA . NOTW ITHSTA NDING ANY THING CONTAI NED IN TH IS AGRE EMENT TO THE CONT RARY, LICENSE E SHALL NOT EXPOR T OR REEXPORT, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, ANY SOF TWARE OR INFORMATION PE RTAININ G THERETO TO ANY COUNTRY TO WHICH SUCH EXPORT OR REEXPORT IS RESTRICTED OR PROHIBITE D, OR AS TO WHICH SUCH GOVERNMENT OR ANY AGENCY THEREOF REQU IRES AN EXPORT LICENSE OR OTHER G OVERNMENTAL APPROVAL AT THE TIME OF EXPORT OR REEXP ORT WITHOUT FIRS T OBTAINING SUCH L ICENSE OR APPROVAL.
ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. FOR Y OUR SAFETY Read these simple guidelines. Breaking the rules may be dangerous or ille gal. Further detailed information is given in thi s m anu al. ROAD SAFETY CO MES FIRST Do not use the communicator while driving; park the vehicle first. INTERFERE NCE All wireless phones may get interferen ce which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any regulations or rules. Switch off the phone near medical equipment. SWIT CH OFF IN A IRCRAFT Wireless phones can cause interference. Using them on aircraft is ille gal. SWIT CH OFF WHEN REFUELLING Do not use the phone at a refuelling point. Do not use near fu el or chemicals. SWIT CH OFF NEAR BLASTING Do not use the phone wher e blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. USE SENSIBL Y Use only in the normal position (to e ar). Do not touch the ant enna unne cessa rily . USE QUALIFI ED SERVICE Only qualified service personnel must install or repair equipment. ACCE SSORIES AND BA TTERIES Use only approved accessor ies and batteries. Do not con nect incompatible products. MAKING CALLS VIA THE PHONE Close the cover and ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Enter the phone number , including the area code, then press . To end a c all pr ess . To answer a call press . EMERG ENCY CALLS Close the device cover . Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Hold for several seconds, to cle ar the display . Enter the emergency number , then press . G ive your location. Do not end th e call until told t o do so. MAKE BACK UP COPIES Remember to make backup copies of all important data. CONNECTING TO O THER DEVICES When connecting to an y other device, read its userâÂÂs guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. INFRARED PRECAUTIONS Do not point the IR be am at anyoneâÂÂs eye or allow it to in terfere with other IR devices.
Table of Contents ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Table of Contents Introduction 11 About this manual 12 Facts a bout your com municator 13 Facts about cellular data transm ission 14 Getting started 17 First st art-up 17 Commu nicator displ ay 20 Commu nicator keyb oard 24 Commu nicator appli cations 25 Connecto rs 26 Batte ry 27 Special features 31 Commu nicator fe atures 31 Docum ent features 34 To transf er data from old er communicato r models 37 Computer co nnectivity 39 To use the PC Suite 39 To use the Nokia Comm unicator Server 46 Nokia Com municator Serv er for MacOs 47 Contacts 49 Conta cts directory 49 To mak e contact ca rds 51 Contact groups 55 Log s 56
Table of Contents ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Telephone 59 To make a call 59 To answer a call 60 Handsfree mode 61 Multiple calls 62 Telephone settings 65 Flight profile 69 Fax 71 To se nd f axes 71 To receive faxes 73 Fax se ttings 74 Short messages 77 To send short mes sages 78 To receive messages 79 Standard messages 80 Business car ds 81 SMS settings 82 Internet 85 Internet settin g s 86 Mail 89 Mail settings 89 To se nd ma il 92 To fetch ma il 9 4 To read mail 95 World Wide We b 97 WWW set tings 97 Bookmarks 9 8 To navigate in WWW 101 Terminal 104 Telnet 107 Text Web 109
Table of Contents ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Notes 111 To edit docum ents 113 Downloaded files and read-only d ocuments 114 Notes settings 115 Calendar 117 Mont hly schedul e 117 Weekly schedul e 118 Daily schedule 11 9 Calendar b ooking 121 Alarm s 123 To-d o l ist 12 3 System 125 System settin gs 125 Security 127 User dat a 130 Memory 130 Infrared act ivation 131 Digita l camera connec tivity 131 Remote sy nchronisati on 132 Fax modem 133 Data removal 134 Instal l/Remove softwar e 134 Backu p /Restore 135 Memory card tool 135 About this product 135 Extras 137 Calc ulator 137 Clock 138 Composer 141 Voice recorder 144
Table of Contents ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Phone 147 Display indicators 148 To make a call 149 To answer a call 150 To mana ge calls 150 To search for phone num bers 151 To use speed dialling 151 To se nd DT MF t ones 152 Keypa d lock 1 52 Help 153 To use the menus 153 Messages (Menu 1) 1 5 5 Call register (Menu 2) 156 Prof ile s (Me nu 3 ) 158 Settings (Menu 4) 159 Call di vert ( Menu 5) 163 Recorder (Menu 6) 164 Troubleshooting 165 Care and maintenance 171 Important safety information 173 Glossary 177 Index 181
Table of Contents ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Introduction 11 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 1. Introduction Congratulations on purchasing the Nokia 9 1 1 0 Communicator . The Nokia 91 1 0 Communicator is a complete communications tool: it is a wireless phone, messaging device, access terminal and a palmtop organiser in one pocketable package. The Nokia 9 1 1 0 Communicator consists of two parts: the phone and the communicator interface. The phone is on the device cover (figure 1) and the communicator interface is under the cover ( f igure 2). Figure 1 Figure 2
Introduction 12 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Both of these parts use the same resources and work closely together â they are not separate devices. For ex ample, the phone uses the na mes and phone numbers stored in the Contacts directory of the communicator interface, and the communicator interface uses the phone for communicating with the âÂÂoutside worldâÂÂ, for example, when sending or receiving fa xes and connecting to the Internet. The communicator interface contains many organiser and communications applications. The large keyboard, command buttons and display make u sin g the applications easy . The communicator interface has no power on/off button â it switches itself on when you open the cover and switches off when you close the cover . The phone is design ed for making and answering calls quickly . It looks and operates like other Nokia wirele ss phones, except that the earpiece and microphone are on th e rear of the device. The phone is switched on and off by pressing the button on the cover . About this manual This chapter explains how the Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator oper ates. The following chapter , "Getting started", helps you begin using the Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator . It explai ns the start-up procedure and gives information about the various aspects of the device, such as the keyboard and the display . "Special features" explains special functions, and "Computer connectivity" shows how to connect you r communicator to a PC. The rest of this manual deals with the communicator applications and the phone. There is a sh or t glossary of Internet and cellular terms and abbreviations at t h e back of this m anual. If you are switching from the Nokia 9000 Communicator or the Nokia 9 0 00i Communicator to the Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator , please, see âÂÂTo transfer data from older com municator modelsâ on page 37. Tip: Press the button on the communicator interface keyboard to find basic information about the communicator applicat i ons. IMPORT ANT! Do not switch on th e phone when wi reless phone use is prohibited or when i t may cause interference or danger.
Introduction 13 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Facts about your communicator Services The GSM system provides a number of various wireless services, but they are not automatically enabled to the wireless phone user. Even though the Nokia 9 1 1 0 Com municator represents the latest development in wireless phone technology , using its various communications applications requires that you have subscribed to these services an d th at your network operator has activated these services for you . Services that need to be subscribed to are typically the short message service, Internet and fax. Because the number of special serv ices depends on what s ervices are available in your home network, it is, unfortunately , impossible to provide a comprehensive list of th e services an d settings you need in this m an ual. Therefore, this manual gives general information about the additional services. Please, contact your network operator for further information about the availability and th e details of s e rvices in your h ome network. If a service requires a separate ph one number or specific settings, they m ust be stored in the settings o f the communicator . For e xample: Sending and receiving short messages requires that this service is supported by the network you are u sing and activated for your SIM card, and that the phone number of th e message centre is stored in th e settings of the SMS application. Internet access requires that data service is supported by the ne twork you are using and activated for your SIM card. In addition, you must have obtained an Internet access point fr om an Internet service pr ovider . Access codes The Nokia 9 1 10 C ommunicator uses several access codes to protect against unauthorised use of your communicator and SIM card. The access codes you need most often are the lock c od e, which is provided in the sales package, an d the PIN code, which is provided with the SIM c ar d. Y ou can change access codes that a re used by both the phone and the communicator interface via either of them, provided that the code can be changed. For more details on the access codes, see âÂÂSecurityâ on page 127. The Internet applications of the communicator use passwords and user names to protect from u nauthorised use of t he Inte rnet and its services. These passwords are changed in the settings of the Internet applications. Note: In this ma nual, the nam es of the commands on the display are in bold an d the settings and options are in italics .
Introduction 14 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Cont act informa tion All contact information , such as names, addresses, phone numbers, th at you store, goes into th e Contacts directory . Th e phone, the comm unicator interface, and each of the applications have their own views of the Contacts directory . The information shown depends on the in f ormation the selected application can use. For example, when you ar e making a call via the phone, you can view the name and the phone number(s) of the contact. P ossible fa x numbers, e-mail add resses, job titles, etc., are n ot shown. Facts about cellular data transmission The Nokia 91 1 0 Communicator employs the data transmission capabilities of the GSM network to send faxes, short messages and e-mail, and to establish connec tions with re mote comput ers. Cellular data connections can be made from most locations where your wireless phone operates. However , it is recommen ded that you move the communicator to a location where the strongest possible cellular signal can be obtained. When th e signal is strong, data transmission is efficient. In general, you should not ex pect the same performance from cellular data communications as from lan dli ne communications due to the inherent characteristics of the cellular environment. The following factors may impair cellular connections: Noise Radio interference from ele ctronic appliances and equipment, as well as from other wireless phones in metropolitan areas where wireless phones are prevalent. Handove r As the wireless phone user moves from one network cell to another , the signal strength of the channel drops and the cellular telephone exchange may hand the user over to a different cell and frequen cy , where the signal is stronger . A cell handover may also occur wh en the user is stationary due to varying cellular traffic loads. Such handovers may cause sligh t delays. Electrostatic d ischarge A discharge of static electr icity from a finger or a conductor m ay cause erroneous functions in electric devices. The discharge may result in âÂÂgarbledâ display and unstable software operation. Cellular connections may become unreliable, data may be corrupted, and the transmission halted. In this case you need to end the existing call (if an y), switch off the phone (if on) and remove the battery . Then r eplace the battery and establish a new cellular connection.
Introduction 15 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Dead spot s and dropou ts Dead spots are areas where radio signals cannot be received. Dr opouts occur when the wireless phone user passes through an area where the r adio signal is blocked or reduced by geographi c or structural obstructions. Sign al im pair men t Distance and obstacles can cause ou t-of-phase reflected signals that r e sult in a loss of signal strength. Low signal streng th Due to either distance or obstacles, th e r adio signal strength from a cell site may not be strong or stable enough to provide a reliable cellular connection for communication. Therefore, to e nsure the best possible communication, remember to consider the following points: The data connection works best when the communicator is in a stationary position. Attempting cellular communication while in a moving vehicle is not recommended. Fax transmis sion is more easily impaired than data or short message transm ission. Do not place the communicator on a metal surface. Check that the cellular signal strength on the communicator displays is sufficient. See âÂÂCommunicator displayâ on pa ge 20 and âÂÂTo m ake a callâ on page 149. Movin g the communicator within a room especially towar ds a window , may result in a stronger signal. If the cellular signals are not strong enough to support a voice call, data connection should not be attempted until you can find a location with better signal reception. Note: When the ante nna is up, the signal is stronger.
Introduction 16 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Gett ing started 17 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 2. Getting started This chapter explains how to start up you r communicator and install a SIM card, how the communicator oper ates, and how to supply power to th e communicator . When you open the sales package , check that it contains th e following: ⢠Nokia 9110 Communicator ⢠This UserâÂÂs manual, the combined Quick guide and Accessories guide, and the Solution guide ⢠High Power Battery â¢A C c h a r g e r ⢠RS-232 Adapter Cable ⢠Diskette package ⢠CD-ROM with PC connectivity software ⢠Stickers with th e serial number and the lock code of the communicator For information about th e Nokia 9 1 10 Commu n icator accessories, see the Accessories guide. First start-up 1 Close the device cover and make sure that the phone is switched off. If it is on, press . A valid miniature SIM card is required for sending and receiving calls and messages. The card is supplied by your network operator or service provider . If you do not have a SIM card yet, go to step 6 . 2 If the battery is con n ected to the communicator, remove th e battery: pr e ss the catch at the top of the battery and lift the battery away from the battery cavity. See figu re 1. Note: K eep all mi niature SIM cards out of small childrenâÂÂs reach.
Gett ing started 18 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 3 Slide the SIM card into the SIM card slot: make sure that th e gold contacts of the SIM card are facing down and that the bevelled corner of the card is on the right. See figure 2. 4 When the SIM car d is properly inserted into the SI M card slot, the bevelle d corner will remain visible. See figure 3. Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
Gett ing started 19 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 5 When you are sure that the SIM card is correctly installed, r eplace the battery. 6 If there is little or no charge in the battery, it is recommended that you connect the communicator to the ch arger and start charging the battery before continuing with the start-up procedure. See âÂÂBatteryâ on page 2 7 . 7 Open the cover of the communicator. You will see a welcome screen wh ile the communicator performs a self -test. 8 After the self-test is complete, you w ill see a list of countries on the display, see figure 4. Scroll the dark grey selection frame using the arrow keys on the keyboard ov e r the name of your home country. Press the button on the right side of the display next to the command OK . The capital of your home country will be set as you r home city. You can change your home city later in th e Clock application, see âÂÂClockâ on page 138. 9 Write the current date in the input field us in g the format dd.mm.yy , fo r example 22.03. 98 . Press OK . You can later change the date format in the System settings. Time and date can be changed in the settings of the Clock application. Figure 4 Note: If an unacceptable SIM card is inserte d, the message INVAL ID SIM CARD will be displayed. Should this happen, contact your dealer or n etwork operator. Note: The battery does not fit into place if the SIM card is no t correctly installed. Do not force the battery into place! Check that you have inserted the SIM card into the slot as described above. If the SIM card is incorrectly installed, remove it by pulling it away from the slot, and in sert it again.
Gett ing started 20 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 10 Write the current time using the 24-hour format hh :mm , fo r example 17:25 , and press OK . You can later change the time for m at in the System settings. 11 Enter your contact information in the user data c ard and press OK . You can later change the information in the User data application u nder System. The first start-up is now c om pleted. After the start-up, do not immediately remove the battery , as the battery charges the backup battery th at supplies power to the real-time clock of the communicator . To copy the SIM card contents t o the Contacts directory If the installed SIM card contains n ames or numbers, you will be asked after the start-up procedure if you want to copy the SIM car d contents into the memory of your communicator . If the phone is s witched off, the question will be asked the next time the phone is on and you open the cover of the communicator . If you want to do the copying later , press Ca ncel, and do it in the Contacts application, see âÂÂContacts directoryâ on page 49. All phone numbers copied from the SIM card to the communicator memory will go to the Tel field of the contact cards. Therefor e, you must move a ll wireless phone numbers manually into the Te l( GS M) fie ld. See âÂÂTo make contact cardsâ on page 51. The quickest way to copy a phone number is to select the number with the key combination Shift-C trl-left arrow , cut it with Ctrl-X, and paste it to th e right contact card field with Ctrl-V. Communicator display The communicator interface is switched on by open ing the cover . See f igure 5. The applications are run in th e m iddle of the display . The indicators (figure 6) show application and system-related information. The commands always correspond to the column of four command buttons on the right side of the display . The functions of the Menu, Zoom and Backlight buttons are explained in âÂÂCommunicator featuresâ on page 3 1. The scroll bar indicates that there are more items than cu rrently shown on the display . The display can be scrolled with the up and down ar r ow keys. Whenever the selection frame is shown, yo u can select ite ms by m ovin g the selection frame over the desired item with the up and down arrow keys. Note: When taking the phone into use, observe the instr uctions given by your network operator.
Gett ing started 21 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. When the search f ie ld appears a t the bottom of the display , y o u can sea rch for items by entering text into the sear ch field with the keyboard. After the correct item has been selected, pre ss the command button next to the command you wish t o apply to th e item, for example, Open . The following figures illustrate certa in communicator con ve ntions: 1 When a com m and is dimmed, it ca nnot be used, see figure 7. 2 When a cursor appear s on a dotted line, en ter a va lu e with the keyboard, see fig ure 7 . Figure 5 Figure 6
Gett ing started 22 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 3 A pop-up box. Select an item and press OK or Cancel , see figure 8. When a setting with next to it is selected, pressing Change toggles the value or opens a pop-up box. See figure 8. When a setting with next to it is selected, pressing Cha nge opens a new se ttings view . Wh en you press a command with next to it, the comma n ds change. Indicator s The application icon and the application name in the indicator area show the application you are in at the moment. The icons that appear on the Call status and Inbox/Outbox in dicator rows change according to the application and current situation. The battery level and field strength indicators a re the same as shown on the phone display when the phone is on. Figure 7 Figure 8 Application icon Application name Call status Inbox/Outbox Field strength and battery le vel
Gett ing started 23 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Call status â Y ou have a voice call, and the handsfree loudspeaker and microphone are on. See âÂÂHandsfree modeâ on page 61. â A voice call w ith the han dsfre e off. The lou dspeaker and microphone are muted. â An open data connection, see chapter 9 "Internet" on page 85. â The communicator is receiving or sending a fax, see chapter 7 "Fax" on page 7 1. â The communicator is trying to establish an infrared connection, see chapter 4 "Computer connectivity" on pa ge 39. â An infrared connection has been established. â The infrared con nection is obstructed. â The communicator is connected to a PC, see chapter 4 "Computer connectivity" on page 39. â The communicator is being used as a fax modem, see âÂÂF ax modemâ on page 133. â The communicator is in a special operating environment, in this case in the meeting pr ofile. See âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. â Time can be adjusted in the Clock application, see âÂÂClockâ on page 138. Inbo x/Out bo x â The inbox indicator informs you that you have received a fax, short message or mail. â The D ocument outb ox con tai ns uns ent mes sage s, see âÂÂCommunicator featuresâ on page 3 1. Battery leve l â The battery is low and should be recharged. â The battery is charging. The bar scrolls until the battery is fully charged. The outlet plug icon indicates that th e communicator is connected to an external power source. â The battery is f ully charged. All the four bars are displayed. Field strength â The communicator is connected to a cellular network. When all the four bars are shown, the cellular signal r e ception is good. If the signal is wea k, make sure the antenna is up. You ca n also tr y
Gett ing started 24 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. to improve the reception by moving the communicator slightly or by using it in the handsfree mode. â The phone is on, but it is ou tside network coverage. â The phone is off. The communicator cannot send or r eceive calls or messages. Communicator keyboard In addition to the normal ch aracter and n u mber keys, the keyboard has a number of special keys, as shown in figure 9. Applicat ion buttons The buttons at the top of the keyboard start the corresponding applications. ESC To c ancel an acti on, you c an either pres s Canc el or Chr-Q . The Chr-Q k ey combination can only be used when Cancel is among the available commands. All information notes shown on the display can also be dismissed by pressing Chr-Q instead of OK . Tabula tor When writing or editing docum e nts, the tabulator ke y moves th e curs or to th e next tabulator stop. In settings, f or example , the tabulator key can be used to move the cursor to the next field. Character (Chr) The character key is used to generate characters not on the communicator keyboard. A single press of the character key opens a table of special Figure 9
Gett ing started 25 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. characters. Some special characters are also printed on a key as the third character . These, and certain other characters can be generated by pr essing and holding the character key w hile pressing the corresponding key , see âÂÂTo edit documentsâ on page 1 13. Control ( Ctrl) Pressed together with certain keyboard keys, the control key generates shortcut commands which can be used in viewing and writing text, see âÂÂDocument featuresâ on page 34. and Shift When you press the Shift key and then a letter key , an uppercase letter is inserted in front of the cursor . The Shift key does not need to be held down when pressing a key: once you have pressed Shift, the next key press always generates a shifted character . In writing and editing text, Shift and the arrow keys ( ) can be used to select text, see â Document featu resâ on page 34. Arrow keys The arrow keys can be used to move the cursor or the selection fr ame. In some applications, the arrow keys have special func tions, see âÂÂDocument featuresâ on page 34. Enter When the cursor is shown, pressing Enter moves the cu r sor to th e beginning of the next line or adds a new lin e. Enter can also be used to sele ct contacts in the Contacts directory and to open folders and documents. When information notes are shown, you ma y press Enter instead of OK . In option s and settings, when a value can be toggle d, you may pr e ss Enter instead of Ch ange . Communicator applications The coloured application buttons on the communicator keyboard a r e used to start the corresponding applications. Tel e ph o ne â Used for managing voice calls. Fax â En ables you to send any of your own documents as a f a x. Received faxes can be read or f orwarded. SMS â Enables you to send short messages. Received short messages can be read, replied, or f orwarded. Inter net â Includes Internet and modem-based applications. Cont act s â Used for managing contact information, such as names, numbers and addresses. Y ou can exchange contact inform ation as busin ess cards via the SMS application. Notes â Used for w riting and stor in g documents.
Gett ing started 26 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Calendar â Contains an appointment book and a to-do list. Y ou can book events in other calenda r s and set alarms to events. System â Contains PC connectivity , security and other system - related applications. Extras ( ) â Includes various items, such as Calculator , Clock, and Composer . To use th e applications When the cover is opened, the application that was on the display when you closed the cover , appears in the same state. However , if you have made or answered a voice call via the phone and switch to the communicat o r interface by opening the cover , the T elephone appli cation starts automatically . To switch to another application, press the corresponding application button. Y ou can do this even during a call. You need not exit a n y application before starting another . All inactive application s r emain in the background until you start them a gain. To send or receive calls or messages with any of the communications applications, remember that the phone must be switched on a n d in a service area with adequate ce ll ular signal stren gth. Connectors The Nokia 9 1 1 0 can be connected to a variety of devices. The connectors are (figure 1 0): Figure 1 0 Note: Information needs not be specifically saved. When you press Clos e , switch to another application, or close the device cover, the Nokia 9110 C ommunicator sav es all data.
Gett ing started 27 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 1 IrDA-SIR infrared port fo r connecting to a PC, a printer , a digital camera, or another communicator . For information on in frared connection, see chapter 4 "Computer connectivity" on page 39. 2 Connector for the charger plug. 3 Connector for the RS-232 ca ble plug and th e headset plug. Battery The Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator is powered by a rechargeable Lithium-ion battery . The High Power Battery provides 3 to 6 hours of talk/fax/terminal time or 60 to 170 hours of stan dby t ime. F urthe rmore , up t o 400 h ours of standby time may be a ch ieved when the phone is off. Use only batteries and accessories approved by the communicator manufacturer for use with this particular communicator model. Use only chargers approved by the communicator manufacturer for charging a Lithium-ion battery . To cha rge a bat tery 1 Make sure that the battery is pr oper ly installed in the battery compartment. 2 Connect the charger lead to the connector at the bottom of the communicator, as shown in figure 11. 3 Connect th e charger to an AC wall outlet. If the phone is switched on , the CHARGING m essage appears on the di splay and the segments o f the batt ery indicator bar on the righ t side of the phon e display wil l start scrolling. Figure 1 1 Note: The communicator can be used normally during charging.
Gett ing started 28 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 4 When the battery is fully charged, the bars stop scrolling and four bars ar e displayed. You may now remove the charger plug from th e communicator. When the charge in the battery is low and only a few minutes of operation time remain, a warning tone will sound, and the m e ssage BA T TERY IS LOW will be repeated at regular intervals on the phon e display . When the charge level becomes too low for operation, the RECHARG E BA TTERY message will be displayed, accompanied by a warn in g tone. If you do not con nect the communicator to a char ge r , the com m unicator switches itself off. To use th e battery Use only batteries approved by the communicator manufacturer and recharge the battery only with the chargers approved by the manufacturer . With approved chargers and acc e ssories, the battery can be charged continuously . The battery need not be f ully discharged before rechar gi ng. When a charger is not in use, di sconnect it from the power source. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger for longer than a week, since ex cessive charging may shorten its life. If left unused, a fully charged battery will discharge itself over time. The battery can be ch arged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When th e operating time (talk-time and standby time) is noticeably shorter than normal, i t is time to buy a n ew battery . Temperature extremes will affect the ability of your battery to charge: allow it to cool down or warm up firs t. Battery operation time is affected by the following: w hether both the phone and the communicator interface are on, radio signal strength, various phone settings, the use of the backlight, and the length of the screen blanker period, see âÂÂSystem se ttingsâ on page 125. It is recommended always to keep a charged battery in the communicator . Keeping the battery charged maximises the lifetime of the backup battery supplying power to the real-time clock of the com municator . In case th e backup battery is dr ained, it will be automatically charged the next time a charged battery is reconnected to th e communicator . Always close the device cover before removing the battery . Closing the cover will save all data. Note: If t h e battery is fully discharged, it will take 30 - 60 seconds before the CHARGING message appears on the display and the battery indicator bar starts scrolling. After that, it may take 10-30 seconds before you can switch the phone on.
Gett ing started 29 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Note Use the battery only f or its intended purpose. Never use any charger or batter y which is dam aged or worn out. Do not short-circu it th e battery . Accidental short-c ircuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, clip or pen) causes direct connection of the and - terminals of the battery (metal strips at the bottom of the battery), for example, when you carr y a spare battery in your pocket or purse. S hort- circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity an d lifetime of the battery . Always try to keep the battery between 15ðC ( 59ðF) and 25ðC ( 77ðF). A communicator with a hot or cold battery may tem porarily not work, even when the battery is fully ch arged. The performance of Lithium-ion batteries is particularly limited in temperatures be low 0ðC ( 32ðF). Do not dispose of ba tterie s in a f ire! Batteries must be recycled or disposed of pr operly . Batteries must n ot be disposed of in municipal waste.
Gett ing started 30 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Special features 31 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 3. Special features This chapter explains functions that are common to most of the applications. âÂÂCommunicator featuresâ on page 3 1 goes through various f e atures of the device, and âÂÂDocument featuresâ on page 3 4 explains functions that apply to writing and viewing of documents. Communicator features To use the Menu button 1 Press the button on the left of the communicator display to open up a set of options which depend on the application you are in. 2 Move the selection frame over the desired option and press Selec t . The chosen option affects only the document, card or item that is currently selected, open, or being sent. The Menu may also contain th e option Settings with which you can change the settings of the application. The values of th ese settings will be used as defaults for that application. To use the Zoom bu tton Press the button on the left of the display to magnify the view on the display . Zooming is not a vailable on every occasion. To use the Backlight b utton Press the button on the left of the display to turn the backlight of the communicator display on and off. The backlight can be adjusted in the System settings. See âÂÂSystem settingsâ on page 125. Figure 1
Special features 32 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To use the Help butto n Press the button on the communicator keyboard to open up a help text on the current fun ction. The application icon in the indicator area on the left side of the display reminds you of th e application w here you requested help. The help deals with issues relating to the item that was on the display when you pressed the Help button. If no special help is available for the current item, a list of a vailable help topics is shown instead. To view the list of all help topics for the current application, press Ap plicatio n help . The following com mands become available: Open â Opens the selected topic. General help â Shows th e common help topics. Close â Closes the help. To view the list of general communicator topics, press General help . The following commands become availa ble : Open â Opens the selected topic. Appl ication h elp â Returns to the help topics list of the current item. Close â Closes the help. If the help topic you wanted was not among the help topics of the current item or in the general help, close the help, start the correct application and press the Help bu tton again. To use th e memory card A memory card may contain documents, contact databases, applications, backups, printer drivers, etc. When a memory card is inserted in the communicator , the memory card contents are marked with the memory card icon in the corresponding applications. For example, the documents on the memory card are located in a folder shown in the folders list of the Notes application. The items on the memory car d can be used in the same way as corresponding items in the communicator . Y ou can for example install a n d remove software to and from the memory card with the Install/Rem ove software application, and send messages to contacts in the contacts directory of the memory card. To inser t the memory c ard 1 Close the device cover and make sure that the phone is switched off. If it is on, press . 2 Remove the b attery: press the catch at the top of the battery and lift the battery away from the battery cavity. Note: T he m e mo r y c a r d i s n o t included in the sales package, but can be purchased separately.
Special features 33 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 3 Open the hatch at the back of the communicator: carefully open the lid by easing it up from th e r idges on both sides. 4 Slide the memory card under the memory card holder. Make sure that the gold contacts of the card are facing down and that the bevelled corner of the card is o n the right. See figure 2. 5 When th e card is secu rely in pla ce, close th e hatch, and r eplace th e battery. IMPO RTANT! Keep all memory cards out of small childrenâÂÂs reach. Make sure that the hatch is closed before replacing the battery! Do not remove the memory card in the middle of an operation. Be sure to close all m emory card applications before removing the card. If you are installing an application to the memory card and you need to reboot the communicator , do not remove the card until the reboot is complete. Otherwise the application f iles may be lost. If you have an application or a tone on both the memory card and the communicator , the one in th e communicator is used. To select several items Where multiselection is available, you can select several items at once. The commands you use affect all the selected items. Multiselection works in most lists. For example, you can select sever al contacts and remove them a t on ce in the Contacts directory , or select sever al documents and copy them to a memory card at the same time in the Notes application. There are two w ays to select several items: 1 Scroll to the item and press Ctrl-space bar. Or, 2 Press and hold Shift and move up or down the list with the arrow keys to the last sele cted item. To remove an item from the selection, scroll to the item and press Ctrl-space bar again. To cancel the entire selection, press Chr-Q. If you want to select every item in a list, press Ctrl-A. If you want to cancel the selection, press Ctrl-A again. Figure 2
Special features 34 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Document features To name a d ocument Every time you close a ne w document for th e first time, you will be asked to enter a name for th e document in the in put field. The highlighted name in the input field is the communicatorâÂÂs su ggestion for the n ame. To use shortcuts There are several shortcuts you can use in the document applications. The following table lists the available shortcuts: Shortcut Function Ctrl-A Ctrl-C Ctrl-X Ctrl-V Ctrl-Z Selects all Copies select ed text Cuts se lected text Past es selected text Cancels the most r e cent operation Ctrl-B Ctrl-I Ctrl-U Applies bold Applies italics Applies underlining Ctrl-T Ctrl-D Ctrl-M Adds current time Adds current date Adds userâÂÂs na me Ctrl-H Ctrl-E Moves the cursor to the beginning or the end of the document Ctrl-N Ctrl-P Open s the next ite m Opens th e pr evious i tem Chr-left or right arrow Moves the cursor to th e beginning or end of t he line Chr-up or down arrow Scrolls the list or docume nt view up or d own Shift-Ctrl-left or righ t arrow Selects the previous or t he next word Shift-right/left/up/ down arrow While Shift is held down , each press of a n arrow ke y selects one t ext characte r or line Shift-Chr-up or down arrow Selects text page by page inside a document
Special features 35 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To pri nt Press the Menu button and sele ct Print . Y ou can print various items, such as documents, pictures, and SMS messages. The connection type, header , paper size and the default printer must be defined in advance in the System settings. Se e âÂÂSystem settingsâ on page 125. Please, refer to the userâÂÂs guide of the printer for detailed sa fety instructions on the device. To chan ge the printing options, press Op tions in the printing view . The available options depend on the application you are in. To pr int usin g the in fr ared c onne ctio n 1 Go to the System application and set infrared as the connection type. See âÂÂSystem settingsâ on page 125. 2 Make sure the in fr ared port of th e communicator faces the infrared port of the printer. Keep the infrared conn ection clear. If the connection is obstructed for too long, for example, if something is moved between the infrared sensors or the communicator is m oved, printing is interrupted. 3 After the communicator has checked that you do not already have an active connection, it starts to scan for a printer. This means that you cannot print while you are, for exam ple , transferring files f rom the communicator to a PC. 4 If the printer cannot be found, a failure note is shown and the active application returns to th e display. If the correct printer is f ound, the printer driver is selected automatically and the display shows the name of the document and the selected printer. If the printer found is not recognised, press Pr inter s and select the correct printer driver. If the communicator does not have the correct driver for the pr inter, you can try printing the docu m ent using one of the availa bl e printer drivers. 5 Press Start to start printing. Note: For information on supported printers, see the Documentation section on the CD-ROM supplied in the communicator sa l es package, or see the Nokia Wireless Data Forum home page in the World Wide Web at http://www.f orum.nokia.com. Tip: More prin ter drivers can be installed with the PC Suite f or Nokia 9110 Communicator program or from th e CD-ROM included in the communicator sales package. See â To use the PC Suiteâ on p age 39.
Special features 36 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To pr int u sing the c abl e conne ctio n 1 Go to the System application and set cable as the connection type . See âÂÂSystem settingsâ on page 125. 2 Connect the communicator to a serial printer with the RS-232 adapter cable DLR-2. 3 Press Pr inters and select the correct pr inter driver. 4 Press Start to start printin g. Docume nt outbox When you send faxes, short m e ssages and m ail, they always go first to the Document outbox. The outbox prepares your document and then sends it via the phone. If the phone is off, or the cellular signal strength is ina de quate, the document will not be sent until the phone is switched on and the signal strength is sufficient. If the phone or fax called is off or busy during the first attempt, the Document outbox attempts to send the document nine more times. If the sending still fails, the commun i cator informs you of th is with a note. The Document outbox can be accessed in th e main views of the Fax, SMS, Mail and Notes applications, where it is shown at the bottom of th e folders list. To open the Document outbox, select it from the folder s list an d press Open . The main statuses tha t documents can have in the outbox a re: Sending â The document is currently being sent. W aitin g â The docume nt is waiting for sending to become possible, e.g. when the phone is switched on, cellular signal strength becomes adequate, previous phone call ends. Retr y [ti me] â Sending of the docu ment failed and it will be s e nt again at the time specified in th e square brackets. At [time] â The fax is waiting to be se nt at the time you have spec ified. See âÂÂFax settingsâ on page 74. Sending [current page/total pages] â T he number of the f ax page that is bein g sent and the total number of the pages. Figure 3
Special features 37 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Upon request â E-mail messages may h ave this status if the Send mail setti ng has been set to Upon request in the Mail settings. See âÂÂMail settingsâ on page 8 9. These messages will n ot be sent until you select one and press Star t . All mail with the Upon request status will be sent during the same connection . To speed up manually the sending of documents that have the Waiting , Retry , At [ti me] or Upon request status, select the docu m ent and press St ar t . The document(s) will be sent as soon as possible. A document is removed from th e Document outbox if sending succeeds or you cancel the sending by pressin g Cancel send ing . Received communication note When you open the cover of the communicator and have mis s ed calls, received faxes, short m essages or mail, or th ere are unsent docu ments in the Document outbox, a note will be shown, see figure 4. The note can be dismissed by pressing Cancel . To r e ad the received documents or to check who h a s made the missed calls, select the corresponding item on t he list and press View . To transfer data from older communicator models Y ou can make backups of the data in the Nokia 9000 Communicator or the Nokia 9000i Communicator with the Nokia Communicator Server program, and then restore the data to a same language version of the Nokia 91 1 0 Communicator . Y ou can transfer data in a similar way between the same language versions, e.g. from a Fin nish version of the Nokia 9000i Communicator to a Finnish version of the Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator . Figure 4 Note: You will not be able to restore the sett ings fr om Nokia 90 00 or 9000i communi cators to the Nokia 9110 Co mmunica tor.
Special features 38 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To transfer data be tween different language versions 1 If the languages are not compatible, e.g. if you want to transfer data from a Finnish version of the Nokia 9000i Communicator to a French version of the Nokia 9110 Commun icator, move your contacts and calendar data with the Nokia Commun icator Server program onto a PC using the Import/ Export contacts an d Import/Export calendar data applications. 2 Move your documents with the Nokia Communicator Server program onto a PC using the File transfer application. 3 Start the PC Suite for Nokia 9110 Communicator program on the PC an d transfer the contacts, calendar data , and documents to the Nokia 9110 Communicator.
Computer conn ectivity 39 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 4. Comput er connect ivity This chapter explains how to install the PC connectivity software on a PC, how to connect your commun i cator to the PC or an Apple Macintosh computer , and how to use the connectivity programs. To use the PC Sui te Y ou can connect your communicator to a s u itable PC with the PC Suite for Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator program. The PC Suite and its userâÂÂs gu ide are found on the CD-ROM supplied in th e communicator sales package. The PC Suite works with Windows 95/98 and NT 4.0, and requires IBM- compatible 486 PC or higher . When using the PC Suite, you only need to connect your communicator to a PC; everything else is done on the PC. Figure 1 Note: Making or answering ph one calls during a PC con nection is not recommended as it might disrupt the operation.
Computer conn ectivity 40 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To insta ll th e P C Sui te on a PC The CD-ROM should launch itself automatically after you have inserted it into the CD drive of your PC. If not, please, f o llow these steps: 1 Click the Windows âÂÂStartâ button; then click âÂÂRunâÂÂ. 2 If your PC has Windows 95, 98 or NT 4.0 (or later), type d:\9110.exe in the command line. If your PC has Windows 3.x, type d: \data\9 110_31.exe. Substitute the letter âÂÂdâ with the letter of the CD drive. 3 Press Enter. 4 Follow the instructions shown on the screen. To use the PC Suite with an infr ar ed connection 1 The IrDA software must be installed and running on the PC. To check if the IrDA driver is already installed on the PC, go to the Control Panel. If there is an icon called Infrared, the driver has been in stalled. 2 Make sure that the infrar ed port of the communicat or faces the infrared port of t he PC. Ke ep the in frare d link c lear: c heck the infrare d indi cators in the indicator ar ea, see âÂÂCom municator disp layâ on page 20. If the infrare d link is obstruct ed for too lo ng, for exam ple, if some thing is moved be tween the infrared senso rs or the communicat or is moved, the ope ration is interrupte d. 3 Start the PC Suite software on the PC. In the Preference dialog, select IR as the data transfer protocol, and the correct COM port. 4 Start the Infrared activation applica tion on your commun i cator and press Activate . See âÂÂInfrared activa tionâ on page 131. To use the PC Sui te with a cable connectio n 1 Connect the 9-pin end of the RS-23 2 adapter cable DLR-2 to the COM port of the PC, and the other end to the connector at the bottom of the communicator. See âÂÂConnectorsâ on page 26. 2 Start the PC Suite software on the PC. Note: The PC Suite for Nokia 911 0 Communicator program c an be found in the Menu under the headin g âÂÂPC and Macintosh softwareâÂÂ. Note: Remem ber to mak e backup copies of all important data! Tip: You can a lso u se the o ption al deskstand for easy PC c on nectivity. See the Accessories guide.
Computer conn ectivity 41 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Contacts The Contacts function of the PC Suite lets you create, edit and update contact cards on your Nokia 9 1 1 0 Communicator , and transfer them between a PC and your communicator . T o start the Contacts application, click on the Contacts icon in the main scr e en. Intellisyn c With the Intellisync function you can synchronise data between your communicator and a PC. 1 Conne ct your co mmunic ator to the PC. 2 Start the PC Suite progr am on the PC and click the I ntellisync icon in the main screen . 3 The Local (i.e. PC) tab is automatically selected. Click the Settings bu tton. Figure 2
Computer conn ectivity 42 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 4 This displays the PC Suite Configuration dialog with the Calendar, Contacts, and To-do list applications of your communicator. 5 Click on the communicator application you wan t to configure. 6 Click the Ch oose button to enter the Choose Translator dialog. The Choose Translator dialog lists all the PC applications that are compatible with the communicator application you selected. 7 Click the OK button in the Choose Translator dialog to return to the Configuration dialog. Now the PC application you selected appears next to the name of the com m unicator application. 8 Specify the application and, if necessar y, the file you want to synchronise. Note: You may be pr esented with a dialog containing the tabs Format and File. In the Format tab, select the address format that you are using for addresses in your communicator. The Contacts Format 5 is recommended. In the File tab, indicate if you want to synchronise Contacts on the communicator memor y, or on the mem ory card. After this, clic k OK. Note: The fir st time you select Microsoft Outlook in the Choose T ranslator dialog, use the Browse button to locate the dat a in your Outlook folder which you wish to synchronise. Note: In order to synchronise data successfully between your communicator and a PC application, click on the Advanced button after sele cting the application with which to do the sy nchronisation. In the Advanced settings dialog, click on Field Mapping and match the fields of the PC application with those fields of the communicator that have been marked with asterisks, s ee figure 3.
Computer conn ectivity 43 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 9 When you are ready to perform the operation, click the OK button at the bottom of the Configuration dialog. 10 Click the Synchronise button on the PC Suite opening sc r een. 11 If prompted, resolve data conflicts. 12 A confirmation prompt appears, showing you how many adds , changes, and deletes will be applied to each of your systems if you proceed w ith the operation. Click Accept to proceed, or Cancel to discon tin ue. Note: If you have a very large contact database in your communicator , you might not have enough free memory in the communicator to complete the synchronisation ope ration. In order to overcome this limitation, contacts can be divided in to several contact databases on m emory card. E a ch contact database can then be synchronised separately . The maximum amount of contacts that can be successfully syn ch ronised, depending on the amount of f ree memory in the communicator , is about 1000 contacts in each database. Refer to "Quick Start Tutorial" in Chapter 3 of the PC Suite for Nokia 91 1 0 Communicator User Gu ide found on the CD-ROM for instructions on how to synchronise contacts on the memory card. File transfer The File Transfer application lets you move, copy , paste, rename, and remove communicator and PC files. Figure 3
Computer conn ectivity 44 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 1 Establish a connection between your com municator and a PC. See above. 2 Start the PC S uite program on the PC and click the File Transfer icon in the main scre en. 3 Sele ct an item by clickin g on it in the F ile Transfer screen with the mous e and drag and drop it to the appr opriate PC dir ectory or co mmunicator fol der. Backup / Restore Figure 4 Note: Faxes a re transf erre d from the communicator to a PC in TIF F format; this means that you need to use Windows Im aging to view more than the first pag e of a fax.
Computer conn ectivity 45 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. The Backup/Restore function enables you to create backups of your communicator data on a PC and later restore the data in the communicator . 1 Establish a connection between you r communicator and a PC, see above. 2 Start the PC Suite progr am on the PC and click the Backup/Restore icon in the main screen. 3 Click on the Backup tab and select one of the following options: All device data backs up all of the data in your communicator, Selected device data allows you to select whether to backup your Calendar data, Contacts, Documents, or Settings, or select Memory card data to backup the information on your memory card. 4 In the âÂÂBackup Pathâ box, specify the location where you want the backups to be stored. The backup name is as signed automatically. 5 Enter a number between 1 and 9 9 in the âÂÂNumber of backup s toresâ box. 6 Click the Backup button. To restore data, click on the Restore tab . Specify the location of the backup in the âÂÂBackup stored inâ box. In the lower box, click on the data you want to restore. Click Restore to restore the backup to your communicator . Insta ll / Remove The Install/Remove Software function lets you install and remove software from your communicator . 1 Establish a connection between you r communicator and a PC, see above. 2 Start the PC Suite program on the PC and click the Install/Remove icon in the main screen. 3 Click the Install tab and en ter the location of th e software you want to install in the âÂÂSelect Path â box. 4 Click on the software you wan t to install in the box below. 5 Click the Install button. To remove softwar e from your communicator , click th e Remove tab . Select th e software you want to r e move in the box a n d click the Remove button. Note: If you install to the Nokia 9110 Communicator software made for the older communicator models, be aware that the gr eyscales of the devices a re different. Therefore, the display may see m lighter. Although this difference does not affect the functioning of the software, always try to install the version made especially for th e Nok ia 91 10 Commu nica tor.
Computer conn ectivity 46 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Import / E xport The Import/Export function can be used to transfer calendar and contacts files between your commun icator and a PC. 1 Establish a connection between your communicator and a PC, as shown above. 2 Start the PC Suite program on the PC and click the Import/Export icon in the main s creen. 3 Click the Export tab and choose one of three options: Calendar data; Contacts; Contacts File on Memory C ard. 4 In the âÂÂSelect the PC file to createâ box, specify the name and path of the PC file you wan t to create. 5 Click the Export button. To import a file from a PC to your communicator , click the Import tab and select which items to import. Specif y the PC file that you want to transfer to your communicator and click the Import button. To use the Nokia Communicator Server For Windows 3.1 1 and Apple Macintosh users the CD-ROM in the communicator sales package contains the Nokia Communicator Server program. With the Nokia Communicator Server you can install and use the communicator applications that r equire PC connectivity , see chapter 12 "System" on page 125. Y ou need to con nect your comm u nicator to a PC and start the necessary application on the communicator . The Nokia Communicator Server also works with W in dows 95 and N T . To install the Nokia Co mmunicator Server o n a PC 1 Insert the diskette into the diskette drive. Note: The English version of the File transfer, Import/export contacts, and Import/Export calendar data applications that can be used with the Nokia Communicator Server can be installed to your communicator from the di skette included in the sales package. Other language versions are found on the C D-ROM. Tip: Y ou do not need this software if you use the PC Suite for Nokia 9110 Communicator. See âÂÂTo use the PC Su iteâ on page 39.
Computer conn ectivity 47 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 2 In the Windows Program Manager, click on the âÂÂFileâ menu. 3 Click on menu item âÂÂRunâ and type a:\server in th e command line. Substitute the letter âÂÂaâ with the letter of the diskette drive. 4 Press Enter. 5 Follow the instructions shown on the screen. To use the Nokia Communicator Server with an infrared connection 1 Follow the fir st two steps for i nstalling the PC Su ite. 2 Start the Nokia Communicator Se rver software on the PC. 3 Start the desired PC connectivity application on your communicator. Remember to set infrared as the connection type. To use the No kia Communicator Ser ver with a cable conne ction 1 Connect the 9-pin end of the RS-232 adapter cable DL R -2 to the COM port of the PC, and the other end to the connector at the bottom of the communicator. See âÂÂConnectorsâ on page 26. 2 Start the Nokia Communicator Server software on the PC. Check that the COM port reported by the software is correct. 3 Start the desired PC connectivity application on your communicator. Remember to set cable a s the connection type. Nokia Communicator Ser ver for MacOs To connect to a n Apple Macintosh, you must have the Nokia Communicator Server application running on th e Macintosh a nd a cable connection established between the communicator and th e Macintosh. The Nokia Communicator Server application is compatible w ith MacOS 7.5 or newer versions, provided that they are equipped with a RS-422 serial port. Macs equipped with a USB port can be connected to a communicator using a USB to serial adapter . To connec t to an Apple Macinto sh RS-422 serial port , you need to have an Ap ple Mac modem cable (not pr ovided by Nokia) c onnected t o your Mac. To co nnect the modem cable to the DL R-2 cable ( included in the sale s package), you need to have an 9M25F adapter (not provi ded by Nokia), be cause the Mac modem cable has 25 pins and the DL R-2 RS cable has only 9 p ins. With t his cable combination you can use the Nokia Communicator Serve r software for MacOs. The PC suite connectivity s oftware does not support MacOS. Tip: For information on how to install new software on your comm u nicator with th e Nokia Communicator Server, see âÂÂInstall/ Remove softwareâ on page 134.
Computer conn ectivity 48 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Contac ts 49 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 5. Contacts The Contacts application is used for creating, e diting, and managing all contact information, such a s phone numbers, addresses and speed dials, and for viewing logs of all incoming and outgoing voice, da ta and fax calls and SMS messages. The Telephone, F ax, SMS, Calendar and Mail applications al l use information found in the Contacts di rectory . Contacts directory The Contacts main view shows two win dows: on the left is th e Contacts directory , which is a list of all contact cards, and on the right is the currently selected contact card. The active window is surrounded by a dar k frame. You can toggle between the windows with the Tab key . The contact cards are listed in the Contacts directory in alphabetical order according to th e name in the Name field of each card. To find contact cards 1 Move the selection frame in the Contacts directory with the arrow keys until the contact you are searching for is shown within the sele ction frame. Or, 2 Enter text into the search field. The search looks for matches in the Name , Company and Address fiel ds. The search r e sults can be cleared by removing characters one by one from the search field wi th the backspace key. Figure 1 Tip: Y ou will find the Club Nokia Careline contact card in the Contacts directory. Club Nokia Careline answers questions and offers instr u ctions over th e phone.
Contac ts 50 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To open the selected contact card, press Open . To remove the s elected contact card, press Delete . To use the Menu button Pressing the Menu button in the Contacts directory opens a new set of options: Individual log â Opens the Individual log of the selected contact, see âÂÂLogsâ on page 56. General log â Open s the General log. Duplicate card â Creates a duplicate of the selected card. SIM card memory â Shows the contents of your SIM card. Copy to SIM â Copies the selected con tact(s) to the SIM card memory . Crea te group â Cr eates a new contac t group, see âÂÂContact groupsâ on page 55. List groups â Opens a list of all contact groups. New contact s database â Creates a new contacts d atabase to the memory card. Rename contacts database â Y ou can give the memory card con tacts database a new nam e . Copy contacts â Y ou can copy con tacts to and from your memory card . Move contacts â You can move contacts to and from your m emory card. Contact info â Shows the n umber of contacts and th e amount of contact d ata. Settings â Enables you to change the following settings: Contact card template â You can de fine which fields are included in all new contact cards you create. Changes made to the template affect all new, but not existing contact cards. You cannot enter text into the fields of the template. Log length â You can define how recent contacts will be listed in the General and Individual logs. Select the n e w log length and press OK . The possible values are: Zero / 10 days / 30 days / 1 year / User defined: days (0 â 365 days ). To create a new contacts database on your memory card To create a new contacts databa se on your memory card, press the Menu button and select New contacts database . Note: I f y o u h a v e a m e m o r y c a r d i n s e r t e d i n t h e communicator, the memory card c ontact databases are sh own as folders in the Contacts main view. When you open a folder, you can only call and send messages to the contacts in that database.
Contac ts 51 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To copy and move contacts to and from the new database, select the contact(s) you want and press the Menu button again. Then scroll down to select either Copy contacts or Move contacts . To view the contacts da tabase, press Open . T o make a call to a contact on the database, select the contact and go to the Telephone application. To make contact cards 1 To make a new contact car d , press New in the Contacts main view. 2 When the new contact card ope ns, enter the contact inform ation in the various fields. Use the arrow keys to move from one field to another. You can add lines to the Address and Note fields with the Enter key. 3 To return to the Contacts directory, press Close . When storing phone numbers or DTMF sequences, you can use h yphens and spaces to arran ge the appearance of th e strings. This will not affect th e way the numbers or D TMF tones will be dialled. To add new fields to a contact card 1 Press Fields in the currently open ed contact card. See figure 2. 2 Press Add f ield . A pop-up box opens, listing the ava ilable fields. Tip: Whe n entering phone number s into the Tel f ields, storing a char acter in front of the country code will allow you to use the same phone number abroad . Tip: It is possible to import contacts from a PC or certain handheld devices by using th e IntelliMigrate program on the CD-ROM supplied in the sales pac kage of the communicator.
Contac ts 52 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 3 Select a field and press OK . There can only be one Name , Job title , Company , Note and Password field. To customise the lab el of a field 1 Press Fields in the currently opened contact card. 2 Select a field and press Change l abel . 3 Select one of the predefined labels or scroll dow n to the field with a dotte d line and write the label text, e.g. Modem , and press OK . To remove the selected field, press Delet e field . The Name field cannot be removed. Contact card option s When you pr ess Options in an opened contact card, the following options become available: Ringing tone â Y ou can set a specific ringing tone for each contact in the Contacts directory . Select a tone from th e list, and press Select . The icon appears at the top of the contact card. See figure 2. In or der to use this Figure 2 Note: Th e Tel /Fax field is f or alternating ca lls, the Tel(Se rver) f ield for sending bookings to remote calendar se rvers, and the Password field for the calendar booking password. See âÂÂMultiple callsâ on page 62, and âÂÂCalendar bookingâ on page 121. Note: Remember to put wireless phone numbers into the Tel(GSM) f ields of the contact cards. Othe rwise you cannot send SMS messages to these number s.
Contac ts 53 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. function, however , the In dividual ringing tones setting must first be set on. See âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. Attached image â You can attach a picture of the contact to the contact card. Y ou can then send the picture with a business card, and the picture is shown on the display when the per son calls you. The picture must first be stored in JPEG for m at in the Contact images subfolder of the Downloaded files fol der , where it is then selected. Choose a picture and press OK . When a picture is at tached to a contact card, it is automatically adjusted to the proper size. If there is an old picture in the contact card, it will be replaced by the new pictur e. If you want to keep the origin al picture, make a copy of it and give it a different name, or move the copy to another folder , be fore you attach th e new picture. Speed d ials â Y ou can set a s peed dial nu mber for the s elected c ontact card. To set speed d ials Speed dialling is a quick way to call frequ ently used phone numbers. Y ou can assign speed dials to eight phone n umbers. Number 1 is reser ved for calling your voice mailbox. For in formation on how to use the speed dials, see âÂÂTo use speed diallingâ on page 15 1. 1 Press Op tions in an opened contact card and select Speed dials . All phone number fields of the contact card are shown. 2 Select a field to which you want to assign a speed dial and pr ess Change . 3 Select a number and press OK . The speed dial number will be shown in the contact card with the icon . See figure 2. Note: If the communicator ca n not find the relevant contact card within three seconds from receiving an incoming call, the default ringing tone Grande Valse will r eplace the selected individual ringing tone. This may happ en if you have ma ny hundr eds of co ntacts cards stored in y our communica tor . Note: If you want to attach a picture to a contact card located in the contacts database of the memory card, the picture must first be stored in the Con tact images folder of the memory card.
Contac ts 54 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To change or remove spee d dials 1 Select the speed dial you want to change or remove and press Change . 2 Move the selection frame to the new location and press OK . If you want to remove a speed dial location, ch oose None . To store D TMF tones For information on how to send DTMF tones, see âÂÂMultiple callsâ on page 62, or âÂÂTo send D TMF tonesâ on page 152. If you need both a voice and a D TMF phone number for the contact, store the DTMF sequence in the Tel field, in which case the phone number and the DTMF sequence must be separated by one of the special characters in table 1. Or add a DTM F field to the contact car d with the Add fie ld command. To use the Menu button Pressing the Menu button in a n opened contact card opens a n ew set of options: Duplicate card â C reates a copy of the curren t card. Copy contents â Copies the contents of the card to a clipboard. Y ou can add this information to doc u ments by pr e ssing Ctrl-V. Next card â Open s the next contact card in the directory. Previous card â Opens the previous contact card in the directory . Fetch â If you have selected the URL field of a contact card with the selection frame, pres sing Fetch starts the WWW application and opens a connection to the first UR L address in the field. Belongs to groups â Shows all the groups of which the current contact i s a member . To view the contact info r mation on your SIM card 1 Press the Menu button in the Cont acts directory, and select the SIM card memor y option. 2 Select the contact w ith the selection frame and press Open . Character Function * and # May be used if th e DTMF service requires them. p (pause) Inserts a pau se of 2.5 seconds in front of, or between, DTMF digits. w (wait) When the âÂÂwâ character is stored in a sequence, the rest of the sequence is not sen t until you press Send again in the Telephone application. Table 1
Contac ts 55 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To add a new contact to the SIM card m emor y , press New . To r emove the selected contact(s) from the SIM card me mory , press Clear . To return to the Contacts main view , press Close . If you press the Menu button in the SIM contents view , the f ollowing options become available: Sort by name/Sort by location â Ar ranges the contacts in alphabetical order or in the order of their memory location. Copy SIM contacts â Copies the selected con tact(s) to the Contacts directory . SIM info â Shows the amount of data in the S IM card memory . Contact gr oups Y ou can create contact groups in order to be able to s e nd mail or short messages to a group of people at the same time. See figure 3. To cre ate a g roup 1 Use multiselection in the Contacts directory to select the contacts you want to include in the group. 2 Press the Menu button an d select the Create group option Y ou can also create an empty group by pressing the Menu button and selecting Create group , and add members later . See below . When you close a new group contact card for th e first time, you will be asked to enter the name of the group. To add new contacts to a gr oup 1 Open the group contact card and press Add . A list of contacts opens. 2 Select the contact(s) you want and press Add . Note: The SIM card cannot be accessed if the Fixed diallin g function is on. See âÂÂSettings (Menu 4)â on page 159.
Contac ts 56 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To remove contacts fr o m a group, open the group contact card, select the contact(s) to be removed and press Remove . To use the Menu button When you press the Menu button in an opened group contact card, the following options become available: Rename group â Allows you to give the grou p a new name. Belongs to groups â Shows all the groups to which th e selected contact belongs. List of groups â Opens a list of all contact groups. Logs The Contacts application shows all com m unication events as two logs: th e General log shows all, or cert ain types of, communication events in chronological order . The Individual log shows a list of all communication events relating to the selected contact . To access the log s 1 Press the Menu button in th e Contacts directory. 2 Select either Individual log or General log . To eras e the contents o f the log 1 Press Cl ear list . 2 A pop-up box open s to let you define how old com munications you want to remove. The clearing procedure reflects o n the other lo g as well. To make a new contact card 1 Open the General log. Figure 3 Note: Remote mailbox, Terminal and Internet connections are logged as data calls.
Contac ts 57 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 2 Select a log event and press Create car d . If the contact card already exists, the command is dimmed. To view only certain communicatio n types 1 Open the General log an d press Filt er . 2 Select the communication type y ou want to view and pr ess OK .
Contac ts 58 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Telephone 59 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 6. Telephone The Telephone application is started by pressing the Tel. application button on the keyboard. Some of the operations explained here can also be made via the phone. Y ou can have two separate phone lines, see âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on pa ge 65. To make a call In order to make phone calls, a valid SIM card must be inserted and the phone must be switched on. There are thr ee ways to make a call. To make the call manually 1 Enter the telephone number in the search field. 2 Press Call . To call a number in th e Telephone d irectory When you have no active voice calls, the Telephone m ain view shows th e Telephone directory , see figure 1. Contact cards th at do not contain any phone numbers appear dim med in the dir ectory and ca n not be selected. 1 Select a contact in the Telephone directory either by scrollin g or by using the sear ch field. 2 Press Call . If the contact has more than one phone numbe r, a pop-up box opens, listing all th e contactâÂÂs phone numbers. Ch oose a number from the list and press Cal l . Note: Opening or closing t he cover does not affect active phone calls. If you have made a voice ca ll via the phone and you ope n the cover, the Teleph one application starts a utomatically. You can continue th e call after pressing Audi o on . See âÂÂHandsfree modeâ on page 61. Note: When making a call, make sure that the a nten na at the top of the communicator is u p.
Telephone 60 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To call a number in the Recent calls list 1 Pres s the Rece nt calls command. 2 Select the Dialled, Received or Missed calls list and press Open . 3 Select a n umber from the list and press Call . Once you have made the cal l, you can close the cover and continue the call with the phone, unless you want to use the ha ndsfree option, s ee âÂÂHandsfree modeâ on page 6 1. To call a number on the SI M card 1 Press the Menu button in the T e lephone directory. 2 Select S IM car d me mory and press Select . If you wish to return to the T elephone directory , press the Menu button again and select Telephone directory . To check call costs 1 Press the Menu button in the Telephone directory. 2 Select Show call costs and press Se le ct . To an swer a c all 1 When you receive a call while having the communicator cover open, a note about the incoming call is shown on the display. If you are called by a person who has a contact card in your Contacts directory, as in the figure 2, the callerâÂÂs name is shown on the note, if this feature is supported by the network. To answer the call, pr ess Answer . Or, Figure 1 Tip: When you open the Dialle d, Received or Missed calls li st and select a contact, Create card enables you to make a contact card for the contact.
Telephone 61 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 2 Close the device cover an d answer the call via the ph one by pressing . If you do not want to take th e call, press End cal l or . The caller will hear the alerting tone ch ange to a âÂÂline busyâ tone. To use the Menu button If you press the Menu button while having a call active, the following options become available: Send DTMF â Allows y ou to se nd D TMF tones. Select one of the prede fined sequences, or enter a ne w sequence in t h e input field. V oice recorde r â Enables you to re cord voice memos. See âÂÂV oice r ecorderâ on page 144. More info â Allow s you to vie w the other par tyâÂÂs cont act car d and indiv idual lo g. Settings â Enables you to chan ge the Te leph one settings, see âÂÂT e lephone settingsâ on page 65. Handsfree mode When you have a ca ll, the handsfree mode allows you to s pe ak and listen to the communicator from a short distance wh en the cover is open. This function is not available when the cover is closed. The Telephone setting A u dio when cover opened determines whether th e handsfree mode is activated automa tically after you open the cover . T o set th e handsfree mode on manually , press Au dio on . After the audio has been set on , the command changes to Vol u m e . Press V olume to adjust the speaker volume or to turn the audio off. The indicator shows the chosen volu m e level. Note: You cannot have two active calls at the same time. If the Call waiting network service is activated in your SIM card, the active call is autom atically put on hold when you a nswer the new incomin g call. Tip: If you do not want your communicator to alert, a quick way to make the communicator silent is to close the cover and pr ess the key on the phone. Press the key again until the selection frame is on the Silent profile. To select the profile, press and hold .
Telephone 62 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Multip le calls When you have made a call, information about the call is sh own on the display . In addition to the active c all, you can have a call on hold and a waiting call at the same time. T he conference call, which can accommodate up to five remote participants, is handled as a single call. To switch between multiple calls, u se the arrow keys. The command buttons change according to the status of the selected call. For ex ample, a call on hold can be changed to a n active call by pressing Activa te . The call information may include the f ollow ing (see figure 2): The name or phone number of th e caller and a pi cture, if available. The status of the call: active, on h o ld, waiting, or conference, and whether the audio is off. The call timer displays how much time has expired since the beginning of the call. The timer also counts t he time spent on hold. The call cost counter shows the cumulative cost of th e call, if this network service is available and the call cost setting is on. Y ou can determine w hether to calculate the call costs in currency or charging units in the T elephone settings, se e âÂÂT elephone settin gsâ on page 65. To end a call, select the call with the ar row keys and press End call . Figure 2 Note: The actual in voice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending upon network features, rounding-off f or billing, taxes and so forth.
Telephone 63 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To make a new call 1 If you already have an active call and a call on hold, drop one of the calls or merge them into a conference call. 2 Press New call and make the new call normally. T he previous call will be put on hold. To make a conf erence call The conference call is a network service. Contact your ne twork operator to check if this service is available. In a conference call, you and up to five remote persons can hear each other simultaneously . 1 Make the firs t call norma lly. 2 Once this person has a n swered, make a call to the second participant by pressing New c all . The first call is pu t on hold. 3 Wait until the second person answers the call. 4 To include the first participant in the call, press Conference ca ll . If you want to include a new pe rson in the conference call, r epeat this operation. 5 When all participants have be en included in the conference call, the best voice quality is achieved by closing the cover and continuing the call via the phone. To en d the c all wi th a c onfer ence c all pa rticip ant 1 Press Confe rence commands . 2 Select the caller fr om the list of participants (figure 3 ) and press Drop . To talk p r ivatel y with one of the con ference call part icipants 1 Press Confe rence commands . 2 Select a participant from th e list and press One to one . The call is n ow split into two: the conference call is on h old and the one-to-one call is active. 3 Once you have finished the private conversation, you can connect the person back into the con fer ence call by pressing Co nference call . Figure 3
Telephone 64 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To transfer calls The call transfer is a network serv ice which enables you to connect two calls together and disconnect yourself fr om both calls. 1 When you have one call on hold, and another call active or an outgoing call alerting, press Transfer to connect the calls together. To answer a wait ing call Call waiting is a networ k service to which you must subscribe before you can use it. Call waiting is set on in the Telephone settings, see âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. 1 When you receive a new call while you alr e ady have an ac tive call, you w i ll hear a sound an d see a note informing you of the new incoming ca ll. 2 Press Answer . The previous call will be p ut on hold. To send DTMF tones when you have an active call 1 Key in the digits from the communicator keyboard. Each keystroke will generate a DTMF tone which will b e transm itted dir ectly. Besid es the numbe rs 0 - 9, you can also use the ch aracters p , w , * and # when sending DTMF tones. For information on the functions of these characters, see âÂÂTo m ake contact cardsâ on page 51. Or alternative ly , 1 Press the Menu button and select Send DTMF . The DTMF sequences stored in the other partyâÂÂs contact ca rd are shown. For information on how to store DTMF sequences, see âÂÂTo make con tact cardsâ on page 51. 2 Select a DTMF sequen ce. You ca n edit the sequence, or, if there are no stored sequences, you can write a new DTMF sequ ence into the input field. 3 Press Send . To make alternating calls An alternating call is ma de as a voice call, bu t it changes into a fax call. An alternating call can be made to a fax box, for example: you initiate the call as Note: Calls can be transferred only if all calls are voice calls, not fax or data calls, and n one of the calls is a conference call. Tip: Y ou cannot access the stored DTMF sequences during a conference call. However, you c an send DT MF tones during a conference call by keying in the digits from the keyboard.
Telephone 65 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. a voice call, but it changes into a fax call when your fax box starts to s e nd you your faxes . To make alternating calls, you need to add a special Tel /Fa x field to th e contact cards of th e recipients of your alternating calls. See âÂÂT o make contact cardsâ on page 5 1. Y ou can also chan ge the mode of the call from voice to fax manually by pressing Change call mode . Alternating calls cannot be put on hold or incorporated into a conference call. Telepho ne settings Press Settings in the Telephone main view to open a list of several settings groups. To change the settings 1 Select a settings group and pr ess Change to open it. 2 Select a setting and press Cha nge . The current value of the setting is displayed after the setting name, unless the setting is one the network services: call diverting, barring or waiting. See the following s e ctions. Profile se ttings The profile set tings are used for sel ecting the op erating environment for t he commu nicato r , and for m odifyin g the pro file featur es. One pr ofil e is always in use. Profile in use â Pre ss Change and select the profile you want to use. Pr ess OK . Profil es â With this s etting you can m odify the profi les. The av ailable pro files are: Gener al â Th e normal profile of th e communicator. Silent â You can set this pr ofile on when you want all the alert tones to remain silent. Meeting â You can specify how the communicator operates when you are in a meeting. Outdoor â You can specify how the communicator operates when you ar e outdoors. Figure 4
Telephone 66 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Pager â You can set th is profile on when you want the communicator to act as a pa ger, i.e. the ringing tone sounds only on ce and received SMS messages alert. Flight â Sets on th e flight profile, see âÂÂFlight profileâ on page 6 9 . Car â The car profile is set on automatically when the communicator is connected to a car kit. Headset â The headset profile is set on automatically when a headset is connected to the communicator. Press Rena me to change the names of the profiles. Press Edit to modify the following features of a profile: All alert tones â You can set the incoming call alert an d other alarms to: Ringing â The n ormal alert tone is used. Ascending â The normal alert tone is used, bu t the volume of the tone increases gra dually. Ring once â The alert tone sounds only once. Beep once â A single beep is heard when you r eceive a call or a message. Caller groups â The alert tone will only sound when you receive a call from a member of the selected ca lle r group. See below . Silent â All the sounds, e xcept the alarm clock, are turned off. Whatever the chosen setting, an incoming call is always indicated by a note. Ringing volume â Adjusts the rin ging volume: 1 is the lowest, 5 the highest. Ringing tone â Determines th e ringing tone. To compose your own ringing tones, see âÂÂComposerâ on page 141, and to record a ringing tone with the Digital voice recor der , see âÂÂVoice recorderâ on page 144. Communicator key click â Sets the com municator keyboard sou nd to Of f , Typ e 1 or Ty pe 2 . Phone key click â Adjusts the phone keypad sound: 1 is the l owest, 3 the highest, Off turns off the keypad sound. Divert all voice calls â Y ou can divert all your incom in g voice calls t o another phone number . T he option Default diverts uses the diverts set in the N etwork settings. See be low . Phone lights â The phone display and keypad lights are either permanently on, or they re main on for the pre-set time period. Available in the car profile on ly . Automatic answer â All calls are automatically answered. Available in the car profile only . Caller groups â Set one or several contact groups to Ye s , an d only those calls that come from people belonging to these groups, alert. All the oth er sounds
Telephone 67 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. are turned off, which also means that you wonâÂÂt be alerted if you receive an SMS or a fax f rom a member of a caller group. Call sett ings Own nu mber se nding â You can select whether to k eep your phone number hidden from the recipients of your phone calls. Do not use this function unless it has been activated for your SI M card. On â Your number is shown to all th e recipients of your calls. Off â Your number is hidden from all the recipients of your calls. Preset â The value stored in the network is used. Next on â Your n umber is shown to the r ecipient of your next call. Next off â Your number is hidden from the recipient of you r next call. Call cost settings â Y ou can set on the call cost counter and modify its settings. Changing the settings require s the PIN2 code. Audio when cover opened â Determin es whether the handsfree mode is set on automatically af te r you open th e cover . Call timer display â If set to On , the call timer is shown during calls. Automatic redialling â When this function is set on and y ou call a number that is busy or does not answer , the communicator will attempt to call the number until the call is connected. Phone line in use â If your network and SIM card support this feature, you can have two different subscriptions for voice calls . These subscriptions are refe rred t o as Line 1 and Li ne 2. Ea ch line may h ave sep arat e sett ings fo r som e functions. With this setting, you can determine which phone line is currently in use for all outgoing calls. Default call mode â In some ne twork s you ha ve the sa me phone nu mber fo r all your voice, fax and data ca lls. I f you want to receive any calls , you must set your phone to some answering mode. The available modes are V oice , Fa x , Data and V oice/Fax . Network settings The network services may not b e supported by all operators, or you m ay have to subscribe to them. Information about the s tatu s of these ser vice s is stor e d in the network. Therefore, the current settings are not shown until you request the information from the n etwork by pressin g Get status . While the communicator is making a request to the network, a qu ery note is shown on the display . After a successf u l request, the new status now appears in the settings lis t. To cancel all call diverts or barrings, press Canc el call diverts or Cancel ca ll barring s .
Telephone 68 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Voice call di verting â This network service allows you to direct your incoming voice calls to another phone n umber . 1 Choose a dive rt option: Divert all calls â All incoming calls are diverted. Divert when phone is busy â Incoming calls are diverted wh en the phone is busy. Divert when n ot answered â In coming calls are diverted when you do not answer them . Delay allows you to choose th e time period after which the call is diverted. The available time periods are 5 , 10 , 15 , 20 , 25 and 30 seconds. Divert if not reachable â Incoming calls are diverted when the phone is switched off or outside the network service area. 2 Press Ch ang e , and select one of th e followin g options: To â Enter the number to which you w ant to divert the calls. To voice mailbox â Calls will be diver te d to your voice mailbox. The ph one number of the voice mailbox must be s e t in Other settin gs. Off â Calls are n ot diver ted. Voice call barring â This network service enables you to restrict outgoing and incoming voice calls. If you take the call ba rr ing into use or change the barring settings, you will need the barring password, which you obtain from the network operator . The available options a re: All outgoing calls â Calls cannot be made. All international cal ls â Calls cannot be m a de to foreign cou ntries. International except home country â Calls can be made only within the current country a nd to your home country, i.e. the country wher e your network operator is located. All incoming calls â Calls cannot be received. Incoming calls when abroad â C alls cannot be received when you are outside your home country. Note: If you have subscribed to the Alternate phone line service, this setting applies only to th e selected phone line. Note: W h e n s e c u r i t y f e a t u r e s w h i c h r e s t r i c t calls are in use (call barring, call diverting), calls may be possible to certain emergency numbe rs in s ome networ ks (e.g. 112 o r other official emergency n umber).
Telephone 69 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Call waiting â When this network service is set on, the network will notify you of a new incoming voice call while you have an active call. Y ou will hear a sound and see th e callerâÂÂs name or phone number , and the tex t W AITING on the display . Other settings V oice mailbox nu mber â Set a new or change the phone number of your voice mailbox. You can call your voice mailbox by pressing Voice mailbo x in the Telephone main view . Individual ringing tones â You can set the individual ringing tones function on or off. See âÂÂT o make contact cardsâ on page 5 1. Flight profile The flight profile prevents you from accidentally turning on your phone in an aircra ft. To set on the fl ight profile 1 Press Set ti ngs in the Telephone main view . 2 Choose Profiles and press Change . 3 Scroll to Profile in use , press Change and select Flight . 4 Press OK . With the flight pr ofile active, you m ay read previously downloaded mail, wr ite mail, notes, short messages, faxes, or update your calendar . Once you have left the aircraft, you can turn off th e flight profile by pressing Ex it pr ofile , turn on the phone by pressing , and your short m essages, faxes and mail will be sent automatically. When the communicator is in th e flight profile, emergency calls must be made from the phone: 1 Press . The phone displa y will read FLIGHT PROFILE ACTIVE. 2 While the FLIGHT PROFILE ACTIVE text is visible (for approximately five seconds) you can dial t h e emergency number, e .g. 112. 3 Press . Note: Your network operator may be able to update your voice mailbox number via a specia l SMS m essage. Contact your network operator fo r details.
Telephone 70 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. IMPORTANT ! Never use th e phone wh en in an ai rcraft. If the aircraft personnel allow use of the communicator interface, you MUST activate the flight profile. The flight profile will allow u se of the communicator interface only and will pr event use of th e phone. Be aware that all communications applications, Te l ephone, Fax, SMS, Mail, and Intern et, require use of the phone. Figure 5
Fax 71 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 7. Fax Fax is started by pressing the Fax application button on the communicator keyboard. To send an d r eceive faxes, the phone must be on; the network you are using must support fax calls; and the fax serv ice must be activated for your SIM card. Contact your home s e rvice provider for details. When a fax is being sent or received, the FAX indicator appears in the indicator row of the displa y. The Fax main view shows: Own texts folder â Contains all created faxes, short messages, memos, notes and mail stored on the communicator . Received faxes folder â Contains all recei ved faxes. Document outbox â See âÂÂDocument featuresâ on page 34. To send faxes To wri te a new fax 1 Press Write fax i n the Fax main view. 2 Writ e the fax. 3 Press Re c ipient . T he Fax directory open s. To send your own text as a fax 1 Select the Own texts folder in the Fax ma in view and press Open . 2 Select a document and press Open . 3 Press Re c ipient to access the Fax directory. To forward a receive d fax 1 Select the Received faxes folder in the Fax m ain view and press Op en . 2 Select a fax and press Open . 3 Press Forward to access the Fax directory. Note: Voice calls cannot be made or receive d when a fax is being sent or received.
Fax 72 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To select a recipient 1 Select a contact in the Fax directory and press Select . See figur e 1. The names of contacts who h ave no fax number are dimmed and cannot be selected. 2 If the selected con tact has several fax numbers, a pop-up box opens. Choose a number from th e list and press Select . If there is no contact card in the Contacts directory for the recipient to whom you are sending the fax, pre ss Enter numbe r to enter the fax n umber manually , or obtain the information from the Recent num be rs list by pr e ssing Recent numbers . The list contai ns the fax numbers with wh ich you have recently had contact. Choose a number and press Select . Fax cover page an d send options The fax cover page con tains three fields, see f igure 2. You can edit the entries in all the cover page fie lds. The From f i eld is always filled automati cally according to the U ser data card in t he System appli cation. See âÂÂU ser dataâ on page 1 30. To adjust the fax sending options, press Send options . The send options are: Cover page , Send re solution , Logo file , Signature file , Begi n sending , Resen d , and ECM . For more information, see âÂÂF ax settin gsâ on page 74. To ch ange an option, select it and press Change . Figure 1 Tip: Forward options allows you to select the specific pages you want to send: All , This page , or Pages . Choo se Pages to enter the page numbers, first throu gh last, e.g. 3- 5, that you want to forwa rd. Tip: If you press Clear both li sts in the R ecent numbers view, all in formation in the lists is removed. When you open one of the lists and select a con tact, Creat e card enables you to create a contact card for the contact.
Fax 73 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To send th e fax, pr ess Send . Th e fax is han ded over to the Docu ment ou tbox, which will send the fax as soon as possible. To receiv e faxes Faxes a r e received automatically , provided that th is service is av ailable and that the phone is on and within cellular coverage. All received f axes go to the Received faxes folder. If you do not wish to receive the f ax, close the cover and pr ess . When a new fax has been received, you will hear a tone - unless the system is set to a silent pr ofile - and an information note is shown on the display. To read a received fax There ar e two ways to read a received fax: 1 When you receive a note informing you that you have received a fax, press View . Or, 2 Press Cancel to dismiss the note. You can then open the Receive d faxes folder, wher e unread faxes are marked with . Sel ect the fax and press Open . The fax vie wer opens . Y ou can use the up and down arrow keys to scroll the fax. The left and right arrow keys can be used f or horizontal scrolling. To remove the viewed fax, press Dele te . Figure 2 Note: In case the sen ding fails, be sure to save all your important faxes. Tip: A list of shortcuts for viewing faxes and other operations ca n be found in âÂÂDocument featuresâ on page 34.
Fax 74 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To zoom th e vi ewed fax 1 Press View . A new set of commands becom es available. See figure 3. 2 Each press of Zoom in enlarges the document on the display. The fax can be scrolled horizontally with the left and r ight arrow keys. Each press of Zoom out reduces th e image. Each press of Rotate rotates the fax 90 degrees clockwise with each press of the command button. To return to the previous commands, press Back . To print th e viewed fax 1 Press the Menu button. 2 Select Pr int . Fax settings Press Sett i ngs in the Fax main view to change th e settings of all your faxes. Cover page â Provides you with th e following opti ons: Header â Th e cover page contents will be attached to the beginning of the first fax pag e. Figure 3 Tip: You can also use the Zoom button to magnify the fax on th e display. Tip: You can transf er receive d faxes to a PC with the PC Suite pr ogram. Please note, however , that these faxes will be converted to the TIFF format. To view all the pages of a fax on a PC, use a graphics program (e.g. Windows Imaging).
Fax 75 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Separate page â Only the cover page contents are s h own on the first page of the fax. None â No cover page inform ation will be attached to the fax. The first page of the document will be the first page of the fax. Begin sending â Lets you c hoose w hen the fa x is sent: Immediately â The fax is sent righ t away. At [time] â You can determine the time when the f ax is sent. Use the time format hh:m m . This option enables you to take adva ntage of cheaper calling times. Re ceive r eso lutio n: Standard â The fax will be r eceived using 200 (width) x 100 (height) dots per inch (dpi) resolution. Fine â (200 x 200 dpi). Receiving faxes with fine resolution will take longer and requires approximately twice as much memory as w ith standard resolution. Send resolution: Standard â 200 x 100 dpi. Fine â (200 x 200 dpi). Sending faxes with fine resolution takes longer and temporarily requires more free memory than when using standard resolution. Logo file â Enables you to add for example the logo of your company to the fax cover page. The logo file must fir st be stored in the GIF or JPEG format in the Downloaded files folder . The logo is not shown on the display . No image â No logo is attach e d to the fax. [File name] â All the available files in the Downloaded files folde r are listed in the pop-up box. Select the one you wan t to attach to the fax. Signature file â Allows you to add your signature to the fax cover page. The signature file must first be stored in GIF or JPEG format in the Downloaded files folder . The signature is placed under the Remarks field, but not shown on the display . No image â No signature is at tached to the fax. [File name] â All the available files in the Downloaded files folde r are listed in the pop-up box. Select the one you wan t to attach to the fax. Fax call barring â This network service allows you to place restrictions on outgoing and incoming fa x es. Fax call diverting â T h is network s e rvice allows you to divert incoming faxes to another fax machine. For more information and instructions on how to change diverting and ba r ring settings, see âÂÂT elephone settingsâ on page 65.
Fax 76 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Rese nd â Allows you to choose which pages will be sent again if the fax sending has failed an d the Document outbox tries to send the fax again. All pages â All pages are r esent. Missed pages â Only the pages which were not sent completely are resent. ECM â When the Error Correction Mode is On , any pages containing errors are automatically received again, until th e defects are corrected. Fax polling â Some networks provide th i s service which allows you to make a fax call to a fax machine, then receive information by fax. Contact your network service provider for further details. Alternate fax receiving â As a default, this setting must be set to As f a x . If your network requires you to receive alternate voice/fax calls, you must set this to As voice/fax . This setting applies also to the Fax modem application . Note: When you se t Fax polling to On , Fax polling becomes one of the commands in the Fax main view.
Short messages 77 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 8. Short messages The Short Messages application is started by pressing the SMS applicat i on button on the keyboard. The Short Message Service (SMS) enables you to send and receive short text messages of up to 16 0 characters over the digital ce llular network. If the message is longer , it will be sent as several short messages. To send an d receive short messages, the Short Message Service must be supported by the network you are u sing and activated for your SIM card; the SMS mess age centre numb e r must be stored in the se ttings of the SMS application; and the phone must be on. Contact your home service provider for d etai ls. SMS messages can be sent or r eceived even during a voice or data call. Messages can be read in any wireless phone that has the capability . I f the receiving phone is off at the time of sending, the SMS message centre continues to attempt to send th e message until the validity period allowed by the network expires . The SMS main view shows the f ol lowing folders: Own texts â Texts that you h ave written. Received messages â Messages that you have received. Standard messages â Predefined message templates. Business cards â All contact cards in the C ontacts directory . Info messa ges â Informative me ssages sent by the network. Delivery reports â Information about th e status of sent messages. Document outbox â See âÂÂDocument featuresâ on page 34. Figure 1
Short messages 78 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To send sho rt messages To writ e a new short mess age 1 Press Write message in the SMS main view to open the short message editor, which resembles a postcard. A ch aracter counter showing how many characters you have typed and in how many messages they will be sent appears at the top of th e postcard, see figure 1. 2 Write the me ssage. 3 When the message is ready to be sent, press Rec ipie nt . T he SMS directory opens. To send a prev iously written document 1 Select the Own texts folder and pr ess Open . 2 Select a document and press Open . When you ope n a tex t cont ainin g formatting, you will be asked whether you wish to make a copy of the text (press Copy ), or edit the original text (press Edit ). Editing will lose the formatting of the original text. 3 When the message is ready to be sent, press Rec ipie nt . T he SMS directory opens. To select a recipient There are three ways to select a recipient for your short message: 1 Select a contact in th e SMS directory, and press Select . Or , 2 Press Enter number and enter the phone number manually. Or, 3 Press R ecent numbers to get a list of recent short message numbers, open one of the lists, select a contact, and press Select . Figure 2 Note: You can only send short messages to wireless phon e numbers stored in the Tel(G SM) field of contact cards.
Short messages 79 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. If you want to a dd more recipients to the message, press Ad d r ecip ient . If you want to select the recipients from your SIM card, press th e Men u button, select SIM card mem ory , and choose the recipien ts. To send the mess age 1 If necessary, adjust th e sending options for the current message by pressing Send options . Press Change to set a new value for the curr e nt message. The send options, Reply via same centre , Validity period , Message centr e in use , Message conversion and Requ est delivery report , are t he same as in the SMS settings, see âÂÂSMS settingsâ on page 82. 2 Press Send . If you r mes sage is l onger than 160 char acte rs, it wil l be sent as several short messages , provided that you r network s u pports this feature. To receiv e messages Short messages ar e received automatically , provided that this service is available and that the phone is on and within network coverage. A received short message can be a normal short message, business card or a service card. All received short messages go to the Received messages folder . When a new short message has arrived, a tone will s ou nd â unless the device is set to a silent profil e â and an information note is shown on the display . When you open a received m essage, the stamp on the right half of the message is postmarked, and the time and date the message was sent are shown below the senderâÂÂs name or number . To read a message There ar e two ways to read a received me ssage: 1 When you receive a note informing you of a received short messa ge , press View to read the message. Or , 2 Press Cancel to dismiss the note. You can then open the Received messages folder where unread received messages a re marked with Tip: If you p ress Clear both li sts in the R ecent numbers view, all in formation in the lists is removed. When you open one of the lists and select a con tact, Creat e card enables you to create a contact card for the contact. Tip: T o send the message t o sever al recipients, use multiselection, see âÂÂTo select several itemsâ on page 33, or create a contact group, see âÂÂContact groupsâ on page 55.
Short messages 80 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. and unread received business cards with . Select the message and press Open . To reply to a recei ved message 1 Select the Received messages folder and pr ess Open . 2 Open the selected document and press Reply . The conten ts of the received message ar e not included in the new message automat ically. If you wa nt to include them, press the Menu button and choose the Re ply (include text) option. 3 Write the me ssage and press Send . To forw ard a receiv ed message 1 Select the Received messages folder and pr ess Open . 2 Open the selected docu ment, press Forward . The con tents of the r eceived message are inclu ded in the new message. 3 Press Re cipi ent an d select a recipient f rom the SMS directory. 4 To send th e mess age, press Send . To use the Menu button When you press the Menu button in an opened received message, you can also use the following options: Find number â If the me ssage con tains p hone num bers, pr ess Next n umb er to toggle between these numbers and to s e lect one of them. Press Cal l to make a phone call to the number . Reply (include text) - Replies to a SM S message and includes the recei ved SMS in your reply . Find URL â If the message contains URL addresses, press Next URL to toggle between these addresses and to select on e of them. Press Fetch to start the WWW application and to open a connection to the selected address. Print â Prints the message. Servi ce card s A DTMF ser vice provider may send DTM F sequ ences to its subscribers in the form of a service card that can be stored in the Contacts directory . For more information on DTMF tones, see âÂÂTo send DTMF tonesâ on page 152. Standard messages Y ou can store frequently used short messages as standard messages, an d sen d them instead of writing a new message every time. Standard mess ages are stored in the Standard me ssages folder . To write a new standard mess age, open the Standard messages folder an d press Write mes sag e . The commands in a new standard message are:
Short messages 81 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Reci pient â Opens the SMS di rectory . Delet e â Removes the stan dard message from the Standard m e ssages list. Close â Returns to the Standard me ssages folder . Business cards A business card is a special short message containing personal infor mation about a contact, just like a normal business card. Y ou can send your own business card or any contact card as a business car d. Business cards sen t f rom a device that s u pports the Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator contact card format can be saved directly as new contact cards in the Contacts directory . Ju st open the received bu siness car d and press Cre ate card . To send a contact card as a business card 1 Open the Business cards folder. 2 Select a business card and press Open . 3 Press Opt ions to define which fields to i nclude in the business card. Change toggles the fields on or off. If you are sending the bu siness card to a Nokia 9000 Communicator, Nokia 900 0 i Communicator, or a wireless phone, select Com pact . This makes the business card to a compatible format. When sending the business c ar d to another N okia 9110 Comm unica tor, s ele ct Generi c . 4 Press Recipi ent to select a recipien t for the business card. Or, if you want to send the business card to another communicator via the infrared link, press Transfer via IR (be sure to activate the Infrar ed activation application in the receiving com m unicator). 5 Press Send . Figure 3 Tip: When you have received a business ca rd, press Reply to send your own business card to the s ender .
Short messages 82 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. SMS settings Press Settings in the SMS application main view to change the settings. The setting s you define he re are used un til you chan ge them again . Message centre settings â In order to be able to sen d short messages, you must have stored the number of the message centre in this setting and selected which message centre you w ant to use in Message centre in use . Yo u can add new or edit existing m e ssage centre numbers in Message centres . Reply via same centre: Yes / No â This network service allows the r ecipient of your short message to reply u sing your short message centre. By settin g this option to Ye s , you allow the recipient to reply to your message, even if the recipient does not subscribe to the Short Message Service, provided th at the recipient has the means to type a reply message. Validity period: 1 h / 6 h / 24 h / One we ek / Maximum â I f the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the set validity period, the message is removed from the message centre. If Maxi mum is chosen, the validity period is set to the maximum value allowed by the message centre. N ote that the network must support this f eature. Message conversion: None (sent as a normal s h ort mess age) / Fax / X .400 / Pagin g / E-mail / ERMES / Spee ch (message synthesis e d from a short me ssage) â In order to receive a converted message, the r ecipient must have an appropriate device available, and the network must support this feature. For example, if you choose Fa x , the recipient must have a telefax machine or similar device connected to the number . Request delivery report: Yes/No/Sho w im mediately â When this network service is set to Yes , the status of the sent message ( Delivered, P ending, Failed ) is shown in the Delivery reports folder . When set to Show immediately , you will receive a n ote when the message has been delivered to the recipient. Send long messages: Y es/No â If set to No , messages that are l onger than 160 characters are sent as several SMS mes sages. If set to Ye s , mess ages that are longer than 160 characters are sent as several messages, but if the recipien t Note: Sending a busin e ss card with an attached picture makes the message very long a nd may be expensive. Note: Th e message centre nu mber may be included in some SIM cards. If you use several SIM cards in your communicator, make sure that this setting contains the appropriate message centre nu m ber.
Short messages 83 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. has a Nok ia 91 1 0 Co mmunic ator or a Nokia 9000 i Comm unicato r , the messages are received as one long message. Receive info messages: Yes/No/View index â If your network supports this feature, it wi ll send you information abou t various topics. If you choose Vie w index , the network will send you a li st of topics, and you can select th ose topics on which you wish to receive information. Info service mode: Display and save/ Display only/Save only â If this is set to Display and save , messages are di splayed and saved in t h e Info messages folder . If you select Save only , info messages are not displayed but saved in the folder . If you select Display only , messages are displayed but not saved. Info service language â Y ou can select in which languages you want to receive info messages. Select either All , or a maximum of four languages. Info service topics â Message topics vary acc or ding to the operator . You can define here what type of messages you want to receive. For more information about the Info service, contact your service provider .
Short messages 84 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Internet 85 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 9. Internet To obtain access to th e Internet, the cellular network you use must support data calls; the data service must be activated for your SIM card; you must have obtained an Internet Access Point (IAP) f rom an Internet service provider; and you m u st have entered th e proper Internet settings. Y our service pr ovider will give you instructions on h ow to configure the Internet settings. Follow the instructions caref u lly . To start an Internet application 1 Press the Internet application button on the communicator keyboard. 2 Select an application with th e selection frame and press Se lect . 3 To close an application, press Close . 4 To disconnect f rom the Internet , press Hang up . The âÂÂD isconne ctingâ not e will be shown on t h e display and the data call will end. Inte rnet a pplic ati ons Mail â An electronic mail app lication which lets you send and receive e- mail all over the wor ld using the Inte rnet. World Wide Web (W W W) â A hypertext-based system for finding and accessing resources on the Internet. Telnet â Allows your communicator to connect to computers that provide terminal services th rough the Internet. Terminal â A ll ows your c om municator to c on nect to computers, s u ch as mainframe computers, that provide dir e ct dial-in terminal services. Both Telnet and Terminal emula te the VT100 termina l. Text Web â Used for obtaining inform ation from the Inte rnet via SMS. Tip: With one Internet application active, you can quickly switch to another by pressing the Internet application button. In th is way yo u do not hav e to make a ne w data call. Note: Depending on the network configuration and load, esta blish ing an Internet connection may take up to one minute or even longer.
Internet 86 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To set up your Inte r net access point If you do not already have an internet access point (IAP) or you want a new one, this ser vice provide s you a convenie nt way to set up th e internet conn ection. Before being able to use the In ternet services, you need to configure an Internet connection. You can subscribe to the Internet services of selected providers in your cou ntry directly with your Nokia 91 1 0 Com municator , provided that the data service is activated for your SIM card. See the instructions below . 1 Open the WWW application. 2 Select the bookmark "Internet setup" and press Go . 3 Select your home country in th e list w ith the arrow k e ys and press Go . 4 Confirm the operation by pressing Acce pt . 5 Select the hy perlink to the Internet service providers and press Go . Y ou will be connected to the WWW site where you can select your preferred service provider. The connection is established via a data call. 6 When the con nection h as been made, f ollow t he instruct ions on th e displ ay to select a servi ce provide r and to subscribe to their Inter net servic es. Internet settings Information concerning the settings must be obtained f rom your Internet service provider . The service pr ovider may be able to configure the access point for you via a spec i al SMS message, or a WWW page, which sets all the necessary In ternet access settings. To define the Internet settings manually , press Settings in the main view of the Internet application. To define an Intern et access point 1 In the Internet s ettings main view choos e Inter net ac ces s and press Chan ge . 2 To define a new Internet access point, press New . To modify or chan ge an existing IAP, press Edit . Tip: There is a glossary of Internet terms and abbreviations at the back of this manual. Note: The Internet settings apply to Mail, WW W and Telnet.
Internet 87 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. The Intern et settings are: Modem initialisation â Enables you to define the modem settings of your communicator: Autobauding â The data transmission rate is determined automatically. Most networks support this option. Fixed 9600 b/s â A fixed data transmission rate is used. I f you have problems with making a data call, try this option. Fix ed 1440 0 b/s â Can be used if supported by th e network. Do not use this option, unless you are sure your n etw ork supports it. Cust om â When a data call is establishe d, the modem is initialised accor ding to the str ing you en ter here. Autodisconnect time: None/2/5/10 minutes â The connection to the In ternet will automatically close after th e inactivity period defined h ere. V.42bis compression: On/Off â Speeds up data transfer , e.g. sending or receiving mail, when supported by the cellu lar network. Set this to Off , unless you are sure your n e twork supports th is option. Data call barring â Y ou can restrict your data calls in the sam e way as your voice calls, see âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 6 5 . To see the current barring mode, press Ge t sta tus . To cancel all barrings, press Can cel data barring s . Intern et access â Lists th e de fined Internet access points. Y ou can configure the communicator differently for each Internet access poin t. Press Ed it to change the settings of an existing access point. Press New to define a new access point. Pres s Delet e to remove an ac cess point. Provider name â The name of the Intern et service provider. If you define the access point manually, th e name can be edited freely. Figure 1 Note: Th e exact values of the settings are provided by you r Internet service provider.
Internet 88 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Phone number â Th e telephone number of the Internet access point. User name â Enter your us er name if r equired by the Intern et service provider. The user n ame may be neede d in the PPP authentication process. Promp t pass word: Yes / No â If you must enter a new password e very time you log on to a se rver, or you do not want to sa ve your pass word, set th is to Yes . Password â Enter your password if required by the Internet service provider. The password may be needed in the PPP a u thentication process. Advanced settings â Opens a new set of options with which you can further adjust the Internet access point, if r e quired: Modem initialisation â Enter any modem in itialisation string containing AT commands here, if needed. This initialisation string is executed after the initialisation string you define in the Modem initialisation: Custom option of the Internet settings. Login customisation: N one/Man ual â Some Internet access points do not automatically enable PPP. In such cases you need to choos e either Manual , as it allows you to enter your login na me and password manually in a terminal connection, or press New in the pop-up box, to write and save a n e w login script. If you choose None , your password and user name are automatically taken from the Intern et access point settings. For more information on login scripts, see the scripts.txt file on the diskette supplied with th e communicator. PPP compression: On/Off â Speeds up data transfer when supported by the remote PPP server. If you have problem s with establishing a connection, try setting this to Off . IP address â The IP addr ess of the com munic ator. Default gateway â The IP address of the system that is a gateway out of the local network. Netw ork m ask â Shows which portion of the IP address of the communicator identifies the network. Primary nameserver â The IP address of the primary nameserver. Secondary nameserver â T he IP address of the secondary nameserver. Tip: Some Internet service providers refer to these nameservers as DNS1 and DNS2.
Internet 89 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Mail The Nokia 9 1 1 0 Com municator mail system is compliant with the Internet standards SMT P , IMAP4, POP3, MIME1 and MIM E 2. Mail is started in th e Internet main view by selecting Mail an d pressing the Select command bu tton. The Mail main view shows the following folders: Own tex ts â Contains the documents you have written with the communicator . The documents may contain f ormatted text, but the text will appear in the editor without formatting. Received mail â Contains mail fetched from the Remote mailbox. See âÂÂTo fetch mailâ on page 94. Docume n t outbo x â The outgoing comm unications manager of the commun icator . Remote mailbox â You r electronic mailbox service which receives all your mail. This service may be offered by a network operator , your com pany , or an Internet service provider . The required mailbox and Internet access point settings are described in âÂÂMail setting sâ on page 89. Mail settings Be sure to define your Internet access point as described in âÂÂInternet settingsâ on page 86. To define the mail s ettings 1 Press Set ti ngs in th e Mail main view. 2 Select the item you want to change, and press Change . Show header fields â The term header f ield refers to the in formation given at the top of an e-ma il message. This settin g control s which hea d er fields within the received message will be shown when the m e ssage is opened: None â Shows no h eader fields, although the sender and the subject of the message are still shown in the name of the message. Bas ic â Shows the Date , From , To an d Subject fields. All â Shows all po ssible fields. Figure 2
Internet 90 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Editor and viewer font: URW Mono / URW Roman / U RW Sans â Determines the font u sed in the m ail editor and view er . Remote mailbox in use â Determines the mailbox to which the connection is ma de. Remote mailboxes â Pres s Change to open the Rem ote mailboxes view , where you can add new mailboxes, and edit and remove existing ones. When you press New or Edit in the Re mote mailboxes view , the f ollowing options become available: Remote mailbox name â Enter the name of the remote mailbox. The name can be enter ed freely. Internet access â Select which Internet access point you want to use for connecting to this mailbox. Sending settings â Press Change to define the settings of the mail messages you send from this mailbox. The settings are: Own mail address â You must enter the e- mail address given to you by your Internet service provider. The address must contain the @ character. Replies to your m essages will be sent to this address. Sending host â The IP address or host name of the computer that sends your Internet mail. Send mail: I mmediately / Upon request / During next conn ection â Choose Immediately to send mail automatically; Upon request if you want to write several mail messages and send them at your convenience; or During next conn ection if you want your ma il sent the next time you make a connection to the Internet access point that your mailbox uses. See âÂÂTo send mailâ on page 92. Copy to own mail address: Yes / No â If set to Yes , a copy of the mail will be automatically sent to the address defined in O wn mail addre ss . MIME character enc oding: On / Off â Allows anothe r MIME-compliant mail syste m to read the character set used in yo ur communic ator. Only when text containing spe c ial cha racters, e.g. á, ä, ÃÂ, is sent to a non- MIME-compli ant mail system, sh ould the MIME ch aracter encodi ng be turned off. When the MIME character en coding is o ff, special c haracters are automatically converted to ASC II characters: á become s a and so on. Signature file â Allows you to add your signature to the m ail message. The signature file must first be stored as a text file in the Own texts folder, where it is then selected. Note: E-mail addresses cannot contai n accented characte rs, such as é or ä.
Internet 91 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Receiving settings â Pr ess Change to define th e settings of th e mail messages you receive to this mailbox. Y our remote mailbox service provider will supply you with th e r equired information. The settin gs are: User nam e and Password â These may be requir ed to connect to the server and to open your m ailbox. The password characters appear as asterisks (*) on the display. The user name and p assword store d here wil l automatically be offered to the server. I f you enter your us er name and password in correctly, you will be prompted to enter them again w hen you conn ect to the Remote mailbox. If you enter your user name and password incorrectly three times, the connection to the Remote mailbox will end. For information on how to change the password, contact your remote mailbox service provider. Receiving host â Th e IP address or host name of the computer that receives your e-mail. Folder â INBOX is the default folder for your incoming mail. Do not change this setting without consulting your remote mailbox service provider. This setting is only available when the mail protocol is IMAP4. Protocol: IMAP4 / PO P3 â Choose the mail protocol your remote mailbox service provider recommends. Fetch he aders: Al l / Recen t â Determin es whether all mail or just the mail received sin ce the l ast connect ion will be shown in the Remot e mailbox. It is possib le to have old or u nread mail in the Remote ma ilbox. Fetch attachments: Yes / No â Determines whether possibl e mail attachments are fetched or not. This option is on ly available if the mail protocol is IMAP4. Note that text attachments are always fetched. Delete fetched: Yes / No â De termines whether fetched mail will be automatically removed from the Remote mailbox. All fetched mail goes to the Received mail folder. Timed fetching settings â With th is setting you can set your communicator to fetch mail automatically. Timed f etchin g: On/Off â Determines whether the timed fetch i ng function is in use or not. Start at: Date an d Tim e â You can specify th e date and tim e when the communicator starts to fetch your mail. Use the date and time formats specified in the System settings. Time limit: None/5 /10/30/6 0 min â You can set th e time limit for the fetching operation. This way your communicator wil l not fetch too large messages, which would take too much time.
Internet 92 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Frequency: None/ Daily/ Weekly/ Working days/ Every oth er week/ Monthl y â De termines how often mail is f e tched. Size limit: None/5/10/50/ 100/250 kB â You can set the size limit for the mail to be fetch ed. This w ay your com municat or wil l not fetch too larg e messages, which would take too much time and occupy too much memory. To send mail To writ e new mail 1 Press Write mail in the Mail m a in view. An empty ma il editor opens. 2 Write the message. You can change th e font within the Mail s e ttings. 3 When the messa ge is ready to be sent, pre ss Recipi ent . The Mail dir ectory opens. To send pre viously written documents 1 Select the Own texts folder in the Mail main view a n d press Open . 2 Select a document and press Open . If the docum ent contains text formattings, you will be asked if you want to edit the original and lose all formattings, or create a copy in the Ow n texts folder and edit the copy instead. 3 When the document is ready to be sent, press Recipient to open the Mail directory. To select a recipient There are two ways to sele ct a recipient for your mail message: 1 Select the contact(s) in the Mail directory with the selection frame an d press Select . If a contact has s everal mail addresses, a pop-up box opens, listing the available m ail addresses. Select an address and press Select . Or, 2 Enter the recipientâÂÂs address manually by pressing Ent er address . Remember that the mail address must contain the @ character, and that the address ca nnot contain accented characters . The Mail envelope opens whenever you are about to send mail, see figure 3. All the field e ntries are editable. Figure 3
Internet 93 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To add addr esses to the To or C c fields of the Mail e n velo pe 1 Select whether to add a new recipient to the To or the Cc field by scrolling to the appropriate field. 2 Press Add reci pient . 3 Select the recipie nts as described above. To determine ho w the current mail messag e will be sent Press the Menu button in the mail envelope and select Sen d options . To change a setting, pre ss Change . The possible options are: Send mail: Immediately/ Upon request/ During next connection Copy to own mail address: Y e s / No MIME character encoding: On/ Off For more information, see âÂÂMail settin gsâ on page 89. To sen d ma il upon requ est When you have se ve ral mail messages to send, you ma y want to use the Upon reques t option. This way you may send all your mail during the same data call. 1 Write your m ail, select the reci pient, press the Menu bu tton and select Send options . 2 Select the Send mail: Upon request option and then press Send to send the mail. 3 Go to the Document ou tbox and press Op en . 4 Press Start t o send your mail. Y ou can also select the During next conne ction option, with which your mail will be sent automatically the next time you make a connection to th e Internet access point your Remote mailbox uses. To add attachments to the messag e 1 Press Att ac hments . 2 A list of attachments opens. T o add documents to the list, press Add . 3 Select the document(s) from the Ow n texts and Dow nloaded files folders and press Select . 4 When all the desired attachments are in the list, pr ess Clos e . 5 To send the messa ge, press Send . Note: Multiple addresses in the To and Cc fields must be separated by a comma.
Internet 94 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To fetch mail E-mail addressed to you is not automatically received by your communicator , but by a Remote mailbox, see figure 4. This is to let you determ ine which messages you want to r ead and when. To read you r mail, you must first connect to your Remote mailbox and th en select the messages you wish to fetch onto your communicator . Connection to the Remote m ailbox is established via a data call. If your Remote mailbox server is ca pable of sending you special short messages, you will hear a ton e - unless th e system is s e t to a s ile nt profile - and see a note when new mail arrives in your Remote mailbox. The message may also contain information about the mail message, in which case you can either fetch or remove the mail by pressing Fetch or De lete in this SMS message. To connect to t he Remote mailbo x The Mail and Internet access poin t settings must be configured correctly . Read âÂÂMail settingsâ on page 89, and follow the instructions given by your Remote mailbox and I nternet service providers. 1 Move the selection frame in the Mail main view over the Remote mailbox and press Connect . Unread messages in the Remote mailbox are marked with , unread messages with a ttachments with and deleted messages with . To fetch all new mail 1 Once you have connected to th e Remote mai lbox, press Fetch new . 2 All mail with the icon is fetched to the Received mail folder . 3 After all new mail has been fetched, connection to the Remote mailbox is closed and the Received mail folder opens. To fetch a selected mes sage 1 Select the mail message(s) you want to fetch and press Fetch selected . 2 After the mail has been fetched, the Remote mailbox view returns. Figure 4
Internet 95 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To remove a mail message 1 Set the Delete fetched setting to Yes in the Mail settin gs. All fetched messages are removed from the Re mote mailbox. Or, 2 Select the message(s) you wan t to remove with the selection frame, and press De lete . If you want to canc el the removi ng, pre ss Un del ete . The messages will be removed when you exit the Remote mailbox. However , all fetched messages will be retained in the Received mail folder . To use the Menu button If you press the Menu button in the Remote mailbox, the following options become available: Change folder â Opens another mail folder . Create folder â Creates a new folder . Copy â Copies th e selected mail message(s) to another folder. Move â Moves the selected mail message(s) to another folder . Remove folder â Removes th e selected fol der and its con ten ts and s u bfolders. Rename folder â Gives the folder a new name. Off-line â Ends the data call. On-line â Re-establishes th e data call. To di sco nnec t from th e Remo te m ailbo x 1 Press Hang up . 2 If you have m essages marked as deleted, you will be prompted to confirm the deletion . 3 The connection to the Rem ote mailbox closes, and the Mail application main view returns to the display. If you have fetched messa ge s, the Received mail folder opens on the display. To read mail Mail that you fetch from your Remote m ailbox is stored in the Received mail fold er . To read a mail message 1 Select the Received mail folder in the Mail main view and press Open . Mail messages that have not yet been opened in th e communicator are marked with . 2 Select the message, and pr ess Ope n . When you open a r eceived mail, the followin g commands become available: Attachments â Lists all MIME attachments: text, image, audio, video or application. If the message does not contain any attachments, this command
Internet 96 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. is dimmed. When viewing the list of atta ch ments, you may select a n attachment and choose fro m the following options: View â Opens the attachment if there is e nough memory and if the message can be opened in the communic ator . Save â Saves the attachment in the Downloaded files f older. Close â Returns you to the previous screen. Delet e â Removes the open mail message. Close â Retu rns you to th e Received mail folder . To use the Menu button If you press the Menu button in an opened mail message, the followin g options become available: Reply (include text) â Replie s to a mail message and includes the received mail in your reply . If the received mai l message is a MIME document, only the first text part is copied to th e message an d may be edited. Attachments cannot be included in the reply message Reply â Replies to a mail message without including the received mail in your reply . Reply all (include text) â Replies to all the persons who received the mail and includes the received mail in your reply . Reply all â Replies to all the persons who received th e mail without including the received ma il in your reply . Forward â Forwards the received mail and the possible mail attachments. Find URL â This option searches for a U RL address in the message. If there is a URL, you can open a con nection to the selected address by pressing Fetch . Hierarchical structure â Shows the hierarchical structure of the mail message. Print â Prints the message. Scroll to any of th ese and press Select . Figure 5
Internet 97 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. World Wide Web The Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator supports H T ML 3.2, with the exception of some features. SSL, the security protocol, is also supported. See âÂÂGlossaryâ on page 177. SSL provides export grade en cryption, which means that it is not secure enough for highly confidential purposes. The WW W browser does not support Java or Java sc ript. To connect to the W orld W ide Web , the Internet service must be activated for your SIM card, and y ou need an account with an Internet service pr ovider . To ope n the W orld Wide Web application, select WWW in the Internet main view , and press Select . To exit the WWW , press Clos e or Hang up in the Bookmarks list, which is th e main view of the application. This ends the data call and closes the WWW application. For information on how to create tailored WWW pages for the Nokia 91 1 0 Communicator , see the documents on the CD-ROM. WWW settings To ch ange the WWW settings: 1 Open the WWW application an d press the Menu button. 2 Select Settings . 3 To change a setting, select it and press Chang e . The WWW setting s are: Autoload images: Y es / No â If set to Yes , the communicator automatically fetches the inline JPEG or G I F images on a WWW page. When set to No , WWW pages are fetched without images and shown much faster . Clear cache on exit: Ye s / N o â Most recently fetched WWW pages are kept in the temporary memory of th e communicator , the â cacheâ . I f set to Ye s , the cache, history list and cookie file ar e automatically emptied af te r you close the WWW application. If set to No , the cache stores as much information as possible. When you restart the WWW application, the m ost recently stored information is fetche d f rom the cach e without making a new data call. Accept all cookies: Y es / No â Determines whether the cookies functionality is enabled. See "Glossary" on page 177. Default access point â Defines the Internet access point used as a default in the WWW application. Proxies â To change the pr ox y settings, press Ch ange . Internet access point â You can select an IAP to be used for this particular WWW page. HTT P pr oxy â The hostname of the HTTP proxy server used with the selected IA P.
Internet 98 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. HTTP proxy port â The prox y port of the proxy server. Security proxy â The proxy that is used with SSL secure connections. Security proxy port â The security proxy port of the proxy server. No proxy for â You may define domains for which the HTTP proxy is n ot needed. Domain names ar e separated with commas, for example nokia.com, edu.fi. You may specify the domains as accurately as you wish. Bookmarks The WWW main view shows the Bookmarks list. When you s e lect a bookmark from the list, the name of the Internet access point used for con n ecting to the bookmark is shown on the top right corner . Th e date when the bookmark was last fetched is shown beside the name of the bookmark. See f igure 6. Below the Bookmarks list is the address field where you can enter the URL address of the WWW page you want to fetch. If you select a bookmark from the list, th e address field shows the URL address of the bookmark. To fetch a WWW page 1 Select an entry in the Bookmarks l ist or enter a U RL in the addr e ss f ield. 2 Press Go . To add a n ew bookmark 1 Press Add , or if you want t o modify an e xisting bookmark, press Edit . 2 Enter the name you want for th e bookmark in the Name field. Figure 6 Tip: To fetch WWW pages stored in the Own texts or Downloaded files f olders of the communicator or the m emory card, use the prefix âÂÂfile:// /â (note: three slashes) instead of âÂÂh ttp://âÂÂ.
Internet 99 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 3 Enter the URL address of the bookmark, e .g. www.nokia.com, in the Address field. To set advanced bookmark proper ties Select Details and press Ch ang e . The advanced settin gs are: User n ame â If a user name is needed to fetch the bookm ark, enter your user name h ere. P assword â If a pass w ord is needed to fetch the bookmark, enter your passw ord here. Internet access selection: Automatic/Manual â If you select Automatic , the current or the default IAP is used for this bookmark. If you set this to Manual , only the IAP defined in the f o llowing setting is used. Internet access â This setting is available only if the previous setting is set to Manua l . You can select which IAP to use for the bookmark. To fetch items with a page already open Y ou can fetch a WWW pa ge even if you h ave a page already open: 1 Press the Menu bu tton and select Bookmarks . A simplified form of the Bookmarks list opens. 2 Select an entry in the Bookmarks list or e nter the URL in the address field. 3 Press Go . To close the Bookmarks list, press Close . To use the Menu button If you press t h e Menu button in th e Bookmarks list, the following options become available: History â Contains a list of browsed documents . T o fetch a page from the list, select the page and press Go . To empty the history lis t and the cache, press Clea r histo ry . Find â Y ou can search for n ames and addresses in the Bookmarks list. Open file â Y ou can open files from the Ow n texts and Downloaded files folders. Move â Y ou can move the selected bookmark fr om one folder to an oth er . Delete â Removes the sele cted bookmark or bookmark folder . Create folder â Creates a new bookmark folder. Import bookmarks â Imports a bookmark file from the Own texts or Downloaded files folder to the Bookmarks list. Export bookmarks â Converts the boo kmark file to the HT ML format a nd saves it to the Own texts folder. Clear cache â Empties all ca ch es and temporar y files. Settings â Opens the WWW settin gs. See âÂÂWWW settingsâ on page 97.
Internet 100 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To make a smart bookmar k A smart bookmark contains a WWW page which your communicator fetches at certain time. These WWW pages can only consist of text or images, and they cannot be SSL secure. 1 Create a new bookmark folde r by pressing the Menu button and selecting Create folder . 2 When the new folder is ready, press Edit . The follow ing options become available: Timed fetching: O n/Off â When this is set to On , a clock symbol appears in the folder, and the WWW pages in the folder are fetched according to the settings defined below. Fetch at â You can define the time and date when the pages are fetched. The date and time formats are set in the System settings. Time limi t: None/5/1 0/30/60 mi n â You can set a time limit for the fetching process. This way the data call will not last too lon g and thus become very expensive. Frequency: None/Daily/Weekly/Working days/Every other wee k/Monhtly â This se tting enab l es fre quent fetch ing of the WWW p ages. Fetch inline images: Yes/No â You can decide whether the inline images in the WWW pages are fetched. Fetch links: Yes/No â If set to Yes , all links to othe r texts and images in the defined WWW pag es are fetched. If set to No , on ly th e WWW pa ges are fet che d. 3 Press Cl ose . 4 Select the page(s) you want to fetch with the selection fram e and press th e Menu b utto n. 5 Select Move and then choose the folder which you just created. T he bookmark(s) will be moved to that folder. Pa ges fetched with the smart bookmarks function a r e stored in a f older cache. To empty the cache, press the Menu button in the smar t boo kmarks view and Figure 7
Internet 101 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. select Empty folder cache . If you select Go , all the items in the folder are fetched in the folder cache. To navigate in WWW 1 Select a bookmark in the Bookmarks list or enter a URL address into the address field and press Go . 2 If the WWW page was alr eady recently fetched, the page is fetch e d from the cache. If not, the page is fetched from the Internet by making a data call to the selected Internet ac ce ss point. 3 Some servers h ave access restriction s that require a va lid user name and password. In t his case, you will be asked t o enter the user name and pa ssword before the WWW page ca n be fetched. The c ommunica tor stores the p asswords and user names that yo u enter to gain acc ess to that domain, and t h e next tim e you connec t to the same dom ain, they will b e offered autom atically. 4 When the WWW page is being fetched, the line on top of the display shows the status of the conn ection, the title of the page, and how many bytes of the page have been r e ceived. When the page is on the display, use the arrow keys to scroll the view and to choose hyperlinks and hotspots. Each arrow key press selects the nearest hyperlink or hotspot, or moves the view on e line up or down. See figure 8. Figure 8 Not e: WWW pages secured with SSL are never stored in the cache. Note: Stored passwords to individual web sites ar e removed when the communicator is rebooted. Tip: To select the ne xt or previous hyperlink on the WWW page, press the Tab key or Shift Tab, r espectively.
Internet 102 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To use th e navigation co mmands After the WWW page has been fetched, the following commands become available: Go â If there is a l ink to another WWW page in t h e currently open page, select the link with the se lection frame and press Go to f etch the page. If the selected item is a button for sending or r esetting a form, Go eith er sends the form or resets it to defa u lt values. Get image â If the selected item is an inline image icon, the first command changes to Get im age with which you can fetch the image. If the image is of an unsupported format, the im age icon looks broken on the display and cannot be selected. Chan ge â If the select ed item is a select ion list, c heck box or radio button, th e first command i s Change . With Cha nge , you can tick t he box or bu tton on and o ff. If you have a form open, Change allows you to attach a file to it. Y ou can select the attachment from the Own texts, Received messages/mail and Downloaded files folders. Press Ope n to open the folder , choose the desired file and press Select . Back â If you have browsed th rough at least two WWW pages, Back allows you to fetch the previous page Forward â If you h ave browsed through at le ast two WWW pages, and viewed the previous page with the Bac k comman d, yo u can fet ch the nex t page by pressing Forward . Close â Returns to the Bookmarks list. Cancel â Int e rrupts the fetch ope ration. To use the Menu button When you have a WWW page open and you press the Menu button, the following options become available: Add bookmark â Adds the current address to th e Bookmarks list. History â Contains a l ist of browsed documents. Find â Y ou can search for various items, such as words in the WWW page. Open f ile â You can open files from the Own texts and Downloaded files folders . Tip: You can copy text on the WWW page by pressing Ctrl-C. You can th en for exa mple open the Notes application, open a new document and paste the copied text into the document by pressing Ctr l- V. You can also print the copied text in the N otes application.
Internet 103 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Bookmarks â Opens the Bookmarks list where you ca n select a new page to be fetc hed. Go off-line â Ends the data call. Reload â Reloads the curr ent WWW page from th e network. Activate automatic update (Ctrl-U) â With this option the ope ned WWW page updates itself continuously in every 10, 30 or 60 seconds. This is very convenient for example when browsing stock exchange W W W pages. Disable automatic update (Ctrl-U) â Stops the continuous updating of the WWW page . Save â Saves the page contents or th e image to the Downloaded files folder , or adds the address of the page to the Bookmarks list. Clear cache â Empties all ca ch es and temporar y files. Settings â Opens the WWW settin gs. See âÂÂWWW settingsâ on page 97. To vi ew ima ges Images that are part of the fetched WWW page ar e called inline images. By default, inline image s are not fetched with the WWW page, but will be displayed as icons, unless the option Autoload images is set to Ye s in the WWW settings. To fetch an image, select the image icon and press Get image . The communicator is capable of fetching images th at are in JPEG or GIF form at. Inline images can also be image maps. An in line image map acts like a hyperlink. A fetched image map con tains a cursor that can be moved with the arrow keys. When you press Go , th e pixel coordinates of the cu rsor are sent to the server , and the cor r esponding WWW page is f e tched. Images that are separate documents and not part of a hypertext document are called external images. When an external image is fetched, it is viewed separately from the hyper text document in the image viewe r . The commands in the extern al image viewer are the sa me as in the fax viewer . Tip: You can also reload a WWW pa ge by pressing Ctrl-R. Note: The continuous updating disables the Autodisconnect time f unction. Therefore, the data call does not go o ff- line, which may make the call expensive.
Internet 104 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To downlo a d add-on software The WWW application can be u sed to install applications and plug-ins on your communicator . If you install plu g- ins, the WWW application activates them when nece ssary . 1 Go to th e WWW page where the add-on software package exists . 2 Select the h yperlink that points to the software package. 3 Press Go to fetch the package. After the software package h as been successfully fetched, the software installation view opens. Press In stall . If there is sufficient memory available, the software will be installed. Terminal The Terminal application is started in the Internet main view by selecting Terminal an d pressing Sele c t . The Terminal application is used to connect directly , not via the Internet, to a r e mote computer by way of a data call. The Terminal main view shows the defined Terminal connections. The T erminal application is similar to the Telnet application, in that both of the m emulate the VT100 terminal display . See figure 10. To connect with a pre-defined Terminal connection, select the connection and press Connect . To create n ew or edit existing connections, press De fine . To change the settings for incoming data calls, press Setti ngs , select the setting and press Chan ge . The available settings are: Local echo for incoming data call â If set to On , cha r acters typed from the communicator keyboard are ech oed locally to the c ommunicator . If set to Off , they are echoed to the remote hos t computer . Caution: Beware of vir uses. Only install on the communicator software you have obtained fr om sources that offe r adequate protection against viruses.
105 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Line end for incoming data call â Def ines which character is generated with the Enter key in incoming data. The alternatives are: Carriage return ( CR ), Linefeed ( LF ), and Carriage return - Linefeed ( CR/L F ) To define Te rminal connections After you have pr esse d Defin e in the Terminal main view , the defined Terminal connections are shown. To rem ove the selected connection, press De lete . To edit existing connections, press Edi t , or press New to define new Terminal connections. The following settings become a vailable: Conn ection nam e â Write the name of the connection . The name can be defined freely . Phone number â The phone n umber for accessing the service. T he phone number may include spaces a nd hyphens. Data bits: 7/8 â Service/host-specific communication parameter . P arity: Non e /Odd/Even â Se rvice/host-specific communication parameter . Stop bits: 1 /2 â Service/host-specific communication parameter . Local echo: On/Off â If set to On , characters typed from the communicator keyboard are echoed locally to the communicator . If set to Off , the y are echoed to the remote host com put er . Modem initialisation â Enter here a modem initialisation string cont ain ing AT commands, if needed. Th is initialisation strin g is executed after the string you define in the Modem initialisation: Custom option of the Internet settings. Backspace key: BS/DEL â Defines whether the keyboard backspace key is used as a back space or delete key . Line e nd â Defines which character is generated with the Enter key in the terminal session. The alternatives are: Carriage return ( CR ), Lin efeed ( LF ), and Carriage return - Linefeed ( CR/ LF ). Figure 9
106 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Terminal connecti on When you have connected to the remote system, the following commands become available: Press Keys to emulate the VT100 special keys, which are not a vailable on the communicator keyboard. The special keys include : Four function keys: PF1-4. The specific function of these keys depends on the service or progr am to which you are connected. All VT100 application keypad keys: numbers 1-9, hyphen, comma, period, enter. The following VT100 functions: reset terminal, Ctrl-\, Ctrl-], Ctrl-~, Ctrl-?. The selected special character is entered to the lef t of the cursor by pressing Inse rt . The arrow keys can be used for scrolling the view . Scrolling does not a f fect the cursor position. Pressing any keyboard key retu rns the view to the cu rsor position. Press Hang up to close the connection to the host, end the data call and return to the Terminal main view . To transfer text The purpose of the text tr ansfer function is to enable you to send text from the communicator to the host computer , or to copy text from the host computer to the communicator . This function can be used, for ex ample, to send pre-written mail messages to the company main f rame computer , or alternatively , copy received mail and th en read it la te r , off l ine. To send text to the h ost computer 1 Press Send text . 2 Open one of the folders shown and select th e document you want to send. 3 Press Sen d . If you want to stop the sen ding procedure, press Stop sending . While the text is being sent, the keyboard is in active. To copy text from the host computer 1 Prepare the text reading application on th e host. 2 Press Cap ture t ext . All interaction with the host will be recorded in a file in the Downloaded files folder. Control characters, except lin e changes, will not be stored. Press Stop captu re to en d the text capture process.
107 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Telnet The Telnet application is similar to the Termina l application, in that both of them emulate the VT1 00 terminal display . See figure 1 0. Once a T e lnet connection is established, you must in m ost cases enter your login name and a password in order to be able to use the ser vices provided by the host computer . The Teln e t main view shows all pre- defined Telnet hosts. To conne ct to a pre-def ined T elnet host, select the host and press Connect . To create new or edit existing con nections, press Defin e . To define Tel net connections Afte r you have pr essed Defin e in th e T el net main view , the defined T elnet connections are shown. To rem ove the selected connection, press De lete . To edit existing connections, press Edit , a nd to def ine new Teln e t connections, press New . The following settings become available: Conn ection nam e â Write the name of the connection . The name can be defined freely . Destination host â Enter the connection address. T he host is ident ified by either a numeric IP address or a tex tual host name. If required, place the n ame of the destination T CP port after the IP address, s e parated by a colon (:). Internet access points â Select an Internet access point from those currently defined. To change the IAP , press Ch ang e and select a ne w IAP from the list. Backspace key: BS/DEL â Defines whether the keyboard backspace key is used as a back space ( BS ) or delete ( DEL ) key . Note: The Telnet application can be installed to your communicator from the CD-ROM included in the sales package.
108 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Telnet conne ction When you have connected to the remote system, press Key s to emul ate the VT10 0 special keys, which are not available on the communicator keyboard. The special keys include: Four function keys: PF1-4. The specific function of these keys depends on the service or progr am to which you are connected. All VT100 application keypad keys: numbers 1-9, hyphen, comma, period, Enter. The following VT100 functions: reset terminal, Ctrl-\, Ctrl-], Ctrl-~, Ctrl-?. In a Telnet connection, these special keys include the following commands that can be used in the remote systems that support them: Interrupt â Interrupts the current proc ess on the remote computer . Skip command output â Prevents the commands from being shown on the display . Are you there ? â Enquires whether the remote system is s till r unning, if the execution of a task seems to take too long. Select a special character and press Insert . The inserted s pecial character sends a control signal to the remote computer; it is not sh own on the display . The arrow keys can be used for scrolling the view . Scrolling does not a f fect the cursor position. Pressing any keyboard key retu rns the view to the cu rsor position. Press Hang up to close the connection to the host, end the data call and return to the T eln et application m ain view . Figure 1 0 Note: The te xt transfer function is also available in T elnet. See â To transfer textâ on page 106.
109 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Text Web With Text W eb you can fetch information from the Internet, using SMS. Such information can include f or example flight s ch edules, weather reports an d stock news. Y ou can also access services provided by your network operator and Nokia. Nokia service s The contents are maintained by Nokia, and they cannot be changed. Nokia updates the contents from tim e to time. Operat or services The Oper ator servi ces a ll ows the network operator to provide various services to the subscribers. The operator-spec ific items may vary from subscriber to subscriber , and can be updated by the network operator . To define ser vices 1 To define new ser vice access points, press Settings in the Te x t Web main view. 2 Press New to open an empty service information card, or pr ess Edit to modify an existing service. Enter th e title of the service, the server number, which is a message centre number, and the service number, which is a phone number. To fetch informatio n 1 In the Text Web main view, scroll to one of the service access points that you have defined and press Select . 2 Enter in the space pr ovide d a keyword that describes th e type of information you are looking for. If you press Get keywor ds , you will receive a list of available keywords. History list contain s keywords th at you have used previously. 3 To send the keywor d, press Send . When you re ceive a reply from th e service provider, the TTML browser opens up. To use the bro wser Press the arrow keys on the keyboard to move from one hotspot to another . To follow a hyperlink, press Fetch . With Change you can tick off boxes and buttons. To add the form to the Saved forms list, press Save and select Save form . To copy the text to the Downloaded files f older , select Co py text .
110 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To s end the fo rm, pres s Se nd . Save d forms Saved forms is a âÂÂhotlistâ to which you can add items from the other services. It grants you quick access to I nternet services. To open the selected for m, press Open . The TTML browser opens up with the same commands as above . To rename a service, press Rename in the Saved forms main view . To remove the selected form, press Dele te . Figure 1 1
Notes 111 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 10. Notes Notes is used for writing texts and managing various documents stored on the communicator . Folders in the Notes main view ar e: Own texts â Written ma il, faxes, shor t messages, notes and memos Received faxes/ messages/ mail â All r e ceived documents Downloaded files â Docu ments downloaded with the Internet applications Document outbox â Documents waitin g to be sent If you have a memory card inserted in the communicator, the memory card icon will be shown at the bottom of the folders list. See figure 1. To wri te a do cume nt 1 Press Write note . The note editor open s. 2 Write the document. To read a document 1 Select a folder and press Open . 2 Select a document from th e list and press Open . Figure 1 Note: When you open a document, the document is opened in the appropriate editor or viewer. The available comman ds vary according to the editor/viewer.
Notes 112 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To pr int a doc ume nt 1 Open the docum ent. 2 Press the Menu button and select Print . For more in formation, see âÂÂDocument featuresâ on page 34. To remove a document 1 Select a f older and press Open . 2 Select a document from the list an d press Delet e . To make a subfolder 1 Select a f older and press Open . 2 Press the Menu button and select Create folder . 3 Write down the name of the folder and pr e ss OK . To re move a subf olde r 1 Select the folder under which th e subfolder is located and pre ss Open . 2 Select the subfolder and press Dele te . To use the Menu button When you press the Menu button in an opened folder , the following options become available: Rena me â Y ou can give a new name to the selected subfolder or document. Pe r manent folders cannot be renamed. Copy â Y ou c a n choo se a folder in to which the selec ted documen t will be copied. Move â Y ou can choose a folder into which the selected document w ill be moved. Create folder â Y ou can make a new subfolder . Copy to sounds â Y ou can add the selected tune to the list of ringing tones. Transfer via IR â You can copy files to another Nokia 91 1 0 Com municator via the infrared link. The IR port of the receiving device must be activated before the operation. See âÂÂInfra red activationâ on pa ge 131. Note: If the opened document is very large, i.e. dozens of pages long, the time required befor e the document opens, is longer than with smaller documents. Note: Ca lend ar me mos an d Con tact images are permanent su bf olders and thus c an not be remov e d.
Notes 113 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To edit documents For information about the available editing shortcuts see âÂÂDo cument featuresâ on page 34. Documents that ope n in the Notes editor can be directly edited and formatted. To format the text, press Style . Choose from the following options: Font: URW Mono / URW Rom an / URW S ans (true type fonts) Size: 10 / 12/ 14 / 18 / 24 / 36 / User defin ed (measured in points) Bold (Ctrl-B): On / Off Italics (Ctrl-I): On / Off Underlined (Ctrl-U): On / Off Justification: Left / Cen tred / Right / Full Margins â O pens a new view where you can choose a value for the top, bottom, left and right margins. The unit o f measurement is ei ther inches or centimetres, chosen in the System settings, see âÂÂSystem settingsâ on page 125 . A new style setting aff e cts all new text from t h e cursor point forward. The margin settings, however , apply to the whole document. If you wish to change the settings permanently , do it in the main view settings, see âÂÂNotes settingsâ on page 1 15. Special character s The special character key , Chr , on the communicator keyboar d is used to create characters that are not included on the keyboard. The character key can always be used when you are able to enter char acters from the keyboard. To insert spec ial characters from the character table 1 Press and release the Chr key. The character ta b le opens on the display, see figure 2. 2 Move the selection frame over th e desired character with th e arrow keys. 3 Press Insert to close the character table and to insert the selected character to the l eft of the cursor . Figure 2
Notes 114 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To insert spec ial characters from the keyboard 1 Press and hold the Chr key a n d simultaneously pr ess a key with a special character printed on the key as the third character. The special key will be inserted on the display. In addition, special characters can be generated using certain unmarked keys, for ex ample, âÂÂaâ and â e âÂÂ: 1 Press and h old the Chr key and simultaneously press a letter key. The first special character is displayed. 2 Continue to hold down the Chr key an d press the letter key again. The second special chara cte r is shown in the place of the first, and so on, until the first character is shown again. The case of the special character is determined by w hether Shift or the Caps lock ke y has been pressed. To send docum ents When you pres s Send in the Notes e ditor , the following options become available: Send as fax â You can send the document as a fax. This option opens the fax directory . The sending procedure from this point on is similar to that described in âÂÂTo send faxesâ on page 7 1. Send as short message â Y ou can s end the documen t as a short message. T he sending procedure is similar to that described in âÂÂTo send short messagesâ on page 78. Send as mail â Y ou ca n send the document a s an e- mail messa ge. The sending procedure is similar to that desc ribed in âÂÂTo send mailâ on page 9 2. Downloaded files and read-only documents All downloaded and captured texts ca n be opened in the Note editor . Received short messages, received mail and ASCII text files transferred to the communicator are read-only documents. Re ad-only documents themselves cannot be edited, but an editable copy can be created: 1 Ope n a read- only d ocument . The co ntents are show n as plai n text . 2 Press any character key. Y ou will be asked if you want to create an e ditable copy. 3 Press Create to close the original file and copy its contents to a new text file. If the original file is in DOS format, it will be removed after an editable copy has been created. 4 Edit the n ew note normally. The contents of a received fax cannot be conver ted into text or edited. Opening a fax activa tes the fax viewer and opening a n image activates the image vie wer .
Notes 115 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Notes settings Y ou can change the defa ult settings of the note editor by pressing Setti ngs in the Notes main view . The settings are valid until they ar e changed again. To change the settings, choose a setting and press Change . Font: URW Mono / URW Rom an / URW Sans Size: 1 0 p oints / 12 / 14 / 18 / 24 / 36 / User def ined Margins â Opens a new view where you can define values for the top, bottom, left or right mar gin. The unit of m easurement used in this setting is e ither inches or centimetres, an d it can be changed in the System settin gs.
Notes 116 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Calen dar 117 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 11. Calendar In the Calendar application, you ca n check your sche du led events, keep a list of tasks in th e To-do list, set alar ms and link memos to events, an d book events in other peopleâÂÂs calendars. Monthly schedule The monthl y sched ule shows the days o f the current month in rows according to the numb er of the w eek. The w eek numbe r is sho wn in the co lumn on th e left. TodayâÂÂs date is shown in a frame (in the figure 1, August 6th). The currently selected date has a dar k background wit h white digits (August 28th). Use the arrow keys to select another date. Dates that have sche duled events are marked in bold (A ugust 9th ). If the selec ted date contains scheduled even ts (as in the figure, August 28 th), they are shown in a separ ate daily events list o n the right side of the display . The schedule can be e dited b y selecting the date and pressing Day or the Enter key . If the whole date ha s been reserv ed for an event, th e event is shown in th e daily events list in bold (as âÂÂDesign conferenceâ in figure 1). To write yourself reminders of important matters, press To-do l ist . Figure 1 Tip: In order to optimise the amount of data stored on your communicator and the operation of the Calendar, it is recommended that you regularly remove old calendar events with the Data removal function. See âÂÂData removalâ on page 134.
Calen dar 118 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Weekly schedu le The weekly schedule shows the timetable of th e selected week. TodayâÂÂs date is outlined by a square frame (Tuesday 17th in figure 2). The currently selected time box is shaded (Thursday 19th, 12:00 in figure 2). All the event s are mar ked with gre y bars accordin g to their star t and end times . The bars are thi nner if the e vents of the day overlap (Fr iday 20th in fig ure 2). If the w hole day has been r eserved for an event, all the time boxes are marked with a dark grey bar (Tuesday 1 7th in figure 2 ). To open the daily or the monthly schedule, press Day or Month , r espec tively . Y ou can u se the arrow keys to scroll inside a day in the wee kly schedule. If you scroll to a tim e box containing an event, the bar across the bottom of the weekly schedule wi ll show the basic details of the even t. See figure 2. The numbers to the r ight of the event description indicate the number of events contained within that time box, e.g. âÂÂ2/3â means that you are seeing the details of the second of th ree events. If a time box contains more than one event, you may view the basic details of each event by scrolling to th e time box and pr essing the T ab key on the keyboard. The details will be shown on the bar across the bottom of th e weekly schedule. To view the previous event, press Shift and Tab . Figure 2 Tip: To add events to the month ly and weekly schedules, just start writing the event description. T he Details view opens automatically.
Calen dar 119 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Daily sched ule Open the daily schedule by pressing Day in the monthly or weekly schedule. The daily events list displa ys the schedule for the selected day . The contents of the entries are freely editable. Daily schedul e symbols â Attached alarms â Calendar bookings â Attached memos â Recur ring events â Annual events The symbols appear in the order of priority before the eve nt description. See fig ure 3 . To add events 1 Move the selection frame over the starting time of the event. 2 Type the event on the dotted line. If you want to add an event without a start time, wr ite the event, press De tails and remove the start time. The event will be shown with a dot in front. To rem ove ev ents Select the event and press Delete . If you remove or edit recurring events, you will be asked if you want to apply the ch anges to all or only to the selected event. To adjust the de tails of the select ed event Press De tail s . A new view opens, allowing you to adjust the following details: Description â The description of the even t. Figure 3 Tip: If the st ar tin g tim e alr ead y contains an event, pr e ss En ter to create a new row with the same starting time.
Calen dar 120 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Reserve whole day(s) â You can write down the number of days required for the event. Start: Date â The date of the event. The default date is that of th e selected day . The date format is set in the System settings. Time â The time when the event sta rts. End: Date â The date when the e vent ends. Time â The time wh en the eve nt ends. Alarm â Sets an alarm for the selected event. See âÂÂAlarmsâ on page 1 23. Frequency â You can define how often the event repeats. The options are None /Daily /Weekly /Monthly /Annually/Every other we ek/Wor kin g days . Repeat until: [date] â Y ou can write down th e last date of the r ecurring event. Event sent to â Lists all the people to whom you have booked the event. The list shows the status of the sent event: Accepted or Confirmed â The recipient has accepted th e booking. Discarded â T h e recipient has rejected the booking. No reply â No information has been received from the recipient. Forced â T he booking was sen t as a reservation. To attach memos to an even t 1 Move the selection f rame over the desired event and press Detai ls in the daily schedule. 2 Press Memo . 3 Write the memo. The following command buttons are available: Send â Y ou can sen d the memo as a fax, SMS or mail. Style â You ca n form at the text. Delet e â Remo ves the mem o. Close â Links the memo to the sel ected event. Memos are stored in the C alendar memos subfolder of the Own texts folder. To use the Menu button When you press the Menu button in the monthly , daily and weekly schedules, the following options become ava ilable: To-do list â Opens the To-do list. Available in the daily schedule only . Pe ndi ng requests â Open s the list of pending calen dar event requests. Today â Shows the current day. Next month/week/day (Ct rl- N) â Shows the next month, week or day .
Calen dar 121 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Previous month/week /day (Ctrl-P) â Shows the p revious month, we ek or day . Settings â Enables you to cha n ge the following options: Booking password â You can set a password to protect your calen dar from receiving reservations from anyone except those who have your password. The maximum length of the password is 8 characters. When a pass word is written in the field, all char acter s appear a s asterisks. Default alarm â When you set an alarm to an event, the alarm will go off 10 minutes before the scheduled time of the event, unless you spec i fy otherwise here. Beginning of week â You can select which day is considered to be the first day of the week. Calendar booking Calendar booking enables you to send even t requests or reservations to other communicators or calendar servers. The diffe rence between an even t request and an event reservation is that the r ecipient may decide whether to accept or discard an event request, but e vent reservations can only be accepted. Bookin g password Sending event reservations requires that you know the recipientâÂÂs booking password. If you add the recipien tâÂÂs password to the booking password field of the recipientâÂÂs contact card, the password is automatica l ly taken from t h ere when yo u send a re serv atio n. When you send a re ser vation with an incorr e ct password, the recipie ntâÂÂs communicator discar ds the reservation. Y ou can give your own booking password to those whom you allow to s end reservations to your calendar . If you do not set a password, your communicator accepts all reservations. Define your booking password in the Calendar settings. To make requests and res ervations 1 Select an event in the daily schedule or w rite a new one. 2 Press Cal endar booki ng in the Details vie w. 3 Select whether to send the event as a request or a reservation. 4 Press Transfer via IR to send the booking to another Nokia 9 110 Communicator via the infrared link, or press Send as SMS to open the SMS directory where you can select the recipient for the bookin g. Note Note: The r ecipientâÂÂs booking passwo rd is not nee ded when you se nd event req uests.
Calen dar 122 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. that the recipient mu st have a phone number in the Tel(GSM) field, or, if you are sending the booking to a calendar server, a se r ver number in the Tel(Server) field . 5 Press Send to send the booking. To receive requests When you receive an event request, a note appears on the display showing the details of the event, and the name or number of the sen der . On the left side of the note is your schedule for the day, w here you can check whether you have other appointments at th e same time. If you pre ss Acc ept or Den y , your communicator sends a reply to th e sender informing about your decision. Accepted events a re moved to your calendar . The received r equest can be dismissed by pressing Cancel . If you press Hold , the event request i s moved to th e Pending requ ests list to wait for your decision. This list is accessed by pressing the Menu button in the monthly , weekly or daily schedule and selecting P ending requests . On the right side of the list is your schedule for the day , where you can check whether you have other appointments at the same time. The commands in the P e nding requests list are Accept and Deny , the f unction of which is explained above; and Dele te , which removes th e event from the list. To re ceive rese rvations When you receive an event reservation, a note appears on the display giving the details of the event. When you pr ess OK, the reservation is mov e d to your calendar . If you press Confirm , the event is moved to your calenda r and a confirmation note is sent to the sender of the reservation. To cancel bookings There are two ways to can cel bookings that you have sent: 1 Remove the event from your own calendar. Your communicator will check the âÂÂEvent sent toâ list (see âÂÂDaily sc hedu leâ on page 119) and send a Figure 4 Note: Old events are not removed when new events are a dded, even if they have the same date and time.
Calen dar 123 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. special SMS to all the participants who share the even t, removing the event in their calendars as well. Or, 2 Select a participant in the â Event sent toâ list and press Ca ncel event . The event is removed from the participantâÂÂs calen dar. To cha nge a boo king t hat y ou ha ve s ent Select the event and press Details . Make the desired changes. The changes are sent to the calendars of the persons to whom you have sent the booking. Alarms To set an alarm to the currently se lected event 1 Press De tails in the daily schedule. 2 Select the Alarm option a n d press Chan ge . 3 Select one of the alarm options: None â No alarm is attached to the event. At start time â The alar m will sound a t the start time. ... minutes befor e event â The alarm will go off as set in the Calendar settings unless you specify otherwise here. Y ou can choose the a lar m tone in t he System sounds settings of th e System application. An active alarm is indicated by the bell icon in the daily schedule (in the figure 3, the 1 1 :00 event). When the alarm sounds, a note is shown on both displays. The alarm sound can be turned off by pressing any key . If you have set the communicator to a s i lent profile in the T elephone settings, only the alarm note will be shown. To-do li st The To-do list is a list of tasks which must be completed ev entually , but are not connected to any specific time or day . The en tries in th e To- do list are Tip: To set alar ms that are not related to any calendar event, use the Clock application, see âÂÂClockâ on page 138. Tip: After a cale nda r alarm ha s occurred, you can m ove the message contents of the alarm to the To-do list by pressing Move to To -do list .
Calen dar 124 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. numbered, and th ey can be given different statuses. High priority entries are shown at the top of the list. See figure 5 . To access the To- do list 1 Press the To-do list command button in the monthly or weekly schedule. Or, 2 Press the Menu button and select the T o -do list option in the daily schedule. To change the status of the se lected task 1 Press Pr iority . A pop-up box opens. 2 Change the status of the entry to High priority or Normal priority , or mark the task as Completed , as the task number four in f igure 5. To write down a n e w to-do task, press New . An em pty entry field is added at the end of the To-do list. To remove th e currently selected task f rom the list, press Delet e . Figure 5
System 125 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 12. System System contains the following applications: Security , User data, Memory , Infrared activation, Digital camera connectivity , Remote synchronisation, Fax modem, Data removal, Install/Remove software, Backup/Restore, Memory card tool, and About this product. To start a System appli cation 1 Press the System application button. 2 Scroll to the application and pr ess Select . 3 If a System application is active, you must close it by pressing Clos e in the main view of the applica tion before y ou can sta rt another . System settings To change the System settings 1 Press Set ti ngs in the System main view. 2 Select the setting you want to change. 3 Press Change . The System settings include all system-related per manent settings: Syst em sou nds â Covers all the sounds in the c om municator . The available settings are: Default ringing tone â You can select one of the tones in th e pop-up box or compose a special ringing tone for your telephon e with the Composer application. See âÂÂComposerâ on page 141. You can also use the sounds you have recorded w ith the Digital voice recor der as ringing tones. Se e âÂÂVoice recorderâ on page 144. If a tone or sound is e rased, the default ringing tone Grande valse will replace it. Alternate ringing tone â If your SIM card suppor ts the alternate line service, you can select a different ringing tone for Line 2. See âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. Note: When one of the PC connectivity applications or the fax m odem is in use, the communicator consumes more power than normally. To exten d the battery operation time, these applications should be closed when they are not used.
System 126 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Notification tones: On/Off â Determines whether a sound is heard, for example, when the me mory is too low. Application tones: Calendar alarm, Clock alarm, Received fax, Received SMS, Received mail â For each of these items you can set a specific r inging tone. You would then be able to tell by the tone whethe r you have received a fax or a short message, for exam ple. The None option allows you to turn the selected tone off, with the exception of the clock alarm. Note that when the phone is turned off, only calendar and c l ock a larm ringing tones can be he ard. This requires, however, that the ringing tones are set through the System settin gs. Print settings â Y ou can select the default settings for printing. For more about printing, see âÂÂDocument featuresâ on page 34. Connection type â Se lect whether to use infrared or cable connection. Header â Set this on if you want to print your name and the date and time of printing on th e top of each page. Paper size â Choose eith er A4 or Letter . Default printer â Select the printer used in the cable con n ection. Baud ra te: 9600/1 9200/57 600/115 200 â Select the data transm i ssion rate used in the cable c on nection. Flow control: Software/None â Y ou can select whether to let the software control the data flow . Data bits: 7/ 8 â Host-specific communicat io n parameter for the cable connection. Parity: None/Odd/Even â Host-specific communication parameter f o r the cable connection. Stop bits: 1/2 â Host-specific communication parameter for the cable connection. Backlight period â Y ou can set the time period for which the backlight is switched on. The available settings are 15/30/45 seco nds /1/2/3/4/5 m inutes . The backlight can also be turn ed off by pressing the button. Figure 1
System 127 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Screen blanker period â Y ou can s et the time period after which th e display will blank out if the device remains inactive. This feature saves the battery and increases the operation time of the com municator . The time-out period can be from 2 to 15 minutes. The screen blanker cann ot be turned off. Cont rast contro l â The contrast view shows a test picture and a s et of commands that can be used to adjust the picture. The command button increases the contrast. Th e â command bu tton decreases the contrast. When the setting seems sa tisfactory , press OK . Pr eferenc es â Preferences lets you change date and time formats and the u nit of measurem ent: Date format: dd.mm.yy / mm.dd.yy / yy.mm.dd . â For example , 22.03. 98 / 03.22. 98 / 98.03.2 2. Time forma t: 24 h our / AM /PM â For e xample, 09: 35 / 9: 35 A M. Unit of measure â Choose either Centimetre or Inch as th e basic uni t of meas ure. Security Note: The predete rmined default lock code 12345 is provided in the sales package of the communicator. For security reasons, it is imperative that you change the lock code. Change the code eithe r in the Security options menu of the phone (see âÂÂSettings (Menu 4)â on page 159), or via the com m unicator interface (see âÂÂT o change the security settingsâ on page 128). Keep the new code secret and in a saf e place, separate from the communicator . To lock the communicator automati cally 1 Press Set ti ngs in the main view of the Security application. 2 Select Autolock period and press Change . 3 Enter you r lock code at the p rompt, an d define th e autolock period. W hen the comm unicator remain s inactive for the de fined period , it will loc k itself. To lock the communicator manually 1 Press Lock sy stem in the main view of the Security application. 2 If the A utolock pe riod is in use, the de vice wi ll lock im mediately . If the Autolock period is off, you must enter your lo ck code bef ore the devi ce is locked. Note: Extens ive use of the backlight may drain the battery.
System 128 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. After the communicator has been locked, it cannot be used until the correct lock code is given. However , incoming voice calls can be answered via the phone, and faxes and short messages are received normally . To unlo ck the communi cator 1 Enter your lock code in the input field. 2 Press OK . To change the securit y settings 1 Press Settings in the Security main view. 2 Select the setting and press Change . 3 When you are prompted for a code, enter it an d press OK . Choose a new value. The codes are shown as asterisks. If you are changing a code, you will be prompted for the current code and then the new code twice. The code cannot be changed if the corresponding security feature is not in use. For example, if the PIN code request is set to Off , the PIN code cannot be changed. Pressing Clos e will close the security settin gs and return to the Security main view . Note: When the communicator is locked, it may be possible to make a ca ll via the phone to the emergency number pr ogrammed into your phone, e.g. 112 or other official emergency n umber. Tip: Most of the se curity features can also be c h anged in the Security options menu of the ph one. See âÂÂSetting s (Men u 4)â on page 159.
System 129 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Security settings PIN code request: O n / Off â If you set the PIN code re quest on, the communicator requests the code eve ry time the phone is tu rned on by pressing . This setting cannot be changed if the phone is switched off or if there is no valid SI M card inserted. If you enter the PIN code incorrectly three times in a row , you will need a PUK code to unblock the S IM card. When the SIM card is blocked, you cannot send or receive any documents or calls, except emergen cy calls. Otherwise, the communicator can be u s ed normally . Autolock period: Autolock off/1/2/5/15/30/60 minutes â Determines the security time-out period, after which the communicator will lock. The timer is reset by any input, calls, data transfer , printing, etc. SIM change security: On / Off â Wh en active, every time the phone is switched on this security option checks whether the SIM card in the communicator h as been changed. If the SIM card has been changed and the new SIM card has not been used with your communicator previously , the communicator locks itself until the lock code i s correctly entered. The communicator recognises five diffe rent SIM cards as th e ow nerâÂÂs cards . PIN code â This setting allows you to change the PIN code. The changing procedure is described at the beginning of this "Security" section. The new PIN code must be 4 to 8 digits long. Changin g the PIN code requires that the PIN code request is set on, the phone is on, and that there is a valid SIM card inserted in the communicator . PIN2 code â This setting en ables you to change the PIN2 code. The PIN2 code is required to access some functions, such as the call cost settings, which must be supported by your SIM card. If you enter an incorrect PIN2 code three times in succession, you will ne ed a PUK2 code to unblock the PIN2 code. The length of the PIN2 code is 4 to 8 digits. Figure 2 Not e: Some SIM cards do not allow you to turn the PIN code request of f.
System 130 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Lock code â This setting allows you to change the lock code . The changing procedure is described at the beginning of this "Security" section. The new code must be 5 digits lon g. If you key in an incorrect lock code several times in succession, the communicator must be sent bac k to the dealer to be unlocked. Barring pa ssword â T his setting allows you to c hange the b arring passwor d. The new cod e must be 4 digits long. To change the password, the phon e must be on and within the network cov erage, th e Call barrin g service mu st be activated for your SIM car d which m ust b e valid a nd ins erted i n the co mmunica tor . If you enter an incorrect barring password three times, the password is blocked and you must as k the network operator for a new password. User data The User data card contains your pers o nal information. Y ou can freely edit the information in the Name , Company , Job title, A ddress , Tel , Fax , Tel (G SM ) , Fax( GSM ) , Mail and UR L fields. The User data will automatically be included in the corresponding f ields of the fax cover page in the F ax application. Likewise, the SMS application uses this informa tion when y ou send your own business ca rd. When you pres s Attach image in the user data card, you can attach your own picture to the card. The picture m ust first be stor e d in JPEG format in the Contact images subfolder of th e Downloaded files f older . Memo ry This application shows the amount of av ailable free memory for storing data and installing new software. Press Details to open up a list of folders and other data in the communicator . The list shows how much memory each of them takes up, and it is updated each time you press Deta ils . If your memory card is inserted in the communicator , press Memory card to check the amount of available memory in the card. If the memory is getting low , you should remove some documents. Bef ore removing, you can print, f ax or mail them, or transfer them to a PC or a memory card. Note: Avoid using codes that are similar to emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency n umber.
System 131 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Infrared activation If you want to use the PC Suite for Nokia 9 1 1 0 Com municator program (see âÂÂTo use the PC Suiteâ on page 39) with the in frared connection, or if you want to receive data from another device via the infrared, you need to use the Infrared activation application. 1 Make sure that the infrared port of the communicator faces the infrared port of the PC or another device. 2 Open the Infrared activa tion application on the communicator. 3 Press Acti v ate . 4 To end the infrared connection, press Disa ble . To transfer data betwe e n two communicators 1 Make sure that the infrared ports of the com municators face each other. 2 Open the Infrared activa tion application on the receiving communicator. 3 In the sending communicator, go to the application from where you want to transfer data, and press Transfer via IR . Digital c amera connecti vity The Digital camera connectivity application en ables you to transfer images between your communicator and a digital still camera or another communicator via t h e infrared connection. When you start the application, press Image list to open a list of the images in the Downloaded files folder . However , you can only select image files with the extensions UPF or JPG. To transfer images fr om another device to the communicator The connection to a digital camera or another commu n icator is always established by the receiving communicator . Note: A m aximum o f 20 files can be transferred at a time. Tip: The infrared link can also be activated by pressing C hr-1 on the communicator keyboard. Note: The infrared protocol of th e digital camera must be IrTran-P in order to be com patible with the Nokia 91 10 Communi cator.
System 132 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 1 Make sure that the infrared port of your communicator faces the infrared port of the oth er device. 2 Open the Digital camera connectivity a pplication and press Image list . 3 Press Rec eive to start transferring the selected UPF images from the other device to your communicator. To transfer images f r om the communicator to anot her device 1 Open the Digital camera connectivity a pplication and press Image list . 2 Select the UP F image(s) you want to transfer. 3 Make sure that the infrared port of your communicator faces the infrared port of the other device, and press Send . To rename the selected image, pr ess Rename and write the new name in the input field. Do not change the extensi on at the end of the name. To use the Menu button When you press the Menu bu tton in the Image list, the following options become available: Open â O pens the image. Y ou can then zoom in and out as well as rotate the ima ge. Delete â Re moves t he ima ge. Convert to JPEG â Conv erts the s elected image(s) from UPF to JPEG format. Convert to UPF â Converts the selected image(s) from JPEG to UPF format. Image information â Pr esents information about the image. Y ou can also view the information with the Ctrl-i key com bination. Remote synchronisation To synchronise your calendar data with a PC calendar , us e the Remote synchronisation application. With this application, you connect to the PC via the I nternet. Note that you need an Internet access point, see âÂÂInternet settings â on page 86. The PC Suite for Nokia 91 10 Communicator program must be running on the PC to whic h you are conn ecting. To synchronis e calendar data 1 Press Settings and define the destination host, which is the IP address of the server PC, and select the I nternet access point used. 2 Press Start . A data call is made, and the calendar data is sent from your communicator to the destination host. 3 When the synchronised calendar data has been sent back to your communicator, the data call ends.
System 133 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Fax modem Before your PC can recognis e the communicator as a fax modem, the PC needs to be properly confi gured. Consult the userâÂÂs guide of your PC on h ow to install new modems. PCs wi th Microsoft W indows 95 or NT 3.5 1 or higher operatin g systems can use th e modem informatio n file found o n the d iskette supplied i n the communica tor sales pac kage. See also the Documenta tion section on the CD-ROM. Using the communicator as a fax modem requires that data calls are supported by the network you are using and that this service is activated for your SIM card. Contact your home ser vice pr ovider for details. 1 Press Settings and select the c o nnection type. The functioning of a cable connection when the communicator is used as a fax modem is not guaranteed. 2 Connect the communicator to the PC via an infrared link as descr ibed in âÂÂTo use the PC Suiteâ on page 39. 3 Wait until the connection is esta blish ed. 4 Press Activate in the Fax modem main view . This will change the communicator to a fax modem. When the com m unicator is used as a fa x modem, the call status in dicator shows the text MODEM. 5 To stop using the com m unicator as a fax modem, press Disable . The operations of a modem ca n be controlled by A T commands and S- registers. These commands gi ve the advanced us er an opportunity to contr ol all the features of the modem. Should you need to enter the commands manually , consult the documentation of the PC application tha t you are using. A list of c o mmon A T commands based on the ETSI 0 7 .0 7 standar d and supported by the Nokia 91 1 0 Communicator are available in the atcomm.txt file on the diskette included in th e sales package of your communicator . When the communicator is used as a fax modem, its nor mal communication features are disabled. O therwise, the applications r ema in functional. If an active PC connection is idle for longer than 20 minutes, the f ax modem is automatically disabled to conserve power . However , when the communicator is connected to an electrical o utlet, for example, while ch arging a battery, the time-out is not active. Figure 3
System 134 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Data removal The Data removal applicat i on comes in handy if you want to remove personal information from the com municator , for example, before lending it to someone else. In this way you need not remove data one by one. 1 Select what kind of data you want to remove. The removable data is arranged in four groups: All device data , Calen dar data, Documents, Contacts and speed dials . 2 Press De lete . 3 Before any data is removed, you must enter your lock code. See âÂÂSecurityâ on page 127. When removing calendar data , you can choose to re m ove all calendar data or only events that occur bef ore a given date. Install/ Remove software The Install/Remove software application enables you to install n e w software from a PC to the communicator and later remove the software. To use this application, you need to start the Nokia Commun i cator Server on your PC and connect your communicator to the PC. See â To use the Nokia Communicator Serverâ on page 46. Press Install and select the software you want to install, or press Remov e and select the software you want to remove. The set of applications that were on the communicator a t the time of purchase cannot be removed. This is to ensure that the basic functions of the communicator are always available. Note: Even if you choose the All device data option, your Internet settin gs will not be removed. If you want to restore your communicator to the same state it was in at the time of pu rchase, see chapter 15 "Troubleshooting" on page 165. Caution: Beware of viruses! Only install on the Nokia 91 10 Commu nicator soft ware you have obtained from sources that offer adequate protection against viruses. Tip: To sa v e th e m em or y s pa ce of the communicator, you can install sof tware to a memory card.
System 135 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Backup/Restore The Backup/Restore application enables you to make back ups of various data on your communicator , and to restore it later . Data is backed up in sets which are stored in separate dir e ctories on the PC. To use this application , you need to start the Nokia Communicator Server on your PC and connect your communicator to the PC. See âÂÂTo use the Nokia Communicator Serverâ on page 46. Select whether to backup All data , Documents , Con tacts, or C alendar and press Ba ck up . A backup directory w ill be created if necessary . The r estorati on proc edur e is car ried ou t in the same wa y as the backup oper ation, excep t that inst ead of Backup you must pr ess Restore . When da ta is rest ored, files w ith s imilar names i n the destin ation f older will be ove rwrit ten. To make backups or restore data between a Nokia 9000 Communicator or a Nokia 9000i Communicator and a Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator , see âÂÂTo transfer data from older communicator modelsâ on page 37. Memory card tool The Memory card tool application can only be started if there is a memory card inserted in the communicator . With this application, you can format and rename the memory ca rd, and check the condition of t h e files. About this product This application displays information about the Nokia 91 1 0 Communicator . Note: While the Backup/Restore is in progress, the other applications of the communicator cannot be used. To interrupt the ope ration, for example, to make an emergen cy call, press Canc el and confirm by pressing Inte rrupt . Tip: While travelling, you can make backups of important documents to a memory card.
System 136 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Ext ras 137 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 13. Extras Press the button on the keyboard to open the Extras application group, which contains Calculator , Clock, Composer and V oice recorder . With Extr as you can also launch applications located on your memory card. To star t one of the applications, select it and press Select . To close an active application, press Close . Calculator The Calculator contains an input field at the bottom of the screen, and above it a list where previous calculations, if any , can be seen. The most recent calculations are shown at the bottom of the list. The list can be scrolled with the arrow keys, and it can be emptied by pressing Clea r list . The results of the calculations appear in bo ld . As long as you have not pressed Enter or âÂÂ=âÂÂ, you can move in the ca lcu lation string with the arrow keys and edit the string. Figure 1 Note: More applications ca n be installed to your communicator from the CD-ROM included in the sales package. Tip: W ith on e Extras application active, you can quickly switch to another by pressing the button.
Ext ras 138 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. The following characters can be used for t he corresponding operations: To add functions in the i nput field 1 Press Functions . 2 Select one of the available categories and press Se lect . You will see a list of functions and you can select th e one you want. You can sele ct several functions before returning to the Calculator main view. To copy calcul ations in the in put field 1 Press Co py to select and copy a calculation or a result back to the input field for modification or r ecalculation. 2 To copy a calculation, press Copy calcul ation , and to copy a result, press Copy res ult . 3 Press Bac k . The sele cted item will be copied to the input f ield. To change the m ode of the calculator When you press the Menu button in the Calculator main view and select Settings , you can change the mode of the calcu lator . Select either Radian s , Degrees , or G radients , and press OK . Clo ck The Clock shows the time and date in your home city and country , as well as in several other cities and countries in the world. The Clock also includes an alarm clock. Character Function Numbers 0 to 9 . (full stop) decimal point addition â subtraction * multiplication / division ( ) brackets = or Enter sum Esc clears the e ntry field
Ext ras 139 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To set an alarm An alarm ca n be set to occur within the next 24 hours. Alarms that occur l ater than this a r e set in th e Calendar application. 1 Press Alarm clock in the Clock main view. 2 Press or - to adjust the time shown in the alarm clock display. Each press changes the time by one minute, but if you hold the button down a wh ile longer, the time will start to ch ange in15-minute steps. 3 Press OK to accept the set alarm. Whe n an alarm is set, the bell icon an d the time of the ala r m are sh ow n in the Clock ma in view . There can only be one active alarm. If an alar m is already active, the command names are different. A counter on th e lower right side of the scr e en shows how much time remains to the time of the alarm. Press Change alarm time if you want to readjust the tim e of the ala r m. Press Delete alarm to cancel the alarm. To turn off the alarm sound 1 When the alarm sounds, press an y phone or communicator keyboard key to silence it. 2 Press the OK command button. If you do n ot press OK , the alar m will sound four more times or until you press the OK button. However, if the alarm interval is set to zero, the alarm will sound only once. Set the alarm interval in the clock settin gs. Figure 2 Note: Alar ms will occur according to the home city tim e. When in a diffe rent time zone, re member to change the home city.
Ext ras 140 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. World t ime World time (figure 3) is accessed with the World time command in the Clock main view . The Home box shows the nam e of the curren tly selected home city , countr y , time, date and wh ether daylight saving time is in use. The Destination box shows the same information for the cu rrently selected destination city , as well as the international call prefixes needed to make a call from the home city to the destination city . The world map shows the currently selected destination city in cross hairs. To select the d estination city 1 Press Set destinat ion . 2 Select a city from the list by scrolling the list with the arrow keys. 3 Press OK . To ed it an d add citi es 1 Press Ci tie s in the world time view to ope n a list of cities. 2 To make changes to existing cities, press Edit city . The city information is presented in the form of a ca r d with the following fields: City â The name shown in the list of cities. Can be entered manually. Country â The name of the countr y associated with the city. T he country name is selected from th e list of countries. Area code â The area code r e quired when calling the city. The area code can be entered with or without a national prefix. Only numbers can be entered. Figure 3 Tip: A quick way to select a city f rom the list of cities is to type the first letter of the city with the keyboard. The selection frame jumps to th e first city starting with that letter.
Ext ras 141 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. GMT offs et â Indicates by how much the local time differs from the Greenwich Mean Time. Select a value for the offset from a list. The offset can ra nge fro m âÂÂ12 to 12 ho urs. Set position â O pens a world map view w here you can deter mine the position of the city by moving the cross hairs with the arrow keys. W hen the city is wh ere you want it to appear, press OK . To create a new city card, press Add city . To remove a city from the list, press Delete city . T he cur rent home ci ty can not be removed; you will have to change the h om e city first. To change the Clock settings 1 Press Set ti ngs in the Clock main view. 2 Select the setting you want to change and press Change , or type the new time or date from the k e yboard. Home city â Se lect the home city by scrolling the list of cities with the arrow keys. W hen your home city has been selected, pr ess OK . If you select a city that is in a different time zone t han your current home city, the system time will change. Time â Enter the new time . The time form at is selected in the System settings. Date â Enter the new date. The date format is selected in the System settings. Alarm interval: 0/1/2/3/4/5 minut es â Choose the interval between alarms. If you select 0 , the alarm will go of f only once. Daylight saving â You can set the daylight saving time of the home city and destination city On or Off . This setting remains the sam e even if the home/destination city is changed. Composer The Composer application enables you to cr eate your own, customised ringing tones. To start the composer for the s elected tune, pr ess Open . To compose a new tune press Compose . Note: Changing the time or daylight saving time of the home city will also adjust the time o f the whole time zone, a s well as the system time. If a set alarm is skipped be cause of a changed time, the alarm will go off immediately.
Ext ras 142 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To play the selected tune, press Play . While the tune is being played, the command changes into Stop playing . To edi t a tune 1 Open a tune or press Compo se . A cursor appears at the bottom of the screen, indicating the currently selected n ote or rest. 2 To create a n ote or to alter th e pitch of the note, press th e u p or down arrow keys. Each press changes the pitch of the note. A rest will appear after all possible note le vels have been scrolled through. 3 To move th e cursor, press the left or right arrow keys. When a composition is be ing made, the following commands are available: Durati on changes the length of the selected note. Choose a quarter note, half note, whole note, sixteen th note, or eighth note. Press the command button until the value you wan t is shown. Tempo opens a pop-up box with a new set of commands. Tem po is measured in beats per minute. To alter the tempo, remove th e old value with the backspace key and enter th e new value in the in put field. To accept the tempo, press OK . To test the tempo, press Te st . The tune will be played with the tempo Figure 4 Note: You can change the phone ringin g tone in the Profile settings of the Telephone application or in the System sounds setting of the System application. See âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65 and âÂÂSystem settingsâ on page 125. Note: To edit the preset tunes that were in the communicator at the time of purchase, press the Men u button and select Copy .
Ext ras 143 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. shown in the entry field. To use th e default tempo 1 60 beats/min., press Defaul t . Play p lays the composition shown on th e staff. To remove a composition, press the Menu button, and select Delete . To restore the tun e to what it was before ed iting, press the Menu button and select Undo changes . Close returns to the Composer main view . To use shortcuts While editing, you can use t he follow ing shortcuts: To use the Menu button When you press the Menu bu tton in the Composer main view , the following options become available: Copy â Copies th e selected tune. Delete â Removes the se le cted tune(s). Rename â You c an write the new name into the input f ield. Send as SMS â Opens up the SMS directory where you can select a recipient for the composition(s). To send the composition(s), press Send . When you receive a composition via SMS, a note showing the name or n u mber of the sender and the name of the sent composition will appear on the display . Character Function Enter Plays the tune : (colon) Staccato - (hyphen) Insert s a rest Space bar Inserts an empty column to the left of the cu rsor. Backspace Deletes the selected column con taining a note or a rest . . (full stop) Lengthens the duration of the note or rest by half Tip: For quick composing, press the corresponding letter ke y on the keyboard to generate a note . For example, pressing D generates the note D. When you press Shift and a letter key, a sharp note is generated, e.g. Shift-D generates D sharp.
Ext ras 144 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To add the composition to the list of tunes, press Acce pt . To discard the composition, press Canc el . Transfer via IR â Enables you to send tunes from one communicator to another via the infrared link. The IR port of the receiving device must be activated before the operation. See âÂÂInfrared activationâ on page 13 1. Copy to mem ory card â Copies the selected tu n e(s) to the mem ory card. Copy fro m memory card â Copies th e selected tune(s) from the memory card to your communicator . Voice r ecorde r The Voice recor de r allows you to record telephone conversations and voice memos. Yo u can also listen to your recordings and other sound files. The maximum length of a recording is 3 0 seconds. The main view of the V oice r ecorder shows a list of all th e sou nd files currently stored in your communicator . To open the selected file, press Open . New fi le creates a new file into wh ich sound can be recorded. Delete allows you to remove the selected file. When you open a sound file, you will see the length, which is measured in seconds, and the size, w hich is measured in kilobytes, of the f ile. To play a re cording 1 Open the file and press Play . 2 The Pause command temporarily stops th e playing of the sound file. To start playing again, press Cont i nue . 3 To stop playing, press Stop . To reco rd 1 Open the file into which you want the sound to be recorded, and press Recor d . If you are recording a telephone conversation, you will hear a tone when the recording starts. Tip: With the Voice recorder you ca n record sounds and speech and set them as ringing tones. See âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. Note: Local laws may apply to recording conversations. Do not use this feature illegally.
Ext ras 145 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 2 You can stop the recording for a while by pressing Pause and then sta rt again by press i ng Continu e . 3 To stop the recording, press Stop . To use the Menu button When you press the Menu button in the Voice recorder main view , the following commands beco m e available: Rename â Renames the selected recording. Copy to memory card â Copies the selected recording to the memory card. Copy from memory card â Copies the sele cted recording from the m emory card to you r communicator . Note: To recor d sound and speech you need to have the phone turned on and within ra nge of network coverage. Note: Sound files th at the voice recorder can play have a .WAV extension and support the f ollow ing audio format: 8, 11, 22 or 44khz , PCM/A-law, Stereo/Mono, 8bit.
Ext ras 146 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Phone 147 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 14. Phone When operating the phone, keys are pressed one at a time. T wo keys are never to be pressed simultaneously . The phone keypad is not functional when the device cover is open. â Switches the phone on and off. â Switches between different profiles. See âÂÂProfiles (Menu 3)â on page 158. â Scroll through m enus, submenus or settings. If there are no active calls, the scroll keys can be used to browse through the memory contents. When a call is active, pressing the scroll keys adjusts the volume level. â Dials a phone number an d answers a call. â Ends any a ctive call, cancels a dialled call, or clears the display . Figure 1
Phone 148 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 0 ... 9 â The number and alphabet keys. To call your voice mailbox, press and hold 1 . â Used for special purposes in cer tain functions. If you have subscribed to two phone lines, you can switch betwe en them by pressing and holding . â The func tion of these two sele ction keys depends on the text shown on the bottom lin e of the disp lay . See fi gure 2. To use the se lection key s When this manual instructs you to press a command key , press the selection key under the command name. For example, pressing Menu , i.e. the selection key under the text Me nu , gains access to the menu functions, and Names , i.e. the selection key under the text Name s , to the search functions. The commands vary according to the situation and previous selection. The selection must often be confirmed by pressing OK . Wh enever the Back command is shown, it can be used to return to th e previous menu level without making any changes. Display indi cators The display indicators inform you about the current opera tion of the phone. The indicators described below are shown when the phone is ready for use, with no characters entered by th e user on the display . Figure 2 Note: Hold the phone as y ou would any oth er telephone with the antenna pointed up and over your shoulder. As with any other radio transmitting device, do not touch the antenna unnecessarily when the phone is switched on. Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may cause the phone to operate at a higher power level than otherwis e needed.
Phone 149 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. OPERATOR Indicates in which cellular network the phone is currently used. and bar Indicates the current signal strength at your location. The more bars are visible, the stronger is the signal. and bar Indicates how much charge there is left in the battery . The more bars are visible, the more charge is in the battery To make a call Y ou can make and receive calls only wh en the phone is switched on , the communicator has a valid SIM card fitted, and it is located in the service area of the cellular ne tw ork. 1 Key in the area code and the phone number of the per son you wish to call. If you make a mistake, you can rem o ve the digits one at a tim e by pressing Clear repeatedly, or clear the whole display by pr essing and holding Cl ear . For international calls, start by pressing twice quickly. The international call character appears on the display, which informs the network centre to sele ct the country-specific international prefix. Enter the country code, ar ea code and the phone number. 2 Press to dial th e phone number. 3 When the phone number disappears and the text Call 1 is shown, the call is connected. When a call is active, you can use the and keys to lower or raise th e volume level of the earpiece. 4 After the conversation, end the call by pressing . Note: In some networks emergency calls to the international emergency number 112 may be made w ithout a SIM card. Check with your network operator. For more information about making emergency calls, see âÂÂEmergency callsâ on page 175. Note: The microphone and earpiece are on the rear of the de vice.
Phone 150 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To an swer a c all 1 When you receive a call, the phone gives a ringin g tone and the text C all flashes on the display. If you have selected a silent profile in Menu 3, only the keypad and display lights will flash. If the caller can be identified, the callerâÂÂs name or phone number, and the text Calling will be displayed. 2 To answer th e call, press . You can answer th e call even while using the search or menu functions. If you do not w ant to answer the call, simply press . The caller wi ll hear the alerting tone change to a busy tone. 3 After the conversation, end the call by pressin g . To manage ca lls The re are a nu mber of f unct ions you c an use during a call . To access t he functions, simply press Options , scroll to the function and press Sele ct . Menu â You can access Menu . Answer â Y ou can answer an incoming call. Reje ct â Y ou can reject an incoming call. Reco rd â Y ou can record your conversation with this option. See âÂÂRecorder (Menu 6)â on page 164. Hold / Unhold â Hold allows you to put the current call on hold, so that another call can be made. The original call can be activated again by selecting Unhold . If the held call is the only call, you can unhold it by pressing or the Unhold command. Swap â This function makes a he ld call active and put a currently active call on hold. Y ou can thus alternate be tween two calls. New call â Puts the active call on hold and dials a new phone number . Send DTMF â Trans m its DTMF tones. See âÂÂTo send D TMF tonesâ on page 152. End this call â Ends the ac tive call. End all calls â Ends both the active and the held call. Mute / Unmute â Switches the microphone of th e communicator off or on. If the communicator is connected to a handsfree car kit, Mute als o turns of f the microphone of the car kit. Confer ence â If you have one call active and another call on h old, this option merges th em into a con ference call. Confer ence / One to one â Conference includes a new participant in a conference call. During a confe rence call, One to one allows yo u to convers e privately with a selected participant. Tran sfe r â The voic e call tran sfer enables you to co nnect two vo ice call s
Phone 151 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. togeth er and d isconnect yourself from bot h calls. See âÂÂMul tiple call sâ on pag e 62. N ote tha t not all netw ork operato rs suppo rt thi s functi on. Data â When you h ave an alternating call active, this option changes the mode of the call from voice to fax. Se e âÂÂMultiple callsâ on page 62. V oice â W hen you have an alternating call active, this optio n changes the mode of the call from fax to voice. Play last â Plays th e last recording made with the recorder . The other party will also hear the recording. To search for phone numbers Y o u may fe tch ph one num bers from me mory by the n ame with whic h the re quired phone nu mber was store d. Note that the phone uses memory (S IM or Teleph one) whic h is cho sen i n the Telephon e appl icati on by pres sing Me nu and Select . 1 Press Names . 2 Key in the name of the person whom you want to call, or the first letter(s) of the name. 3 Press OK . The name closest to the ke yed in characters will appear. 4 If the name found was not the one you searched for, scroll th r ough the names with or until you reach the correct one. 5 To call the person, press . If the person has severa l phone numbers, scroll the selection frame onto the on e you want a nd press . To view the phone number stored with the name 1 When the desired name is on th e display, press Detail . Th e phone number is displayed. If the person has several phone numbers, scroll through the numbers with or until you reach th e correct on e . 2 To call the number, pre ss . To use sp eed dialling Speed diall ing is a handy way to cal l frequentl y-used phone n umbers. You can define up to eight speed dial numbers in t he communicator memory . For informat ion on how to set spe ed dials, see âÂÂTo make contact car dsâ on page 51. 1 Key in the n umber of the speed dial location wh ere you have stored the Tip: If you have one active and one held call, press Swap to make the he ld call active and to put th e currently active call on hold. I n this way, you may converse with one party withou t ending the other call. You can also press to swap between the calls if no numbers have been keyed in.
Phone 152 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. phone number . 2 Pre ss . The p hone will display th e phone number br iefly, an d then dial it. Speed dialling i s not possible during a call. Last numb er redial The communicator stores the last ph one numbers you have dialled. 1 If ther e are any character s on the display, clear the display by p ressing . 2 Press . T he last dialled number will appear on the display. 3 You can scroll the numbers with or until the desired number is displayed. 4 Press to dial the number. Y ou can also recall recent received calls and recent missed calls, see âÂÂCall register (Menu 2)â on page 156. To send DTMF tones If yo u nee d to s en d lo ng DT MF st r ing s , it i s mo r e c on ve ni en t t o se nd t he m v i a the communicator in terface, see âÂÂMultiple callsâ on page 62. To send DTMF tones manual ly 1 Make a call to the desired phone number. 2 Key in the digits you want to send as DTMF tones. The digits are sent on e by one to the network. DTMF tones ca n be transmitted even when the phone key click is set off . Keypad l ock The keypad lock prevents the keypad keys being accidentally pressed when the communicator is, for e xample, in your pocket. When the keypad is locked, you can answer calls normally by pr e ssing . During a call, the keypad is unlocked and the communicator can be operated in the usual way . After t h e call, the keypad is automatically locked again. The keypad will be automatically unlocked when the communicator is connected to a car kit. When th e communicator is removed from the car kit, without having been switched off, the keypad will be locked automatically again. Note: Number 1 is the speed dial location of your voice m ailbox. To call your voice mailbox, press 1 and then , or ju st press and hold 1 .
Phone 153 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To lock the keypad 1 Press Menu and then the key within 3 seconds. While the keypad is locked, the icon and the Unlock command are displayed. To un lock th e keyp ad 1 Press Unlock and then the key within 3 secon ds. Help Most menu functions are provided with a help text, which gives a b rief description of the displayed function. To vi ew the he lp tex t 1 Scroll to the menu function a bout which you want help. 2 Wait for 10 seconds. The first page of the help text will appear. The text scrolls automatically. However, if you want to scroll it manually, press the scroll keys or Mo re . 3 To exit from the help function, pre ss Back . To use the menus The phone offers a set of menu functions that allow you to tailor the phone to your particular use. I n each menu and submenu, y ou can check and alter th e settings of functions. The menus a n d submenus can be entered by scr olli ng the menu or using t h e appropriate shortcuts. You can access the me nu fun ctions even during a call. To scroll the menus 1 Press Menu . 2 Press either or to scroll the list of menus until you reach the desired menu. 3 Press Select to enter the menu . If the menu contains any submen us, reach the one you want with either or . 4 Press Select . T he selection frame is on th e curr ent setting. Note: When the keypad is locked, calls may be possible to the emergency number programmed into your communicator (e.g. 112 or other official emerge ncy number).
Phone 154 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 5 Scroll the list of setting op tions until the selection frame is on the desired option. 6 Press OK to selec t th e option. If you do not want to change the s e tting, you can return to th e pr evious menu level by pressi ng Back . To use m enu shortcu ts All the menus, submenus and settings are numbered. This number is shown in the upper right corner of the display . 1 Press Menu . 2 Key in the num ber of the main menu under which the desired submenu is located. 3 Key in the number of the submenu where the fu nction can be found. 4 Key in the number of the desired setting option. For instance, to change the incoming call alert in the general profile to ring only once (Me nu 3-1 -2-1-3) : press Menu to enter the menu facility , 3 to enter the Profiles menu, 1 to select the G e neral profile, 2 to personalise the profile, 1 to modify th e alert tones, and 3 to select Ring on ce . To exit from the menu 1 Press or press and hold Back . Menu structure The following menu table lists the names of the main menus and their submenus. Third-level menus are not shown here. Menu Function Submenus MENU 1 MESSAGES 1 Received short messa ges, 2 Info service, 3 Servi ce command editor, 4 V oice messages MENU 2 CALL REGIST ER 1 Miss ed calls , 2 Receive d calls , 3 Dialled c alls, 4 Erase re cent call lis ts, 5 Show c all duration , 6 Show call co sts , 7 Call cost settings MENU 3 PROFILES 1 General, 2 Sile nt, 3 Meeting, 4 O utdoor, 5 Pager, 6 Flight, 7 Headse t, 8 Car MENU 4 SETTINGS 1 Call settings, 2 Phone settings, 3 Security settings, 4 Restore factory settings MENU 5 CALL DIVERT 1 Divert all voice ca lls, 2 Divert when busy, 3 Divert when no t answered, 4 Divert if not rea chable, 5 Divert all fax calls, 6 Divert all data calls, 7 Cancel all diverts MENU 6 R ECORDER
Phone 155 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Some menu functions are network ser vices, indicated by the sym bol in the menu table. T o use such a function, your n e twork must su ppor t it and you must subscribe to it. Note that network ser vices are specific to each SIM card. If you change the SI M card, and you have not obtained the service for the ne w card, you will not be able to us e the service. Messag es (Menu 1) The Short Message Service (SMS) is a network service. Contact your serv ice provider for details. The phone can be used for listening to voice messages in voice mailboxes and for reading received short messages. However , reading short messages is more convenient via the larger display of the communicator interface. To send short messa ge s, use the SMS application of the communicator . Received short messag es (Menu 1- 1) When you r eceive a short message, the text Message received and the indicator will be displayed a n d a ton e will sound, u n less the communicator is set to a silen t pr ofile. A note is also shown when you receive faxes or mail. To read received faxes or mail, you must use the r espective applications of the communicator interface. 1 To read the message immediately, press Read . To read the mes sage later, press Exit . 2 Press Read again to view the received message . The messages are li sted in the or der they wer e received. To r ead the se cond message on the list, pr e ss to s elect it and then press Read . Once you have read the message, you can press Back or Op tion . The options available in the ph on e are: Erase â Erases the s elected message f rom the memory. Use numb er â Copies the phone number from the messa ge and m o ves it onto the phone display . Y ou can now call t he number with . Details â Shows the senderâÂÂs name or number , the date and time the message was se nt, and the n umber of th e message cen tre. Info servic e (M enu 1- 2) This network service allows you to receive short messages on various topics. Y ou may read messa ge s on topics th at you have pre-defined on th e communicator interface, see âÂÂSMS settingsâ on page 82. 1 Press Select to view the list of available choices. Tip: You can dial the phone number in the message by pressing while viewin g the messa ge.
Phone 156 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 2 Use or to scroll through the choice list. To get a list of messages, press Read . Pressing Select gives you the follow ing options: On â Sets info m e ssage reception on. Off â Turns info message reception off. Topic index â Fetches a list of available topics from the network. Read â Shows a list of received info messages. Scroll to the one you want to read and press OK . Language â Sets the language for the messages. Scroll to the desired language and press Mark . Servic e command edit or (Menu 1-3) In this menu, you can sen d service requests, such as activation commands for network services, to your service pr ovider . Key in the sequence you w ant, and press Send . Voice mess ages (Menu 1-4) Listen to voice messages (Menu 1- 4-1) When you enter this menu, the com municator dials the phone number stored in menu 1-4-2. If required, key in the access code for your mailbox or answering machine when the connection has bee n made. Voice mailbo x number (Menu 1-4-2) The phone number that you enter h e re will be dialled when you sel ect the Listen to voice mess ages function in Menu 1-4-1. A voice m ailbox can be a network service or you r personal answering machine. Y ou may enter a new or edit an existing phone number . The number will be used until you change the n umber again. Call re gister ( Menu 2) In this menu, you can check and erase ph on e numbers of calls that you h ave missed (Menu 2-1), received (Menu 2-2) or dialled (Menu 2-3). N ote that the Received calls and Missed ca l ls functions are network services which work only in networks that allow you to view th e callerâ s phone number . Note: The communicator on l y registers missed calls when the phone is switched on and within network coverage.
Phone 157 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Erase recent call lists (Menu 2-4) Caut ion: The phone numbers are erased without warning. You cannot undo the operation. Show call duration ( Menu 2-5) In this menu, you can view the duration of you r outgoing and incoming calls and reset the tim e rs. Last call dur ation (Menu 2-5- 1) Shows the duration of the last outgoin g or incoming call in hours, minutes and sec onds, e.g. 00:02:15 . All call sâ duration (M enu 2-5-2) Shows the total duration of all calls made or r eceived with any SIM card that you have used w ith the communicator. Received c allsâ du ration (Menu 2-5 -3) Shows the total duration of calls received with an y SIM card that you have used with the communicator. Dial led cal lsâ dur ati on (Men u 2-5- 4) Shows the total duration of calls made with any SIM card that you have used with the communicator. Clear timer s (Menu 2-5-5) Resets all timers. There is no way to undo the reset operation. Show call costs (Menu 2-6) This network service allows y ou to check various ca ll costs. The costs are shown in charging un its or units of currency that you ha ve set in Menu 2-7-2. The call cost is shown for each SIM card separately . For th ese settings you need the PIN2 code. Contact your ser vice provider for m ore information. Last call co st (Menu 2-6-1) Shows the cost of t h e last, or curr e nt, call. All call sâ cost (Menu 2-6- 2) Shows the total cost of all calls made with the current SIM card. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls and services by your ser vice provider may vary, depending u pon network features, rounding-off f or billing, taxes and so for th.
Phone 158 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Clear coun ters (Menu 2-6-3) Resets all cost counters. Resetting requires the PIN2 c ode . This service is not available with SIM cards that do not support the PIN2 code. There is no way to undo the r eset operation. Call c ost set tings (Men u 2-7) Call costs â limit (Menu 2-7-1 ) This function allows you to limit the total costs of outgoing calls to a specified number of charging units or units of the currency that you have set in Menu 2-7-2. For this service you n eed the PIN2 code. Changi ng the call co st li mit also requi res t he PIN 2 code. To tur n the limit o n, selec t On . Key in the cost limit in c har ging units or currency units. If you define the li mit in cur r ency units, yo u can press or to ins ert a decim al point. After the limit has been turned on, th e number of th e remaining units is shown on the display when in idle mode. When all units h ave been used, no calls can be made. To turn the limit off, select Off . Show costs i n (Menu 2 -7-2) You may select whether the call costs an d call cost limits will be displayed in currency or charging u n its. Contact your n e twork operator for the prices of charging units. Changing the call cost unit requires the PIN 2 code. To show the li mits in currency u nits, select Currency , or Units to show the limits i n charging units. If you select ed Curren cy , key in the charging unit price. Use or to insert a decima l point. Ne xt, enter the currency name. Profil es (Menu 3) The profile settings are used for selecting the operating environment for the communicator , and for modifying the profile features. One profile is always in use. To set on a prof ile 1 Press Menu . 2 Scroll with and to Profiles and press Select . Note: In some networks calls t o the emergency numbe r programmed into your communicator (e.g. 112 or other of f icial emergency number) may be made even if there are n o charging units left.
Phone 159 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 3 Scroll to the desired profile, for example Meeting . 4 Press Opti ons . 5 Scroll to Activate and press OK . The name of the selecte d profile is shown on the display, except when the general profile is selected. For more information about the diffe rent profiles, see âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. To change the profi le settings 1 Go to the Profiles menu an d press Select . 2 Scroll to the desired profile and press Options . 3 Scroll to Personalise and press OK . For more infor m ation about the various profile settings, see âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. Settings (Menu 4) Call settings (Men u 4-1) Anykey answer (Menu 4-1-1) When set on, you can answ e r an incomin g call by pressing any key on the phone keypad, except or . Automatic redialli ng (Menu 4 -1-2) When this function is set on an d you call a number that is busy or does n ot answer, the communicator will attempt to call the number until the call is connected. Press to end the call attempts. Speed dialling (Me nu 4-1-3) When set on, you can dial phone numbers stored in the speed dial locations by simply pressing and holding the assigned speed dial key. Call waitin g (Menu 4-1-4 ) Call waiting is a n etwork service. Contact your operator for su bscription. See âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. Tip: A qu ick way to set on a pr ofile is to press the ke y on the phone keypad. Press the key again u ntil the selection frame is on the desired profile. To select the profile, press and hold .
Phone 160 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Choose Activate to enable call waiting, Cancel to disable call waiting, or Status to show ca l l types with wh ich call w aiting may be used. Own number s ending (Menu 4-1-5) You can set your phone number to be displayed or hidden from the recipient of your call. This function works only in ne tw orks that allow you to view callersâ phone nu mbers, provided that this service h as been activated for your SIM card. Do not use this function unless it has been activated for you r SIM card. Choose Pr eset , On, Of f , Next on , or Next off. Preset selects the setting, On or Off , that y ou have agreed upon with your network operator. When you change the SI M card, the Pr eset settin g is automatically selected. Phone line i n use (Menu 4-1-6) If your network supports this service, you can have two phone lines in your commun icato r. You c an sele ct which l ine you wa nt to us e for mak ing cal ls. For more information, see âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. Phone settings (Me n u 4-2) Clock (Menu 4 -2-1) You can select whether the tim e is shown on the display. Cell i nfo display (Me nu 4-2-2) When t his f unction i s set on, the ph one wil l indic ate whe n it is u sing a network cell b ased on Mi cro-Cellular Network te chnology. T he setting w ill remain in ef fect even if the SI M card is changed or the phon e is switched off . Name list (Menu 4 -2-3) When searching for names and numbers, you can select whether to show three names, or one name at a time on the display. List of ow n numbers (Menu 4-2-4 ) You can store and manage phone numbers assigned to your SIM card. This function is a memory aid, from which you can ch eck your own phone numbe rs. Welcome no te (Menu 4-2-5) You can write a message of up to 36 c haracters which appears on the display when you switch on the phone. Note: The communicator consumes m ore power when the Cel l info display is on.
Phone 161 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 1 Scroll to the W elcome note settin g and press Select . 2 Key in the message. 3 Press Opti ons and scroll to Save and press OK . Network selection (Me nu 4-2-6) The communicator can be s e t to select automatically one of the cellular networks available in your area. You ma y also select th e desir ed network manually in this menu. When the Automatic option is sele cted, the communicator tries to utilise the network on wh ich it was last registered. Outside of the home netwo rk service area, the communicator will select one of the networks that have a roaming agreement with the home network. In th e Manual mode, when you pick up a n etwork manually from the network list, the communicator will always attempt to register on that network. If the communicator cannot reach, or loses contact w ith, the selected network, you ar e prompted to select another network. Security settings (Me nu 4-3) The purpo se of the security sy stem is to pr event unauthor ised use or altering of important settings. In most cases, activating or changing the security options requires the appropriate access code. Se e âÂÂSecurityâ on page 127. PIN co de requ est (M enu 4- 3-1) On or Of f . See âÂÂSecurityâ on page 127. Voice call barring (Me nu 4-3-2) Call barring is a network service; contact your operator for su bscription. See âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. 1 Scroll to one of the following ba rr ing modes and pr ess Select . All outgoing calls Tip: Network selection comes in hand y when you w ant to select a particular network, e.g. due to lower call charges. Note: When s ecurity feat ures which restrict calls are in use (call diverting, call barring, fixed dialling, closed user gr oup, or system lock), calls may be possible to cer tain emergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 112 or oth er official emerge ncy number).
Phone 162 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. All international calls International exce pt to home country All incoming calls Incoming calls when abroad Cancel all barrings 2 If you want to take th e selected barring mode into use, scroll to Activate ; if you want to disable the selected barring mode, select Canc el , or if you want to check the status of the barring mode, sele ct Status , and press OK . Fixed dialling (Menu 4-3-3) You may restrict your outgoing calls to a pre-determined set of phone numbers, if supported by your SIM card. When the f unction is set on, you can only call a phone number which is included in the fixed dialling list or which begins with the same di gits as a ph on e number on the list. You are prompted for the PIN2 code when you try to put Fixed dialling on or off, or if you wish to delete, add or edit any phone number on th e fixed dialling list. If you select Numbers , the foll owing options become available: Search , Add entry or Erase all . If you select Add entry , you are required to en ter your PIN2 code and key in both the name and number you wish to a dd to the fixed dialling list. To edit or erase a phone num ber on the fixed dialling list, select Search and key in the name of the person , or th e first letter(s) of the name. Press OK and Detail to view the numbe r. Select Options , enter your PIN2 code and you are given the choice of either Edit and Erase . Close d use r group ( Menu 4-3-4 ) This network service allows you to set th e communicator to accept calls to and from a selected group of people. For details o n creating a u ser group and activating this service, contact your network operator . You may be a member of up to 10 user groups. Select one of th e following options: Preset â Uses a user group that the S IM card owner has agreed upon with the network operator. On â Uses a particular user group. Calls can be made to or received from the members of the selected group only. Off â Calls can be made and received in the normal way. You can use th is option only if you a re entitle d to do so. Note: The SIM card contents cannot be accessed if the Fixed dialling is on.
Phone 163 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. SIM change secur ity (Menu 4-3-5) The same settings can be found in the Security settings. See âÂÂSecurityâ on page 127. Change access c odes (Me nu 4-3-6) In this submenu, you can c hange the lock code, the PIN code, the PIN2 code and the barring password. Se e âÂÂSecurityâ on page 127 . The access codes may only include the digits 0 to 9. System lock (Menu 4-3- 7) To lock the communicator, press Select and enter yo ur lock code. The communicator locks immediately. Even if you remove an d r eplace the battery and switch on the phon e, the communicator will remain locked. To unlock the commun i cator, press Unlock and enter the lock code. Restore facto ry settings (Menu 4-4) Y ou can reset the settings of the menu functions to their original values. When you activate this setting, you will be prompted for your five-digit lock code. This function will not affect stored phone numbers and names, access codes, earpiece volume setting, call timers , cost counters, selected application tones or short messages. Call dive rt (Me nu 5) The call divert network service allows you to direct your in coming voice calls to another phone number when you do not want to be disturbed, or when the phone is switched off or outside the network coverage area. The call diverting functions are described in more detail in âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. 1 Scroll to one of the following diver t options and press Select : Divert all voice calls Divert when busy Divert when not answered Divert if not reachable Divert all fax calls Divert all data calls Cancel all diver ts 2 Scroll to Activate . You will be asked for the phone number to which you wish to divert th e incoming calls. The Cance l option sets the divert mode off. Status shows what kind of calls are being diver ted.
Phone 164 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Reco rder (Men u 6) With the Recorder you can record your te lephone conversations and voice memos, and listen to them . The maximum length of a r ecording is 30 seconds. See also âÂÂV oice reco rderâ on page 144. To record your own speech 1 In th e Record er menu , press Select . 2 Scroll to Record and press Select . 3 To stop the r ecording, press Stop . To reco rd your Tel ephone con versation 1 When you have an active call, press Rec ord . When the recordi ng starts, you will hear a t one. 2 To stop the r ecording, press Stop . To record your telephone conversation when you have more than one call 1 If you h ave for example one call active and another on hold, press Options . 2 Scroll to Recor d and press Select . W hen the recording starts, you will h ear a tone. 3 To stop the r ecording, press Stop . To play a re cording 1 In th e Record er menu , press Select . 2 Scroll to Lis t and pr e ss Se le ct . 3 Scroll to the recording you want to listen to, press Option s an d the n Play . To play a recording when you have an active call 1 Press Op tion . 2 Scroll to Play last and press Select . Or, if you want to play an older record- ing, follow the steps above. The other party will also hear the recording. Note: Local laws may apply to recording conversations. Do not use this feature illegally.
Troubleshooting 165 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 15. Troubleshooting Tip: Club Nokia Careline answers questions and off e rs instructions over the phone. Y ou can visit http://club .nokia.com to find the Club Nokia Careline phone numbers. See also the Accessories guide for further information on Cl ub Nokia Careline. Y ou can also visit Nokia Wireless Dat a Forum at http:// www .forum.nokia.com for information and support material related to the communicator . 1. Phone or communicator interface doe s not start; both displays remain bl ank Make sure that th e battery is properly installed and charged. Make sure that the contacts on the battery and the charging stand are clean. The battery charge may be too low for oper ation. Check the display and listen for the low battery warning tones. Charge the battery as described in âÂÂBatteryâ on page 27. If the NOT CHARGING m essage is displayed, th e charging is suspended. In that case, check that the temperature of th e battery is not above 45ðC ( 1 13ðF). Wait for a while, disconnect the charger , connect it again a n d retry . If ch arging still fails, contact your loca l Nokia dealer . 2. Power comes on, but the phon e does not work Reboot the communicator by removing th e battery and r eplacing it aga i n. Try charging the communicator . If you see the battery charging in dicator on the phone but the phone does not wor k, contact your loc al Nokia dealer . Check the field strength indicator: you might be outside th e network service area. See the answer to pr oblem number 6. Make sure that the tele phone service is activated for your SIM car d. Check if there is an error message on the display after switching on. If so, contact your loca l dealer. Check that the SIM card is cor rectly installed, see âÂÂFir st start-upâ on page 17. 3. Communicator interface does not activate or applicatio ns stop respondi ng Close the cover and ope n it aga in . If this does not help, close the cover and remove the battery . Repl ace the battery and open the cover again. Wait while the communicator performs a self-test and starts. Tr y charging the communicator . See also problem 4.
Troubleshooting 166 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 4. Internal memory o r system errors Sometimes, for example, removing the battery in m id-operation may cause errors in the file system of the communicator . If you receive inter nal memory or system error messages and/or reboot pr om pts, or if the device does n ot respond to commands normally , resetting the communicator helps you recover from most of these problems. Try the reset operations in the order they have been listed: if checking the file system doe s not help, try removing temporary files, or format the file system. To reset the communicator 1 Close the cover. 2 Remove the battery. 3 Remo ve the memo ry card if i nserted. 4 Place the connector end of the battery in the battery cavity, but do not press the other end in pla ce yet. Do n ot let the batter y slip from its place. The connector end is the one with the four metal strips. 5 Open the cover. 6 Press and hold down the required key combi nation (see below in this topic 4) and simultaneously push the battery end of the communicator down, so that the battery clicks into place. Hold down the keys until you see progress messages or a confirmation prompt on the display. 7 In some cases you must confirm the action by pressing a command button. After the reset, the communica tor will reboot a n d start n ormally . To check the f ile syst em Symptoms: The Memory application in the System application gr oup shows too much (over 2 megabytes) or too little memory , even if you have j ust removed some documents, or the com m unicator applications crash when opening a document. Key combination: Shift-T ab-left arrow Caution: If there are problems in the file system, th e corrupted files w ill be removed. If there ar e no problems, this operation does not affect any documents or settings. To remove temporary files Symptoms: The communicator is in a reboot cycle or a note saying that an .ini file is corrupted is displayed. Key combination: Shift-T ab-right arrow Caution: All temporary files will be removed. The Docu ment outbox will be cleared, the default application settings restor ed, but for example, the SMS message centre number , Internet access point and Remote mailbox settings will be lost. Stored documents will not be affected.
Troubleshooting 167 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To format the f ile system Symptoms: The commu n icator is in a reboot cycle or does not boot up. First, check that you r battery is not empty . Key com bin ation: Shift-Ta b- F Caut ion: Formats the file system. All data you have entered will be lost. This operation will restore your communicator to the state it w as in at the time of purchase. Remember that backed up da ta can be restored in all cases . If these measures do not help, contact your local dealer . 5. Cannot make or receive calls Make sure that the ph one is n o t off. Close the cover an d switch on the phone. If you get the message INVALID SIM CARD, your SIM cannot be used in the communicator . Contact you dealer or network operator . Check the status of your call barrings and diverts, see âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. The phone may be busy: data or fax is being sent or received, or the communicator is being used as a fax modem. Wait for the data/fax transmission to end, or drop the call by pressing the key on the phone keypad. 6. Ca ll qua lity is poor Y our location may not allow better call quality . This pr oblem may occur especially in a moving car or train . Move to a location where the radio signal reception is better . See âÂÂFacts about cellular data transmissionâ on page 14. Reception is usually better above ground level, outdoors and while stationary . Sometimes even moving the communicator slightly will im prove reception. Y ou can also try using the communicator in the handsfree mode, see âÂÂHandsfree modeâ on p age 6 1. Remember to turn the antenna t o an upright position. 7. Cannot d ivert or bar voice , fax or data calls Y ou may have not subscribed to the service in question, or it is not supported by the network, or the message centre number and the number to which you want to divert your calls may be missing or incorrect. Fax diverts and barr in gs are set in the settings of the Fax application. Data barring is set in the Internet settings. Data calls cannot be diver ted. 8. Cannot select a contact If you cannot select a contact in th e Telephone, Fax, SMS or Mail directory , the contact card does not have a telephone number , fax number , wireless phone number or an e-mail address. Add the missing information to the contact card in the Contacts application .
Troubleshooting 168 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 9. Cannot send or recei ve faxes, short messages or mail Make sure that you have subscribed to these n etwork services. The p hone may be off , or the com municator is low on memo ry . See pr oblem 16. The number format you use may be invalid, or the called number has not answered within 10 tries, or you are calling to a wrong phone number . The phon e may be busy: data or fax is being sen t or receive d, the communicat or is bein g used as a fax m odem. Wait for the data/fax transmission to end, or drop the call b y pressing the key on the p hone keypad. Fax/data barrings or fax diverts may be active. Fax barrings/diverts are set in the settings of the Fax a ppl ication, data barrings are set in th e Internet settings. Fax reception: Y our SIM card may not have a f a x number . Mail reception: Y our SIM card may not hav e a phone number fo r data connections. Contact your service provider . Mail sending : Y ou have not subscribed to a remote mailbox service, or the mail server delivering your mail does not comply with the SMTP pr otocol. Contact your e-mail ser vice provider . If you are using the Upon request sending option, mail must be sent in the Document outbox, see âÂÂTo send mailâ on page 92. If you have problem s sending mail with attachments, select Canc el Send ing and try again. If this does not help, try the key combination Shift-T ab- right arrow . Some mail attachments ca n take up a significant amount of memory and therefore freeing some memory by deleting something from your communicator memory might also h el p. Short message sendin g: You have not subscribed to the Sh or t Message Service or the message centre number is missing or incorrect. Contact your service provider . The reason for failure may also de pend on the network: the network does not support SMS, fax, or data/mail; the network is out of order or busy; the field strength is not adequate for sen ding. 10. Cann ot establis h a Terminal o r Internet conn ection The Internet, Mail, WWW , or T e rminal settings and configurations may be missing or incorrect. C heck your Internet access point configuration s in the Internet main settings. Contact you r Internet service provider f or the correct settings. See âÂÂInternet settingsâ on page 86 . If you receive internal error messages, remove and replace the battery and try again. If the problem persists, see problem 4. If you receive service provider error messages when connecting to your Remote mailbox, contact your remote mailbox ser vice provider . Y ou r Remote mailbox may contain corrupted mail messages or the mail server settings may be incorrect.
Troubleshooting 169 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 11. In frared proble m s The communicator may be connected to a PC, laptop, printer , digital camera, wireless phone or another communicator via the infrared link. If you are using the PC Suite for Nokia 91 1 0 Communicator program on your PC, or if you want to receive data from another communicator or a digital camera, you will have to start the Infrared activation application on your communicator before the connection is made. See âÂÂInfrared activationâ on page 13 1. If you are using the Nokia Communicator Server program on the PC, the infrared connection is established automa tically when you u se one of the PC connectivity applications of the communicator . The PC to which you want to establish the connection must have an IrDA compatible infrared port; installed and activated IrDA drivers; and Microsoft Windows 95. For more information on IrDA drivers and th eir use in Windows 95, con tact Mi cro sof t. For further information, see the Documentation s e ction on the CD-ROM in th e sales package of the communicator . 12. Pr intin g prob lems If you are using the infrared connection, the infrared port of th e printer must be compatible to the I rDA standard. See âÂÂDocument featuresâ on page 34. If you fail to establish an infrared connection, tr ansfer the file to a PC and use the PC to print the docu ment. Alternatively , you can fax the document to th e nearest fax machine . See âÂÂTo send faxesâ on page 7 1. Check that yo ur printin g settings are correct, see â System settin gsâ on page 1 25. Y ou may be us ing an incorrec t printer driv er , see âÂÂDocumen t featuresâ on pa ge 34. 13. PC connectivity problems Make sure that the correct PC connectivity program is installed and running on your PC. Se e chapter 4 "Computer connectivity" on page 39. Check the cable or infrared connection used. If you use an infrared connection, the IR ports must be f acing each other . Check that you are u s ing the correct COM port. 14. Fax modem p roblems When you u se the commu nicator as a f ax modem, make sure tha t the communicator and the PC use the same baud rate. If you use the infrared connection, the baud rate is set automatically . If you use the cable connection, set the baud r a te in the F ax modem settings. For the PC, the baud rate is set in t he conn ectivity software of the PC. If you use the cable connection, fully compatible oper ation with all PC fax and terminal software cannot be guaranteed. Consult your dealer . If you have problems with your PC fax software, use the infra r ed connection.
Troubleshooting 170 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. If you have problems establishing a data connection with the remote m odem, try fixing the data tra n smission rate by u sing an AT command. C ommon A T commands based on the ETSI 0 7.0 7 standard and supported by the Nokia 9 1 1 0 Communicator are listed in the atcomm.txt file on the diskette supplied with the communicator . For information on how to use the AT commands, consult the documentation of the tele communication or fax application that you use on your PC. 15. Access code problems The lock code is included in the sales package of the communicator . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your communicator dealer . If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network operator . For information about Internet or T erminal passwords, contact your Internet service provider . 16. Lo w on mem ory If you notice that the memory of your communicator is getting low , or you receive a warning note about insufficient memory , ch eck the Memory application. 1 Press Detail s to see w hat kind of data takes up most memory. See âÂÂMemoryâ on page 130. 2 Make a backup of a l l important dat a. 3 Remove ite ms which use a lot of memory, such as documents, received faxes, or old calendar data, either manually or with the Data removal application. See âÂÂMemoryâ on page 130. Or you can transfer th e items to your memor y card. 17. Distorted characters in Terminal If the data bits/stop bits / parity settings ar e different from those defin e d to the data service by the oper ator , characters may look distorted on the d isplay . 18. ISDN connection If you use an ISDN connection, go to the Internet settings and select In ternet access . Select the access point you use or define a new one. In the Adv a nc e d settings , go to Modem initialisation . Enter the AT command A T CBST =7 1 on the dotted line. Note: Downloaded images, received faxes, and recordings may take up significant amounts of m emory space.
Care and main tenance 171 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 16. Care and maintenance Y our Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be tr eated with care. The suggestions below will help you to fulfil any warranty obligations and to enjoy this product for many years. When using your communicator , battery , charger OR any accessory: Keep it and all its parts and accessories out of small children's reach . Keep it dry . Precipitation, humidity and liqu ids contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. Do not use or store it in dusty , dirty areas. Its moving parts can be damaged. Do not store it in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics . Do not store it in cold areas. W hen the communicator warms up (to its n ormal temperature), moisture can form inside the communicator , wh ich may damage electronic circuit board s. Do not attempt to open it. Non-expe rt handling of the device may damage it. Do not drop, knock or shake it. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards. Do not use har sh chemicals, cleanin g solvents, or st rong detergents to clean it. Wipe it with a soft cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution. Do not paint it. P aint can clog the deviceâÂÂs moving parts and prevent p roper operation. Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorised antennas, modifications or attachments could damage the communicator and may violate regulation s governing radio devices. If the communicator , battery , charger or any accessory is not working properly , take it to your nearest qu alified service facility . The personnel there will assist you a nd, if neces sary , arra nge for servi ce.
Care and main tenance 172 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Impor tant safety infor mation 173 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 17. Important safety information Traffic safety Do not use a communicator while driving a vehicle. I f using a communicator , park the vehicle first. Always secure the comm u nicator in its holder; do not place the communicator on the passenger seat or wh ere it can break loose in a collision or sudden stop. The use of an alert device to ope rate a vehicle's lights or horn on public roads is not permitted. Rememb er road safety al ways comes first! Operat ing environm ent Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and a lw ays switch off the p hone of your communicator w henever it is forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or danger . When connecting th e communicator or any accessory to an other device, read its userâÂÂs guide for detailed safety instructions. Do n ot connect incompatible products. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for the satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of pe rsonnel, it is recommended that the e quipment should only be u sed in the normal operating position (held to your ear with th e antenna pointing ov e r your shoulder). Do not point the infrared be am at anyoneâÂÂs eye or allow it to interfer e with other infrared devices. Electronic devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radio frequ ency (RF) signals. However , certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from you r communicator . P acemakers: P acemaker manu facturers recomm end that a minim u m separation of 20 cm (6 inches) be maintained between a hand-held wireless phone and a pacemaker to av oid potential interference with the pacemaker . These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless T echnology Research. P ersons with pacemakers: Should always keep the communicator more than 20 cm (6 inches) from their pacemaker when the ph on e is switched on; Should not carry the communicator in a breast pocket; Should use the e ar opposite the pacemaker to minimise the pote ntial for in-
Impor tant safety infor mation 174 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. terfer ence. If you have any reason to suspect that interference is tak ing place, switch off the phone of your communicator immediately . Hearing aids: Some digital wireless phones may interfere w ith some hearing aids. In the even t of such interference, you m ay want to consult your service provider . Other med ical devices: O peration of any radio tra n smitting equipment, including communicators, may interfere with the fu nction ality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the m edical device to determine if the y are adequately shielded from exte rnal RF energy or if you have any qu estions. Switch off the phone of your communicator in health care facilities when any regulations posted in th ese areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be usin g equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy . Veh i c le s : RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles (e.g. electronic fuel injection systems, electronic anti-skid (anti-lock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, air bag systems). Ch e ck with the manufacturer or its representa tive regarding your vehicle. You should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to you r vehicle. Posted f acili ties : Switch off the phone of your communicator in any facility where posted n otices so require. Pot enti ally e xplos ive a tmos pher es Switch off the phone of your communicator w hen in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could caus e an explosion or fire r esulting in bodily injury o r even death. Users are advised to switch off the phone whe n at a refuelling point (service station). Users are rem inded of the need to obser ve restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel stor age and distribution areas), chemical plants or wh ere blasting operations are in progre ss. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats; chemical transfer or storage facilities; vehicles using liquified petroleum gas (su ch as propane or butane); areas where the air contains chemicals or par ticle s, such as grain, dust or metal powders; and any other area where you would normally be ad vised to turn off your vehicle engine. Vehicles Only qualified personnel should service th e communicator , or install the communicator in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty which may apply to t he unit. Check regularly that all wireless phone equ ipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly .
Impor tant safety infor mation 175 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases or expl osive materials in the same compartment as the communicator , its parts or accessories. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remem be r that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including both installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over th e air bag or in the air bag de ployment area. If in- vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Switch off the phone of your com m unicator before boarding an air craft. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the oper ation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network an d may be illegal. Failure to observe these instructions may lead to suspension or denial of telephone services to th e offender , or legal action or both. Emergency calls IMPORT ANT! The Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator , like any wireless phone, operates using radio signals, wireless and landline networks as well as user-programmed functions which cannot guarantee connection in all conditions. Therefore you should never rely solely upon any wireless phone for essential communications (e.g. medical emergencies). Remember , to make or receive any calls th e phone must be swi tched on and in a service area with adequate signal strength. Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless phone networks or when certain networ k services and/ or phone features are in use. Check with local service providers. To make an emergency call 1 If the device cover is open, close the co ver. 2 If the phone is not on, switch it on by pressing the key. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the communic ator . 3 Press and hold the key for several seconds to ready the phone for calls, and to end poss ibl e active data or fax calls. 4 Key in the em ergency number for your present lo cation (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). Emergency numbers vary by location . 5 Press the key. If certain features are in use (call barring, fixed dialling, closed user group, system lock, keypad lock, etc.), you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this document and your local cellular service provider. When making an emergency call, remember to give all the necessary information as accurat e ly as possible. Remember that your communicator may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident - do not cut off the call until given permission to do so.
Impor tant safety infor mation 176 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To use this manu al The wireless phone described in this manual is approved for use in the GSM netw orks. A number of features included in this manual are ca lle d network services. They are special services provided by wireless service provider s. Before you can take advantage of any of these network services, y ou must subscribe to the service(s) you require from your ho m e service provider and obta in instructions for their use. Y ou can then activate these functions as described in this manual. The manual activation commands for various services ar e not presented in this manual (e.g., using the and characters for activating or deactivating services). The Nokia 9 1 10 Com municator , nevertheless, is capable of handling commands given in that for m. For these commands, please consult with your service providers. WAR NING! This apparatus is i ntended for use when sup plied with power from a Lithium-ion battery and chargers ACP-9E, ACP-9X and ACP-9A. Other usage will invalidate any ap p roval given to this apparatus and may be danger ous. Use only batteries, chargers , and accessories approved by the communicator manufacturer for use with this p articular communicator mode l. The use of any other typ es wil l invalida te any app roval or wa rranty applying to the communicator , and may be d angerous. For availabili ty of approved accessories , please check with your dealer . When you disconnect the power cord o f any accessory , grasp and pull the plug, not the cord.
Glos sary 177 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Glossary A AT commands Operations of a f ax m odem can be controlled by A T commands. These commands give the advanced user an opportunity to control all the features of the modem. A list of common AT commands based on the ETSI 0 7.0 7 standard and supported by the Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator are available in the atcomm.txt file on the diskette included in the sales package of your communicator . B Barring password The barring password is a 4-digit code needed to change fax and voice call barrings, see âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 6 5. The password is not located in your communicator or SIM card, but in the network. Y ou obtain the password from your n e twork operator when you subscribe to the call bar ring service. CC o o k i e s Cookies are little pieces of information, given by the s e rver to you, to store information about your visits to a we b site. When you accept cookies, the server is able t o evaluate your use of the web site; what you are inter ested in, what you want to read, etc. D Domain name and Host name The terms âÂÂdomain nameâ and âÂÂhost nameâ are sometimes, slightly inaccurately , used as synonyms. In a fully qualified domain name, e.g. www .forum.nokia.com , th e first part of the name i s the name of the host, and the following parts a r e names of domains to which the host belongs. Each host name corresponds to a certain IP address. Ho st names are used beca use they ar e easier to r emember than IP addr esses. DTMF (Dual Tone Mult i-Frequency) tones DTMF tones are the ton es you hear when you press the number keys on the phone keypad. DTMF tones allow you to commun icate w ith voice mailboxes, computerised telephony systems, etc. H H otspot A WWW page may contain hotspots, such as selection lists, text entry fields, and reset/submit bu ttons, which enable you to in put information into the W orld Wide Web .
Glos sary 178 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) A language used to define the appear ance and content of WWW doc umen ts. HT TP (Hy perte xt Tr ansfer P rot ocol) A document transfer protocol u sed in the WWW. Hyperlin k Hyperlinks are used to move from one WWW page to a n other . I IAP ( Internet Access Point) The point where your communicator connects to the Internet by way of a data call. An Internet access point can be provided, for example, by a commercial Internet serv ice provider or by your own company . Images , inline, external Images within a fetched WWW page are inline images. Larger images are often placed as external images and ha ve to be viewed separately . IMAP4 (Internet Mai l Access Protocol, ver sion 4) A protocol used for accessin g your Remote mailbox. IP (I nte rne t Prot ocol ) add res s All computers and other devices connected to the Internet usin g the Internet Pr otocol have their own individual addresses. The address consists of four n u mbers separated by points: for e xample, 13 1.227. 21 .167. L Lock code The lock code is a five-digit code needed to lock and unlock the communicator . The lock code is also required when you change certain settings. You w ill find the lock code on a sticker in the sales package of your communicator . Keep it s ecret and in a safe place, separate from the communicator . M MCN (Mic ro-Cel lula r Netw ork) tech nolo gy Microcells are used for increasing the capacity of wireless networks in u rban area s. MIME (Multipurpos e Internet Mail Extensions) A standard Internet format which pe rmits including multiple m ail objects in a single messa ge . The mail objects c an be, for e xample, formatted multifont text messages and non-textual elements, such as images and audio fragments.
Glos sary 179 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. P PIN ( Personal Id entity Number ) code The PIN code protects your phone from unauthorised use. The PIN code is supplied with the SIM car d. If the PIN code request is set on, the code is re qu ired each time th e phone is switched on . The PIN code must be 4 to 8 digits long. PIN 2 code The PIN2 code is supplied with some SIM cards. The PIN2 code is required to access certain functions supported by the SIM card. The length of the PIN2 code is 4 to 8 digits. Plug -in A plug-in is a dd-on software that can be dow nloaded from the WWW . The communicator uses plug-ins to display a document that the WWW application itself cannot show . POP3 (Po st Office Protocol , version 3) A common mail protocol that can be used for accessing the Remote mailbox. PPP (Poi nt to Point Prot ocol) A common networking software protocol which enables any computer with a modem and a phone line to connect directly to the Intern et. Proto co l A formal set of rules that govern how data is transferred betwee n two devices. Prox y In some networks, the connection between the WWW and the site you want to connect to is blocked by a firewall. The firewall protects the network from unau tho rised external access. A proxy is an intermediary program that enables access through the firewall. A proxy can also serve as a network cache to speed u p the fetching process. PUK ( PIN Unblo ckin g Ke y) cod e The PUK is an 8-digit code su pplie d with the SIM car d. The code is required when you want to change a disabled PIN code. If you enter an incorrect PUK code ten tim es in su cce ssion, the SIM card is rejected and you cannot make or receive any calls, except emergency calls. When the SIM is rejecte d, you will need a new SIM card. Y ou cannot change the PUK code. I f you lose the code, contact your network operator .
Glos sary 180 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. PUK2 code The PUK2 code is supplied with some SIM cards. The code is required when you want to change a disabled PIN2 code. If you enter an incorrect PUK2 code ten times in succession, you will not be able to access the functions which require the PIN2 code. T o use these functions again, you will need to obtain a new SI M card from your network operator . Y ou cannot change th e PUK2 code. S SIM (S ubscriber Identity Mo dule) card The SIM card cont ains all the information the cellular network needs t o ident i fy t he netwo rk user . The SIM card also contai ns secur ity-rel ated inf ormati on. SMTP (Si m ple Ma il Transport Proto col) An Internet protocol governing the transfer of ele ctronic mail. SSL (S ecure Soc ket Layer) A security protocol that prevents eavesdropping, tampering, or message forgery over the In ternet. Documents using SSL are identified with the prefix HTTPS. TT C P P o r t Identifies the data port of the destin ation computer . TCP/IP (Transmission C ontrol Protoco l/Internet Proto col) A protocol that governs data communication in the Internet and in the TCP/IP networks . U URL (Uniform Resource Locator) Link information required by the WWW to connect to a given WWW hos t compute r . The URL us ually sta rts with http:// followe d by www . For example, the Noki a Wireless Data Forum hom e page can be found at http://www.forum.nokia.com. URLs are often referred to with phrases like âÂÂHome page location,â âÂÂSite location,â â can be found at...â V Voice ma ilbox A voice mailbox is a network service or a personal answering machine where people can leave you voice messages.
Index 181 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Index A Alar ms Cale ndar 123 Clock 139 Alternate phone line service 160 AT co mmand s 133 , 177 Autolock 129 B Backlight Settings 126 Turning on 31 Barring password 130 Battery 27 Charging 27 Booking events 121 Cancelling and changing bookings 122 Business cards 81 C Cable connection 40 Cache 97 Emptying 103 Calendar Adding events 119 Alarms 123 Booking password 121 Cancelling and changing bookings 122 Memos 120 Receiving bookings 122 Sending bookings 121 Caller groups 66
Index 182 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Calls Alternate lines 160 Alternating calls 64 Answerin g 60, 150 Answering a waiting ca ll 64 Anykey answer 159 Automatic redialling 159 Barrin g 68, 161 Closed user group 162 Conference call 63, 150 Diverting 68, 163 Fixed dialling 162 Making a call 59, 149 Making a new call 63, 150 Making an emergency call 175 Poor call quality 14, 167 Putting on hold 150 Recording conversation 61, 150, 164 Showing costs 157 Showing duration 157 Switching between calls 62 Trans ferri ng 64, 150 Waiting call 69, 159 Chr ke y 113 Citi es Changing home city 141 Editing and addin g 140 Selecting destination city 140 Clea ning the commun icat or 171 Clock settings 141 Codes Lock code 130 PIN code 129 PIN2 code 129 PUK code 179 PUK2 code 180 Composing tunes 141 Confer ence call 63
Index 183 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Contact card Adding fields 51 Attaching an image 53 Cre ating 51 Customising fields 52 Setting an individual ringing tone 52 Template 50 Contact groups Cre ating 55 Cont rast control 127 Costs 60 D Date format 127 Delivery reports 83 Diverting calls 68 Document outbox 36 Documents Printing 112 Rea ding 111 Read- only d ocument s 114 Sending 114 Transfe rring via IR 112 Writing 111 Downloaded files Installing 104 Open ing 114 DTMF tones Sending 64, 152 Special characters 54 Storing 54 E Emergency calls 175
Index 184 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. F Fax Adding a logo 75 Adding a signat ur e 75 Barrin g 75 Cover page settings 74 Diverting 75 Forwarding 71 Printing 74 Receiving 73 Sending 72 Setting sending time 75 Writing 71 Fixed dialling 162 Flight profile Setting on 69 Folders Creating 112 Removing 112 Font 113 Formatting the file system 167 G General log 56 H Handsfree mode 61 Help Application help 32 Genera l hel p 32 Phone 153 I Image s Contact images 53 Trans ferri ng 131 WWW imag es 103 Import/Export Calendar 46 Contacts 46 Indicators 22 Individual log 56
Index 185 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Info se rvic e Rea ding 155 Settings 83, 156 Infrared conn ection Connecting to a communicator 131 Connecting to a PC 40 Connecting to a printer 35 Intern et Access requirements 85 Autodisconnect time 87 Data call barring 87 Defining an access poin t 86 K Keyboard 24 Keypad 147 L Lock code 130 Locking Comm unicat or 127, 16 3 Keypad 153 Logs 56 M Mail Adding a signature 92 Adding attachments 93 Fetching 94 Fetching attachments 91 Font 90 Forwarding 96 Opening attachments 95 Printing 96 Rea ding 95 Remote mailbox 94 Remo ving mess ages 95 Replying 96 Sending 92 Sending upon request 93 Timed fe tching 92 Writing 92 Margins 113
Index 186 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Memory Cache 97 Details 130 SIM memo ry 54 Memory ca rd 32 Inse rting 32 Menu button 31 Message centre n u mber 82 Messages Info me ssages 83, 155 Short messages 77, 155 Multiselection 33 N Netw ork Selecting 161 Settings 67 Nokia CareLine contact card 49, 117 Nokia Communicator Server Installing 46 Nokia Wireless Data Forum 165 Note s Sending 114 Writing 111 O Own num ber sen ding 67 , 160 P Passwords Barring password 130 Booking password 121 Internet password 88 Mail password 91 WWW pass word 99, 101 PC connectivity Cable connection 40 Infrared connection 40 PC Su ite fo r Noki a 9110 Comm unicato r Installing 40 PIN code 129 PIN2 code 129
Index 187 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Printing 35 Cable connection 36 Documents 112 Faxes 74 Infrared connection 35 Mail messages 96 Settings 126 SMS messages 80 Profiles Modifying 65, 159 Setting on 158 PUK code 179 PUK2 code 180 R Read-only documents Open ing 114 Received communication note 37 Receiving Fax 73 Mail 94 SMS 79 Recorder Playing a recor din g 144 , 164 Recording 144, 164 Remote mailbox 89, 94 Resetting the communicator 166 Ringing tones Alternate ringing tone 125 Composing 141 Recording 144 Selecting 125 Sending 143 Setting individual tones 52 Settings 66
Index 188 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. S Safety information Electronic devices 173 Operating environment 173 Traff ic sa fety 173 Vehicles 174 Scre en blank er 127 Sea rch f ield 21, 49 Selection frame 20 Sending Documents 114 DTMF tones 64 Mail 92 SMS 78 Ser vice card s 80 Sho rtcu ts 34 Signal strength 15 Indicator 23, 149 SIM c ard Installing 17 , 32 Viewing contents 54 SMS Forwarding 80 Receiving 79, 155 Replying 80 Sending 78 Setti ng message cent re number 82 Writing 78 Special characters 113 Speed di alling Settings 53 Usin g 151 Standard mess ages 80
Index 189 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. T Telnet Defi ning c onnectio ns 107 Special keys 108 Term inal Defi ning c onnectio ns 105 Special keys 106 Text W eb Defi ning se rvic es 109 Fetching information 109 Time fo rmat 127 Tones Adding ringing tones 112 Application tones 126 Composing 141 Notification tone 126 Recording 144 Ringing tones 66, 125 Sending 143 Silencing 65 Trans ferri ng Calls 64 Data from other handheld devices 51 Text (Telnet, Termin al) 106 U Unit of measure 127 Unlocking Comm unicat or 128, 16 3 Keypad 153 V Voice mailbox Calling 69, 148, 15 2, 156 Setting number 69, 156 Volume Adjusting loudspeaker 61 Communicator key click 66 Phone key click 66 Ringing tone 66
Index 190 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. W Welcome note 16 0 World t ime 140 World Wide We b Access requirements 97 Adding bookmarks 98 Copying text 102 Creating a bookmark folder 99 Downloading software 104 Fetching a page 98 Following a hyperlink 102 Navigation commands 102 Saving a page 103 Saving the HTML format 99 Timed fet ching 100 Viewing images 103 Z Zoom button 31
ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Nokia is a registered t rademark of Nokia Corporation, Fi nland. Copyright. é 1995-1998 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Nokia Mobile P hones operates a policy of conti nuous improvement. T herefore, we r eserve the right to ma ke changes and improvements to any of t he products described in this guide without prior notice. Nokia Mobile Phones is not responsible for any loss of data, inco me or any consequential damage howsoever caused. Geoworks î application software and G EOSî operating system software copyright é 1990-1998 Geoworks. All rights reserved. United States Patent 5,327,529. Hardware and software floating point math library copyright é 1984-1991 Dimensions Research, Inc. This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkel ey and its contributors. Copyright 1979, 1980, 1983, 1986, 1988, 1989, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. The software is pr ovided by T he Regents and cont ributors âÂÂas isâ and any expr ess or implied warranties, including, but not limit ed to, the implied w arranties of merchantabilit y and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no ev ent shall The Regents or contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of subs titute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) ho wever caused and on any theory of liability, whethe r in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of this software, eve n if advised of the possibility of such damage. The GEOSî so ftware of this product include s Nimbus Q from Digit al Typeface Corp. and t ypefaces from URW, G mbH. This device contains Embedded DOS-ROM (R), Embedded BIOS (R) software licensed fr om General Software, Inc. Copyright é 1998 General Software, Inc. General Software, Embedded DOS, and Embedded BIOS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Ge neral Software, Inc. Portions of this work are derived from the Standard C Library, é 1992 by P.J. Plaguer, publi shed by Prentice-Hall, and are used with permission. HP Database Engine Version 1.0 copyright é Hewlett-Packard Company 1994. All rights reserved. The PPP software is copyright é 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 M o rning Star Technologies, all rights reserved. It contains software developed a t Carnegie Mellon Universit y, which is copyright é 1989 Car negie Mellon University, all rights reserved. It contains software developed at the University of California, Berkeley, which is copyright é 1989 Regents of the University of California, all rights reserved. It contains software t hat is copyright é 1990, RSA Data Sec urity, Inc., all rights reserved. C-client Internet ma il routines original version copyright 1988 by the Leland St anford Junior Unive rsity, copyright 1995 by the Unive rsity of Washington. The University of Washington a nd the Leland Stanford Junior University disclaim all warranties, express or implied, with regard to this software, including without limitation all implied warranties of mer chantability and fitness for a particular purpose, and in no event shall the Univ ersity of Washington or the Leland Stanford Junior University be liable for any special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an action of contract, tort (including negligence) or strict liability, arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of th is software. This product includes so ftware based in part on the work of the independe nt JPEG group. CellularWare is a trademark of Nokia Mobile Phone s. AT is a trademark of Hayes Microco mputer Products, Inc. Hayes is a register ed trademark of Hayes Microcomput er Products, Inc. Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered t rademarks and Windows is a trademark of Micr osoft corporation. Geoworksî and GEOSî are Registered Trademar ks of Geoworks, and GeoDOS is a Trademark of Geoworks in the United States of America and ot her countries. Intellisync is a trade mark of Puma Technology, Inc. All other brand and product names are t rademarks or registered tradema rks of their respective holders. This product contains the RSA Software. The products described in this ma nual conform to the European Council directives EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) and TTE Directive (91/263/EEC).
ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR SECURITY SOCKETS LAYER -SOFTWARE (âÂÂSSLâÂÂ) READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CO ND ITIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE USING TH E SSL. USE OF THE SSL SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR ACC E PTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDIT IO NS. In this license agreement ("Licens e Agreement"), you, the purchaser of the license rights granted by this Agreement , are referred to as "Licensee." In accordance with the term s and conditions of this License Agreement, Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd. ("Licens or") grants Li censee a non-exclusive sublicense to us e SSL Software (âÂÂSoftwareâÂÂ), which c ontains the RSA Software licensed to Licensor by RSA Data Security, Inc. ("RSA"). This License Agreement is effective until terminated. Li censor may terminate this Lice nse Agreement if Licensee breaches any of the t erms and conditions. In the event of termination by Lic ensor, Licensee will return t he communicator device of Licensor to Licensee for removal of the Sof tware. All provisions of this Agreement relating to disclaimers of warranties, limitation of liability, remedies , or damages, and Licensor's proprietary rights shall survive termination. The Software is delivered in objec t code only. Licensor shall utilize the Sof tware solely as part of the communicator device f rom Licensor and solely for pe rsonal or internal use and without right to license, ass ign or otherwise transfer such Software to any other person or ent ity. Licensee shall not modify, tra nslate, reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the Softwar e or any part thereof. Licensee agrees not to r emove or destroy any proprietary, trademark or copyright markings or notice s placed upon or contained within the Software or any r elated materials or documentation. By reason of this Agreement or the performance hereof, Lic ensee shall acquire no rights of any kind in any trademark, trade name, logo or product designation under which the Softw are was or is marketed and Licensee shall not make any use of t he same for any reason. IN NO EVENT WILL LICENSO R OR RSA BE LIABLE TO LICENSEE FOR INDIRECT, INCIDENT AL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR EXEMPLA RY DAMAG ES ARISING O UT OF OR RELATED T O THIS A GREEMENT, IN CLUDING B UT NOT LI MITED TO LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBIL ITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND REG ARDLESS OF WHETHER ANY ACTION OR C LAIM IS BASED ON WARRANTY, CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE. UNDER NO CIRCUM STA NCES SHALL LICENSOR'S OR RSA'S TOTAL LIABILITY A RISING OUT O F OR RELA TED TO THIS AGREEMENT EXC EED THE TOTAL A MOUNT PAID B Y LICENS EE. THIS AGRE E MENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT T O ANY LAWS, REGU L ATIONS, ORDERS OR OTHER R E STRICTIONS ON THE EXP ORT FROM THE UNITED S TATES OF AMERICA OF THE SOFTWAR E OR OF INFORMATION ABOUT T HE SOFTWAR E WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME BY THE GOVERNMENT OF THE UNITE D STATES OF AMERICA . NOTW ITHSTA NDING ANY THING CONTAI NED IN TH IS AGRE EMENT TO THE CONT RARY, LICENSE E SHALL NOT EXPOR T OR REEXPORT, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, ANY SOF TWARE OR INFORMATION PE RTAININ G THERETO TO ANY COUNTRY TO WHICH SUCH EXPORT OR REEXPORT IS RESTRICTED OR PROHIBITE D, OR AS TO WHICH SUCH GOVERNMENT OR ANY AGENCY THEREOF REQU IRES AN EXPORT LICENSE OR OTHER G OVERNMENTAL APPROVAL AT THE TIME OF EXPORT OR REEXP ORT WITHOUT FIRS T OBTAINING SUCH L ICENSE OR APPROVAL.
ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. FOR Y OUR SAFETY Read these simple guidelines. Breaking the rules may be dangerous or ille gal. Further detailed information is given in thi s m anu al. ROAD SAFETY CO MES FIRST Do not use the communicator while driving; park the vehicle first. INTERFERE NCE All wireless phones may get interferen ce which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any regulations or rules. Switch off the phone near medical equipment. SWIT CH OFF IN A IRCRAFT Wireless phones can cause interference. Using them on aircraft is ille gal. SWIT CH OFF WHEN REFUELLING Do not use the phone at a refuelling point. Do not use near fu el or chemicals. SWIT CH OFF NEAR BLASTING Do not use the phone wher e blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. USE SENSIBL Y Use only in the normal position (to e ar). Do not touch the ant enna unne cessa rily . USE QUALIFI ED SERVICE Only qualified service personnel must install or repair equipment. ACCE SSORIES AND BA TTERIES Use only approved accessor ies and batteries. Do not con nect incompatible products. MAKING CALLS VIA THE PHONE Close the cover and ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Enter the phone number , including the area code, then press . To end a c all pr ess . To answer a call press . EMERG ENCY CALLS Close the device cover . Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Hold for several seconds, to cle ar the display . Enter the emergency number , then press . G ive your location. Do not end th e call until told t o do so. MAKE BACK UP COPIES Remember to make backup copies of all important data. CONNECTING TO O THER DEVICES When connecting to an y other device, read its userâÂÂs guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. INFRARED PRECAUTIONS Do not point the IR be am at anyoneâÂÂs eye or allow it to in terfere with other IR devices.
Table of Contents ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Table of Contents Introduction 11 About this manual 12 Facts a bout your com municator 13 Facts about cellular data transm ission 14 Getting started 17 First st art-up 17 Commu nicator displ ay 20 Commu nicator keyb oard 24 Commu nicator appli cations 25 Connecto rs 26 Batte ry 27 Special features 31 Commu nicator fe atures 31 Docum ent features 34 To transf er data from old er communicato r models 37 Computer co nnectivity 39 To use the PC Suite 39 To use the Nokia Comm unicator Server 46 Nokia Com municator Serv er for MacOs 47 Contacts 49 Conta cts directory 49 To mak e contact ca rds 51 Contact groups 55 Log s 56
Table of Contents ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Telephone 59 To make a call 59 To answer a call 60 Handsfree mode 61 Multiple calls 62 Telephone settings 65 Flight profile 69 Fax 71 To se nd f axes 71 To receive faxes 73 Fax se ttings 74 Short messages 77 To send short mes sages 78 To receive messages 79 Standard messages 80 Business car ds 81 SMS settings 82 Internet 85 Internet settin g s 86 Mail 89 Mail settings 89 To se nd ma il 92 To fetch ma il 9 4 To read mail 95 World Wide We b 97 WWW set tings 97 Bookmarks 9 8 To navigate in WWW 101 Terminal 104 Telnet 107 Text Web 109
Table of Contents ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Notes 111 To edit docum ents 113 Downloaded files and read-only d ocuments 114 Notes settings 115 Calendar 117 Mont hly schedul e 117 Weekly schedul e 118 Daily schedule 11 9 Calendar b ooking 121 Alarm s 123 To-d o l ist 12 3 System 125 System settin gs 125 Security 127 User dat a 130 Memory 130 Infrared act ivation 131 Digita l camera connec tivity 131 Remote sy nchronisati on 132 Fax modem 133 Data removal 134 Instal l/Remove softwar e 134 Backu p /Restore 135 Memory card tool 135 About this product 135 Extras 137 Calc ulator 137 Clock 138 Composer 141 Voice recorder 144
Table of Contents ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Phone 147 Display indicators 148 To make a call 149 To answer a call 150 To mana ge calls 150 To search for phone num bers 151 To use speed dialling 151 To se nd DT MF t ones 152 Keypa d lock 1 52 Help 153 To use the menus 153 Messages (Menu 1) 1 5 5 Call register (Menu 2) 156 Prof ile s (Me nu 3 ) 158 Settings (Menu 4) 159 Call di vert ( Menu 5) 163 Recorder (Menu 6) 164 Troubleshooting 165 Care and maintenance 171 Important safety information 173 Glossary 177 Index 181
Table of Contents ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Introduction 11 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 1. Introduction Congratulations on purchasing the Nokia 9 1 1 0 Communicator . The Nokia 91 1 0 Communicator is a complete communications tool: it is a wireless phone, messaging device, access terminal and a palmtop organiser in one pocketable package. The Nokia 9 1 1 0 Communicator consists of two parts: the phone and the communicator interface. The phone is on the device cover (figure 1) and the communicator interface is under the cover ( f igure 2). Figure 1 Figure 2
Introduction 12 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Both of these parts use the same resources and work closely together â they are not separate devices. For ex ample, the phone uses the na mes and phone numbers stored in the Contacts directory of the communicator interface, and the communicator interface uses the phone for communicating with the âÂÂoutside worldâÂÂ, for example, when sending or receiving fa xes and connecting to the Internet. The communicator interface contains many organiser and communications applications. The large keyboard, command buttons and display make u sin g the applications easy . The communicator interface has no power on/off button â it switches itself on when you open the cover and switches off when you close the cover . The phone is design ed for making and answering calls quickly . It looks and operates like other Nokia wirele ss phones, except that the earpiece and microphone are on th e rear of the device. The phone is switched on and off by pressing the button on the cover . About this manual This chapter explains how the Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator oper ates. The following chapter , "Getting started", helps you begin using the Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator . It explai ns the start-up procedure and gives information about the various aspects of the device, such as the keyboard and the display . "Special features" explains special functions, and "Computer connectivity" shows how to connect you r communicator to a PC. The rest of this manual deals with the communicator applications and the phone. There is a sh or t glossary of Internet and cellular terms and abbreviations at t h e back of this m anual. If you are switching from the Nokia 9000 Communicator or the Nokia 9 0 00i Communicator to the Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator , please, see âÂÂTo transfer data from older com municator modelsâ on page 37. Tip: Press the button on the communicator interface keyboard to find basic information about the communicator applicat i ons. IMPORT ANT! Do not switch on th e phone when wi reless phone use is prohibited or when i t may cause interference or danger.
Introduction 13 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Facts about your communicator Services The GSM system provides a number of various wireless services, but they are not automatically enabled to the wireless phone user. Even though the Nokia 9 1 1 0 Com municator represents the latest development in wireless phone technology , using its various communications applications requires that you have subscribed to these services an d th at your network operator has activated these services for you . Services that need to be subscribed to are typically the short message service, Internet and fax. Because the number of special serv ices depends on what s ervices are available in your home network, it is, unfortunately , impossible to provide a comprehensive list of th e services an d settings you need in this m an ual. Therefore, this manual gives general information about the additional services. Please, contact your network operator for further information about the availability and th e details of s e rvices in your h ome network. If a service requires a separate ph one number or specific settings, they m ust be stored in the settings o f the communicator . For e xample: Sending and receiving short messages requires that this service is supported by the network you are u sing and activated for your SIM card, and that the phone number of th e message centre is stored in th e settings of the SMS application. Internet access requires that data service is supported by the ne twork you are using and activated for your SIM card. In addition, you must have obtained an Internet access point fr om an Internet service pr ovider . Access codes The Nokia 9 1 10 C ommunicator uses several access codes to protect against unauthorised use of your communicator and SIM card. The access codes you need most often are the lock c od e, which is provided in the sales package, an d the PIN code, which is provided with the SIM c ar d. Y ou can change access codes that a re used by both the phone and the communicator interface via either of them, provided that the code can be changed. For more details on the access codes, see âÂÂSecurityâ on page 127. The Internet applications of the communicator use passwords and user names to protect from u nauthorised use of t he Inte rnet and its services. These passwords are changed in the settings of the Internet applications. Note: In this ma nual, the nam es of the commands on the display are in bold an d the settings and options are in italics .
Introduction 14 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Cont act informa tion All contact information , such as names, addresses, phone numbers, th at you store, goes into th e Contacts directory . Th e phone, the comm unicator interface, and each of the applications have their own views of the Contacts directory . The information shown depends on the in f ormation the selected application can use. For example, when you ar e making a call via the phone, you can view the name and the phone number(s) of the contact. P ossible fa x numbers, e-mail add resses, job titles, etc., are n ot shown. Facts about cellular data transmission The Nokia 91 1 0 Communicator employs the data transmission capabilities of the GSM network to send faxes, short messages and e-mail, and to establish connec tions with re mote comput ers. Cellular data connections can be made from most locations where your wireless phone operates. However , it is recommen ded that you move the communicator to a location where the strongest possible cellular signal can be obtained. When th e signal is strong, data transmission is efficient. In general, you should not ex pect the same performance from cellular data communications as from lan dli ne communications due to the inherent characteristics of the cellular environment. The following factors may impair cellular connections: Noise Radio interference from ele ctronic appliances and equipment, as well as from other wireless phones in metropolitan areas where wireless phones are prevalent. Handove r As the wireless phone user moves from one network cell to another , the signal strength of the channel drops and the cellular telephone exchange may hand the user over to a different cell and frequen cy , where the signal is stronger . A cell handover may also occur wh en the user is stationary due to varying cellular traffic loads. Such handovers may cause sligh t delays. Electrostatic d ischarge A discharge of static electr icity from a finger or a conductor m ay cause erroneous functions in electric devices. The discharge may result in âÂÂgarbledâ display and unstable software operation. Cellular connections may become unreliable, data may be corrupted, and the transmission halted. In this case you need to end the existing call (if an y), switch off the phone (if on) and remove the battery . Then r eplace the battery and establish a new cellular connection.
Introduction 15 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Dead spot s and dropou ts Dead spots are areas where radio signals cannot be received. Dr opouts occur when the wireless phone user passes through an area where the r adio signal is blocked or reduced by geographi c or structural obstructions. Sign al im pair men t Distance and obstacles can cause ou t-of-phase reflected signals that r e sult in a loss of signal strength. Low signal streng th Due to either distance or obstacles, th e r adio signal strength from a cell site may not be strong or stable enough to provide a reliable cellular connection for communication. Therefore, to e nsure the best possible communication, remember to consider the following points: The data connection works best when the communicator is in a stationary position. Attempting cellular communication while in a moving vehicle is not recommended. Fax transmis sion is more easily impaired than data or short message transm ission. Do not place the communicator on a metal surface. Check that the cellular signal strength on the communicator displays is sufficient. See âÂÂCommunicator displayâ on pa ge 20 and âÂÂTo m ake a callâ on page 149. Movin g the communicator within a room especially towar ds a window , may result in a stronger signal. If the cellular signals are not strong enough to support a voice call, data connection should not be attempted until you can find a location with better signal reception. Note: When the ante nna is up, the signal is stronger.
Introduction 16 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Gett ing started 17 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 2. Getting started This chapter explains how to start up you r communicator and install a SIM card, how the communicator oper ates, and how to supply power to th e communicator . When you open the sales package , check that it contains th e following: ⢠Nokia 9110 Communicator ⢠This UserâÂÂs manual, the combined Quick guide and Accessories guide, and the Solution guide ⢠High Power Battery â¢A C c h a r g e r ⢠RS-232 Adapter Cable ⢠Diskette package ⢠CD-ROM with PC connectivity software ⢠Stickers with th e serial number and the lock code of the communicator For information about th e Nokia 9 1 10 Commu n icator accessories, see the Accessories guide. First start-up 1 Close the device cover and make sure that the phone is switched off. If it is on, press . A valid miniature SIM card is required for sending and receiving calls and messages. The card is supplied by your network operator or service provider . If you do not have a SIM card yet, go to step 6 . 2 If the battery is con n ected to the communicator, remove th e battery: pr e ss the catch at the top of the battery and lift the battery away from the battery cavity. See figu re 1. Note: K eep all mi niature SIM cards out of small childrenâÂÂs reach.
Gett ing started 18 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 3 Slide the SIM card into the SIM card slot: make sure that th e gold contacts of the SIM card are facing down and that the bevelled corner of the card is on the right. See figure 2. 4 When the SIM car d is properly inserted into the SI M card slot, the bevelle d corner will remain visible. See figure 3. Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
Gett ing started 19 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 5 When you are sure that the SIM card is correctly installed, r eplace the battery. 6 If there is little or no charge in the battery, it is recommended that you connect the communicator to the ch arger and start charging the battery before continuing with the start-up procedure. See âÂÂBatteryâ on page 2 7 . 7 Open the cover of the communicator. You will see a welcome screen wh ile the communicator performs a self -test. 8 After the self-test is complete, you w ill see a list of countries on the display, see figure 4. Scroll the dark grey selection frame using the arrow keys on the keyboard ov e r the name of your home country. Press the button on the right side of the display next to the command OK . The capital of your home country will be set as you r home city. You can change your home city later in th e Clock application, see âÂÂClockâ on page 138. 9 Write the current date in the input field us in g the format dd.mm.yy , fo r example 22.03. 98 . Press OK . You can later change the date format in the System settings. Time and date can be changed in the settings of the Clock application. Figure 4 Note: If an unacceptable SIM card is inserte d, the message INVAL ID SIM CARD will be displayed. Should this happen, contact your dealer or n etwork operator. Note: The battery does not fit into place if the SIM card is no t correctly installed. Do not force the battery into place! Check that you have inserted the SIM card into the slot as described above. If the SIM card is incorrectly installed, remove it by pulling it away from the slot, and in sert it again.
Gett ing started 20 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 10 Write the current time using the 24-hour format hh :mm , fo r example 17:25 , and press OK . You can later change the time for m at in the System settings. 11 Enter your contact information in the user data c ard and press OK . You can later change the information in the User data application u nder System. The first start-up is now c om pleted. After the start-up, do not immediately remove the battery , as the battery charges the backup battery th at supplies power to the real-time clock of the communicator . To copy the SIM card contents t o the Contacts directory If the installed SIM card contains n ames or numbers, you will be asked after the start-up procedure if you want to copy the SIM car d contents into the memory of your communicator . If the phone is s witched off, the question will be asked the next time the phone is on and you open the cover of the communicator . If you want to do the copying later , press Ca ncel, and do it in the Contacts application, see âÂÂContacts directoryâ on page 49. All phone numbers copied from the SIM card to the communicator memory will go to the Tel field of the contact cards. Therefor e, you must move a ll wireless phone numbers manually into the Te l( GS M) fie ld. See âÂÂTo make contact cardsâ on page 51. The quickest way to copy a phone number is to select the number with the key combination Shift-C trl-left arrow , cut it with Ctrl-X, and paste it to th e right contact card field with Ctrl-V. Communicator display The communicator interface is switched on by open ing the cover . See f igure 5. The applications are run in th e m iddle of the display . The indicators (figure 6) show application and system-related information. The commands always correspond to the column of four command buttons on the right side of the display . The functions of the Menu, Zoom and Backlight buttons are explained in âÂÂCommunicator featuresâ on page 3 1. The scroll bar indicates that there are more items than cu rrently shown on the display . The display can be scrolled with the up and down ar r ow keys. Whenever the selection frame is shown, yo u can select ite ms by m ovin g the selection frame over the desired item with the up and down arrow keys. Note: When taking the phone into use, observe the instr uctions given by your network operator.
Gett ing started 21 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. When the search f ie ld appears a t the bottom of the display , y o u can sea rch for items by entering text into the sear ch field with the keyboard. After the correct item has been selected, pre ss the command button next to the command you wish t o apply to th e item, for example, Open . The following figures illustrate certa in communicator con ve ntions: 1 When a com m and is dimmed, it ca nnot be used, see figure 7. 2 When a cursor appear s on a dotted line, en ter a va lu e with the keyboard, see fig ure 7 . Figure 5 Figure 6
Gett ing started 22 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 3 A pop-up box. Select an item and press OK or Cancel , see figure 8. When a setting with next to it is selected, pressing Change toggles the value or opens a pop-up box. See figure 8. When a setting with next to it is selected, pressing Cha nge opens a new se ttings view . Wh en you press a command with next to it, the comma n ds change. Indicator s The application icon and the application name in the indicator area show the application you are in at the moment. The icons that appear on the Call status and Inbox/Outbox in dicator rows change according to the application and current situation. The battery level and field strength indicators a re the same as shown on the phone display when the phone is on. Figure 7 Figure 8 Application icon Application name Call status Inbox/Outbox Field strength and battery le vel
Gett ing started 23 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Call status â Y ou have a voice call, and the handsfree loudspeaker and microphone are on. See âÂÂHandsfree modeâ on page 61. â A voice call w ith the han dsfre e off. The lou dspeaker and microphone are muted. â An open data connection, see chapter 9 "Internet" on page 85. â The communicator is receiving or sending a fax, see chapter 7 "Fax" on page 7 1. â The communicator is trying to establish an infrared connection, see chapter 4 "Computer connectivity" on pa ge 39. â An infrared connection has been established. â The infrared con nection is obstructed. â The communicator is connected to a PC, see chapter 4 "Computer connectivity" on page 39. â The communicator is being used as a fax modem, see âÂÂF ax modemâ on page 133. â The communicator is in a special operating environment, in this case in the meeting pr ofile. See âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. â Time can be adjusted in the Clock application, see âÂÂClockâ on page 138. Inbo x/Out bo x â The inbox indicator informs you that you have received a fax, short message or mail. â The D ocument outb ox con tai ns uns ent mes sage s, see âÂÂCommunicator featuresâ on page 3 1. Battery leve l â The battery is low and should be recharged. â The battery is charging. The bar scrolls until the battery is fully charged. The outlet plug icon indicates that th e communicator is connected to an external power source. â The battery is f ully charged. All the four bars are displayed. Field strength â The communicator is connected to a cellular network. When all the four bars are shown, the cellular signal r e ception is good. If the signal is wea k, make sure the antenna is up. You ca n also tr y
Gett ing started 24 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. to improve the reception by moving the communicator slightly or by using it in the handsfree mode. â The phone is on, but it is ou tside network coverage. â The phone is off. The communicator cannot send or r eceive calls or messages. Communicator keyboard In addition to the normal ch aracter and n u mber keys, the keyboard has a number of special keys, as shown in figure 9. Applicat ion buttons The buttons at the top of the keyboard start the corresponding applications. ESC To c ancel an acti on, you c an either pres s Canc el or Chr-Q . The Chr-Q k ey combination can only be used when Cancel is among the available commands. All information notes shown on the display can also be dismissed by pressing Chr-Q instead of OK . Tabula tor When writing or editing docum e nts, the tabulator ke y moves th e curs or to th e next tabulator stop. In settings, f or example , the tabulator key can be used to move the cursor to the next field. Character (Chr) The character key is used to generate characters not on the communicator keyboard. A single press of the character key opens a table of special Figure 9
Gett ing started 25 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. characters. Some special characters are also printed on a key as the third character . These, and certain other characters can be generated by pr essing and holding the character key w hile pressing the corresponding key , see âÂÂTo edit documentsâ on page 1 13. Control ( Ctrl) Pressed together with certain keyboard keys, the control key generates shortcut commands which can be used in viewing and writing text, see âÂÂDocument featuresâ on page 34. and Shift When you press the Shift key and then a letter key , an uppercase letter is inserted in front of the cursor . The Shift key does not need to be held down when pressing a key: once you have pressed Shift, the next key press always generates a shifted character . In writing and editing text, Shift and the arrow keys ( ) can be used to select text, see â Document featu resâ on page 34. Arrow keys The arrow keys can be used to move the cursor or the selection fr ame. In some applications, the arrow keys have special func tions, see âÂÂDocument featuresâ on page 34. Enter When the cursor is shown, pressing Enter moves the cu r sor to th e beginning of the next line or adds a new lin e. Enter can also be used to sele ct contacts in the Contacts directory and to open folders and documents. When information notes are shown, you ma y press Enter instead of OK . In option s and settings, when a value can be toggle d, you may pr e ss Enter instead of Ch ange . Communicator applications The coloured application buttons on the communicator keyboard a r e used to start the corresponding applications. Tel e ph o ne â Used for managing voice calls. Fax â En ables you to send any of your own documents as a f a x. Received faxes can be read or f orwarded. SMS â Enables you to send short messages. Received short messages can be read, replied, or f orwarded. Inter net â Includes Internet and modem-based applications. Cont act s â Used for managing contact information, such as names, numbers and addresses. Y ou can exchange contact inform ation as busin ess cards via the SMS application. Notes â Used for w riting and stor in g documents.
Gett ing started 26 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Calendar â Contains an appointment book and a to-do list. Y ou can book events in other calenda r s and set alarms to events. System â Contains PC connectivity , security and other system - related applications. Extras ( ) â Includes various items, such as Calculator , Clock, and Composer . To use th e applications When the cover is opened, the application that was on the display when you closed the cover , appears in the same state. However , if you have made or answered a voice call via the phone and switch to the communicat o r interface by opening the cover , the T elephone appli cation starts automatically . To switch to another application, press the corresponding application button. Y ou can do this even during a call. You need not exit a n y application before starting another . All inactive application s r emain in the background until you start them a gain. To send or receive calls or messages with any of the communications applications, remember that the phone must be switched on a n d in a service area with adequate ce ll ular signal stren gth. Connectors The Nokia 9 1 1 0 can be connected to a variety of devices. The connectors are (figure 1 0): Figure 1 0 Note: Information needs not be specifically saved. When you press Clos e , switch to another application, or close the device cover, the Nokia 9110 C ommunicator sav es all data.
Gett ing started 27 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 1 IrDA-SIR infrared port fo r connecting to a PC, a printer , a digital camera, or another communicator . For information on in frared connection, see chapter 4 "Computer connectivity" on page 39. 2 Connector for the charger plug. 3 Connector for the RS-232 ca ble plug and th e headset plug. Battery The Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator is powered by a rechargeable Lithium-ion battery . The High Power Battery provides 3 to 6 hours of talk/fax/terminal time or 60 to 170 hours of stan dby t ime. F urthe rmore , up t o 400 h ours of standby time may be a ch ieved when the phone is off. Use only batteries and accessories approved by the communicator manufacturer for use with this particular communicator model. Use only chargers approved by the communicator manufacturer for charging a Lithium-ion battery . To cha rge a bat tery 1 Make sure that the battery is pr oper ly installed in the battery compartment. 2 Connect the charger lead to the connector at the bottom of the communicator, as shown in figure 11. 3 Connect th e charger to an AC wall outlet. If the phone is switched on , the CHARGING m essage appears on the di splay and the segments o f the batt ery indicator bar on the righ t side of the phon e display wil l start scrolling. Figure 1 1 Note: The communicator can be used normally during charging.
Gett ing started 28 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 4 When the battery is fully charged, the bars stop scrolling and four bars ar e displayed. You may now remove the charger plug from th e communicator. When the charge in the battery is low and only a few minutes of operation time remain, a warning tone will sound, and the m e ssage BA T TERY IS LOW will be repeated at regular intervals on the phon e display . When the charge level becomes too low for operation, the RECHARG E BA TTERY message will be displayed, accompanied by a warn in g tone. If you do not con nect the communicator to a char ge r , the com m unicator switches itself off. To use th e battery Use only batteries approved by the communicator manufacturer and recharge the battery only with the chargers approved by the manufacturer . With approved chargers and acc e ssories, the battery can be charged continuously . The battery need not be f ully discharged before rechar gi ng. When a charger is not in use, di sconnect it from the power source. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger for longer than a week, since ex cessive charging may shorten its life. If left unused, a fully charged battery will discharge itself over time. The battery can be ch arged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When th e operating time (talk-time and standby time) is noticeably shorter than normal, i t is time to buy a n ew battery . Temperature extremes will affect the ability of your battery to charge: allow it to cool down or warm up firs t. Battery operation time is affected by the following: w hether both the phone and the communicator interface are on, radio signal strength, various phone settings, the use of the backlight, and the length of the screen blanker period, see âÂÂSystem se ttingsâ on page 125. It is recommended always to keep a charged battery in the communicator . Keeping the battery charged maximises the lifetime of the backup battery supplying power to the real-time clock of the com municator . In case th e backup battery is dr ained, it will be automatically charged the next time a charged battery is reconnected to th e communicator . Always close the device cover before removing the battery . Closing the cover will save all data. Note: If t h e battery is fully discharged, it will take 30 - 60 seconds before the CHARGING message appears on the display and the battery indicator bar starts scrolling. After that, it may take 10-30 seconds before you can switch the phone on.
Gett ing started 29 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Note Use the battery only f or its intended purpose. Never use any charger or batter y which is dam aged or worn out. Do not short-circu it th e battery . Accidental short-c ircuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, clip or pen) causes direct connection of the and - terminals of the battery (metal strips at the bottom of the battery), for example, when you carr y a spare battery in your pocket or purse. S hort- circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity an d lifetime of the battery . Always try to keep the battery between 15ðC ( 59ðF) and 25ðC ( 77ðF). A communicator with a hot or cold battery may tem porarily not work, even when the battery is fully ch arged. The performance of Lithium-ion batteries is particularly limited in temperatures be low 0ðC ( 32ðF). Do not dispose of ba tterie s in a f ire! Batteries must be recycled or disposed of pr operly . Batteries must n ot be disposed of in municipal waste.
Gett ing started 30 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Special features 31 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 3. Special features This chapter explains functions that are common to most of the applications. âÂÂCommunicator featuresâ on page 3 1 goes through various f e atures of the device, and âÂÂDocument featuresâ on page 3 4 explains functions that apply to writing and viewing of documents. Communicator features To use the Menu button 1 Press the button on the left of the communicator display to open up a set of options which depend on the application you are in. 2 Move the selection frame over the desired option and press Selec t . The chosen option affects only the document, card or item that is currently selected, open, or being sent. The Menu may also contain th e option Settings with which you can change the settings of the application. The values of th ese settings will be used as defaults for that application. To use the Zoom bu tton Press the button on the left of the display to magnify the view on the display . Zooming is not a vailable on every occasion. To use the Backlight b utton Press the button on the left of the display to turn the backlight of the communicator display on and off. The backlight can be adjusted in the System settings. See âÂÂSystem settingsâ on page 125. Figure 1
Special features 32 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To use the Help butto n Press the button on the communicator keyboard to open up a help text on the current fun ction. The application icon in the indicator area on the left side of the display reminds you of th e application w here you requested help. The help deals with issues relating to the item that was on the display when you pressed the Help button. If no special help is available for the current item, a list of a vailable help topics is shown instead. To view the list of all help topics for the current application, press Ap plicatio n help . The following com mands become available: Open â Opens the selected topic. General help â Shows th e common help topics. Close â Closes the help. To view the list of general communicator topics, press General help . The following commands become availa ble : Open â Opens the selected topic. Appl ication h elp â Returns to the help topics list of the current item. Close â Closes the help. If the help topic you wanted was not among the help topics of the current item or in the general help, close the help, start the correct application and press the Help bu tton again. To use th e memory card A memory card may contain documents, contact databases, applications, backups, printer drivers, etc. When a memory card is inserted in the communicator , the memory card contents are marked with the memory card icon in the corresponding applications. For example, the documents on the memory card are located in a folder shown in the folders list of the Notes application. The items on the memory car d can be used in the same way as corresponding items in the communicator . Y ou can for example install a n d remove software to and from the memory card with the Install/Rem ove software application, and send messages to contacts in the contacts directory of the memory card. To inser t the memory c ard 1 Close the device cover and make sure that the phone is switched off. If it is on, press . 2 Remove the b attery: press the catch at the top of the battery and lift the battery away from the battery cavity. Note: T he m e mo r y c a r d i s n o t included in the sales package, but can be purchased separately.
Special features 33 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 3 Open the hatch at the back of the communicator: carefully open the lid by easing it up from th e r idges on both sides. 4 Slide the memory card under the memory card holder. Make sure that the gold contacts of the card are facing down and that the bevelled corner of the card is o n the right. See figure 2. 5 When th e card is secu rely in pla ce, close th e hatch, and r eplace th e battery. IMPO RTANT! Keep all memory cards out of small childrenâÂÂs reach. Make sure that the hatch is closed before replacing the battery! Do not remove the memory card in the middle of an operation. Be sure to close all m emory card applications before removing the card. If you are installing an application to the memory card and you need to reboot the communicator , do not remove the card until the reboot is complete. Otherwise the application f iles may be lost. If you have an application or a tone on both the memory card and the communicator , the one in th e communicator is used. To select several items Where multiselection is available, you can select several items at once. The commands you use affect all the selected items. Multiselection works in most lists. For example, you can select sever al contacts and remove them a t on ce in the Contacts directory , or select sever al documents and copy them to a memory card at the same time in the Notes application. There are two w ays to select several items: 1 Scroll to the item and press Ctrl-space bar. Or, 2 Press and hold Shift and move up or down the list with the arrow keys to the last sele cted item. To remove an item from the selection, scroll to the item and press Ctrl-space bar again. To cancel the entire selection, press Chr-Q. If you want to select every item in a list, press Ctrl-A. If you want to cancel the selection, press Ctrl-A again. Figure 2
Special features 34 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Document features To name a d ocument Every time you close a ne w document for th e first time, you will be asked to enter a name for th e document in the in put field. The highlighted name in the input field is the communicatorâÂÂs su ggestion for the n ame. To use shortcuts There are several shortcuts you can use in the document applications. The following table lists the available shortcuts: Shortcut Function Ctrl-A Ctrl-C Ctrl-X Ctrl-V Ctrl-Z Selects all Copies select ed text Cuts se lected text Past es selected text Cancels the most r e cent operation Ctrl-B Ctrl-I Ctrl-U Applies bold Applies italics Applies underlining Ctrl-T Ctrl-D Ctrl-M Adds current time Adds current date Adds userâÂÂs na me Ctrl-H Ctrl-E Moves the cursor to the beginning or the end of the document Ctrl-N Ctrl-P Open s the next ite m Opens th e pr evious i tem Chr-left or right arrow Moves the cursor to th e beginning or end of t he line Chr-up or down arrow Scrolls the list or docume nt view up or d own Shift-Ctrl-left or righ t arrow Selects the previous or t he next word Shift-right/left/up/ down arrow While Shift is held down , each press of a n arrow ke y selects one t ext characte r or line Shift-Chr-up or down arrow Selects text page by page inside a document
Special features 35 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To pri nt Press the Menu button and sele ct Print . Y ou can print various items, such as documents, pictures, and SMS messages. The connection type, header , paper size and the default printer must be defined in advance in the System settings. Se e âÂÂSystem settingsâ on page 125. Please, refer to the userâÂÂs guide of the printer for detailed sa fety instructions on the device. To chan ge the printing options, press Op tions in the printing view . The available options depend on the application you are in. To pr int usin g the in fr ared c onne ctio n 1 Go to the System application and set infrared as the connection type. See âÂÂSystem settingsâ on page 125. 2 Make sure the in fr ared port of th e communicator faces the infrared port of the printer. Keep the infrared conn ection clear. If the connection is obstructed for too long, for example, if something is moved between the infrared sensors or the communicator is m oved, printing is interrupted. 3 After the communicator has checked that you do not already have an active connection, it starts to scan for a printer. This means that you cannot print while you are, for exam ple , transferring files f rom the communicator to a PC. 4 If the printer cannot be found, a failure note is shown and the active application returns to th e display. If the correct printer is f ound, the printer driver is selected automatically and the display shows the name of the document and the selected printer. If the printer found is not recognised, press Pr inter s and select the correct printer driver. If the communicator does not have the correct driver for the pr inter, you can try printing the docu m ent using one of the availa bl e printer drivers. 5 Press Start to start printing. Note: For information on supported printers, see the Documentation section on the CD-ROM supplied in the communicator sa l es package, or see the Nokia Wireless Data Forum home page in the World Wide Web at http://www.f orum.nokia.com. Tip: More prin ter drivers can be installed with the PC Suite f or Nokia 9110 Communicator program or from th e CD-ROM included in the communicator sales package. See â To use the PC Suiteâ on p age 39.
Special features 36 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To pr int u sing the c abl e conne ctio n 1 Go to the System application and set cable as the connection type . See âÂÂSystem settingsâ on page 125. 2 Connect the communicator to a serial printer with the RS-232 adapter cable DLR-2. 3 Press Pr inters and select the correct pr inter driver. 4 Press Start to start printin g. Docume nt outbox When you send faxes, short m e ssages and m ail, they always go first to the Document outbox. The outbox prepares your document and then sends it via the phone. If the phone is off, or the cellular signal strength is ina de quate, the document will not be sent until the phone is switched on and the signal strength is sufficient. If the phone or fax called is off or busy during the first attempt, the Document outbox attempts to send the document nine more times. If the sending still fails, the commun i cator informs you of th is with a note. The Document outbox can be accessed in th e main views of the Fax, SMS, Mail and Notes applications, where it is shown at the bottom of th e folders list. To open the Document outbox, select it from the folder s list an d press Open . The main statuses tha t documents can have in the outbox a re: Sending â The document is currently being sent. W aitin g â The docume nt is waiting for sending to become possible, e.g. when the phone is switched on, cellular signal strength becomes adequate, previous phone call ends. Retr y [ti me] â Sending of the docu ment failed and it will be s e nt again at the time specified in th e square brackets. At [time] â The fax is waiting to be se nt at the time you have spec ified. See âÂÂFax settingsâ on page 74. Sending [current page/total pages] â T he number of the f ax page that is bein g sent and the total number of the pages. Figure 3
Special features 37 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Upon request â E-mail messages may h ave this status if the Send mail setti ng has been set to Upon request in the Mail settings. See âÂÂMail settingsâ on page 8 9. These messages will n ot be sent until you select one and press Star t . All mail with the Upon request status will be sent during the same connection . To speed up manually the sending of documents that have the Waiting , Retry , At [ti me] or Upon request status, select the docu m ent and press St ar t . The document(s) will be sent as soon as possible. A document is removed from th e Document outbox if sending succeeds or you cancel the sending by pressin g Cancel send ing . Received communication note When you open the cover of the communicator and have mis s ed calls, received faxes, short m essages or mail, or th ere are unsent docu ments in the Document outbox, a note will be shown, see figure 4. The note can be dismissed by pressing Cancel . To r e ad the received documents or to check who h a s made the missed calls, select the corresponding item on t he list and press View . To transfer data from older communicator models Y ou can make backups of the data in the Nokia 9000 Communicator or the Nokia 9000i Communicator with the Nokia Communicator Server program, and then restore the data to a same language version of the Nokia 91 1 0 Communicator . Y ou can transfer data in a similar way between the same language versions, e.g. from a Fin nish version of the Nokia 9000i Communicator to a Finnish version of the Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator . Figure 4 Note: You will not be able to restore the sett ings fr om Nokia 90 00 or 9000i communi cators to the Nokia 9110 Co mmunica tor.
Special features 38 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To transfer data be tween different language versions 1 If the languages are not compatible, e.g. if you want to transfer data from a Finnish version of the Nokia 9000i Communicator to a French version of the Nokia 9110 Commun icator, move your contacts and calendar data with the Nokia Commun icator Server program onto a PC using the Import/ Export contacts an d Import/Export calendar data applications. 2 Move your documents with the Nokia Communicator Server program onto a PC using the File transfer application. 3 Start the PC Suite for Nokia 9110 Communicator program on the PC an d transfer the contacts, calendar data , and documents to the Nokia 9110 Communicator.
Computer conn ectivity 39 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 4. Comput er connect ivity This chapter explains how to install the PC connectivity software on a PC, how to connect your commun i cator to the PC or an Apple Macintosh computer , and how to use the connectivity programs. To use the PC Sui te Y ou can connect your communicator to a s u itable PC with the PC Suite for Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator program. The PC Suite and its userâÂÂs gu ide are found on the CD-ROM supplied in th e communicator sales package. The PC Suite works with Windows 95/98 and NT 4.0, and requires IBM- compatible 486 PC or higher . When using the PC Suite, you only need to connect your communicator to a PC; everything else is done on the PC. Figure 1 Note: Making or answering ph one calls during a PC con nection is not recommended as it might disrupt the operation.
Computer conn ectivity 40 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To insta ll th e P C Sui te on a PC The CD-ROM should launch itself automatically after you have inserted it into the CD drive of your PC. If not, please, f o llow these steps: 1 Click the Windows âÂÂStartâ button; then click âÂÂRunâÂÂ. 2 If your PC has Windows 95, 98 or NT 4.0 (or later), type d:\9110.exe in the command line. If your PC has Windows 3.x, type d: \data\9 110_31.exe. Substitute the letter âÂÂdâ with the letter of the CD drive. 3 Press Enter. 4 Follow the instructions shown on the screen. To use the PC Suite with an infr ar ed connection 1 The IrDA software must be installed and running on the PC. To check if the IrDA driver is already installed on the PC, go to the Control Panel. If there is an icon called Infrared, the driver has been in stalled. 2 Make sure that the infrar ed port of the communicat or faces the infrared port of t he PC. Ke ep the in frare d link c lear: c heck the infrare d indi cators in the indicator ar ea, see âÂÂCom municator disp layâ on page 20. If the infrare d link is obstruct ed for too lo ng, for exam ple, if some thing is moved be tween the infrared senso rs or the communicat or is moved, the ope ration is interrupte d. 3 Start the PC Suite software on the PC. In the Preference dialog, select IR as the data transfer protocol, and the correct COM port. 4 Start the Infrared activation applica tion on your commun i cator and press Activate . See âÂÂInfrared activa tionâ on page 131. To use the PC Sui te with a cable connectio n 1 Connect the 9-pin end of the RS-23 2 adapter cable DLR-2 to the COM port of the PC, and the other end to the connector at the bottom of the communicator. See âÂÂConnectorsâ on page 26. 2 Start the PC Suite software on the PC. Note: The PC Suite for Nokia 911 0 Communicator program c an be found in the Menu under the headin g âÂÂPC and Macintosh softwareâÂÂ. Note: Remem ber to mak e backup copies of all important data! Tip: You can a lso u se the o ption al deskstand for easy PC c on nectivity. See the Accessories guide.
Computer conn ectivity 41 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Contacts The Contacts function of the PC Suite lets you create, edit and update contact cards on your Nokia 9 1 1 0 Communicator , and transfer them between a PC and your communicator . T o start the Contacts application, click on the Contacts icon in the main scr e en. Intellisyn c With the Intellisync function you can synchronise data between your communicator and a PC. 1 Conne ct your co mmunic ator to the PC. 2 Start the PC Suite progr am on the PC and click the I ntellisync icon in the main screen . 3 The Local (i.e. PC) tab is automatically selected. Click the Settings bu tton. Figure 2
Computer conn ectivity 42 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 4 This displays the PC Suite Configuration dialog with the Calendar, Contacts, and To-do list applications of your communicator. 5 Click on the communicator application you wan t to configure. 6 Click the Ch oose button to enter the Choose Translator dialog. The Choose Translator dialog lists all the PC applications that are compatible with the communicator application you selected. 7 Click the OK button in the Choose Translator dialog to return to the Configuration dialog. Now the PC application you selected appears next to the name of the com m unicator application. 8 Specify the application and, if necessar y, the file you want to synchronise. Note: You may be pr esented with a dialog containing the tabs Format and File. In the Format tab, select the address format that you are using for addresses in your communicator. The Contacts Format 5 is recommended. In the File tab, indicate if you want to synchronise Contacts on the communicator memor y, or on the mem ory card. After this, clic k OK. Note: The fir st time you select Microsoft Outlook in the Choose T ranslator dialog, use the Browse button to locate the dat a in your Outlook folder which you wish to synchronise. Note: In order to synchronise data successfully between your communicator and a PC application, click on the Advanced button after sele cting the application with which to do the sy nchronisation. In the Advanced settings dialog, click on Field Mapping and match the fields of the PC application with those fields of the communicator that have been marked with asterisks, s ee figure 3.
Computer conn ectivity 43 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 9 When you are ready to perform the operation, click the OK button at the bottom of the Configuration dialog. 10 Click the Synchronise button on the PC Suite opening sc r een. 11 If prompted, resolve data conflicts. 12 A confirmation prompt appears, showing you how many adds , changes, and deletes will be applied to each of your systems if you proceed w ith the operation. Click Accept to proceed, or Cancel to discon tin ue. Note: If you have a very large contact database in your communicator , you might not have enough free memory in the communicator to complete the synchronisation ope ration. In order to overcome this limitation, contacts can be divided in to several contact databases on m emory card. E a ch contact database can then be synchronised separately . The maximum amount of contacts that can be successfully syn ch ronised, depending on the amount of f ree memory in the communicator , is about 1000 contacts in each database. Refer to "Quick Start Tutorial" in Chapter 3 of the PC Suite for Nokia 91 1 0 Communicator User Gu ide found on the CD-ROM for instructions on how to synchronise contacts on the memory card. File transfer The File Transfer application lets you move, copy , paste, rename, and remove communicator and PC files. Figure 3
Computer conn ectivity 44 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 1 Establish a connection between your com municator and a PC. See above. 2 Start the PC S uite program on the PC and click the File Transfer icon in the main scre en. 3 Sele ct an item by clickin g on it in the F ile Transfer screen with the mous e and drag and drop it to the appr opriate PC dir ectory or co mmunicator fol der. Backup / Restore Figure 4 Note: Faxes a re transf erre d from the communicator to a PC in TIF F format; this means that you need to use Windows Im aging to view more than the first pag e of a fax.
Computer conn ectivity 45 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. The Backup/Restore function enables you to create backups of your communicator data on a PC and later restore the data in the communicator . 1 Establish a connection between you r communicator and a PC, see above. 2 Start the PC Suite progr am on the PC and click the Backup/Restore icon in the main screen. 3 Click on the Backup tab and select one of the following options: All device data backs up all of the data in your communicator, Selected device data allows you to select whether to backup your Calendar data, Contacts, Documents, or Settings, or select Memory card data to backup the information on your memory card. 4 In the âÂÂBackup Pathâ box, specify the location where you want the backups to be stored. The backup name is as signed automatically. 5 Enter a number between 1 and 9 9 in the âÂÂNumber of backup s toresâ box. 6 Click the Backup button. To restore data, click on the Restore tab . Specify the location of the backup in the âÂÂBackup stored inâ box. In the lower box, click on the data you want to restore. Click Restore to restore the backup to your communicator . Insta ll / Remove The Install/Remove Software function lets you install and remove software from your communicator . 1 Establish a connection between you r communicator and a PC, see above. 2 Start the PC Suite program on the PC and click the Install/Remove icon in the main screen. 3 Click the Install tab and en ter the location of th e software you want to install in the âÂÂSelect Path â box. 4 Click on the software you wan t to install in the box below. 5 Click the Install button. To remove softwar e from your communicator , click th e Remove tab . Select th e software you want to r e move in the box a n d click the Remove button. Note: If you install to the Nokia 9110 Communicator software made for the older communicator models, be aware that the gr eyscales of the devices a re different. Therefore, the display may see m lighter. Although this difference does not affect the functioning of the software, always try to install the version made especially for th e Nok ia 91 10 Commu nica tor.
Computer conn ectivity 46 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Import / E xport The Import/Export function can be used to transfer calendar and contacts files between your commun icator and a PC. 1 Establish a connection between your communicator and a PC, as shown above. 2 Start the PC Suite program on the PC and click the Import/Export icon in the main s creen. 3 Click the Export tab and choose one of three options: Calendar data; Contacts; Contacts File on Memory C ard. 4 In the âÂÂSelect the PC file to createâ box, specify the name and path of the PC file you wan t to create. 5 Click the Export button. To import a file from a PC to your communicator , click the Import tab and select which items to import. Specif y the PC file that you want to transfer to your communicator and click the Import button. To use the Nokia Communicator Server For Windows 3.1 1 and Apple Macintosh users the CD-ROM in the communicator sales package contains the Nokia Communicator Server program. With the Nokia Communicator Server you can install and use the communicator applications that r equire PC connectivity , see chapter 12 "System" on page 125. Y ou need to con nect your comm u nicator to a PC and start the necessary application on the communicator . The Nokia Communicator Server also works with W in dows 95 and N T . To install the Nokia Co mmunicator Server o n a PC 1 Insert the diskette into the diskette drive. Note: The English version of the File transfer, Import/export contacts, and Import/Export calendar data applications that can be used with the Nokia Communicator Server can be installed to your communicator from the di skette included in the sales package. Other language versions are found on the C D-ROM. Tip: Y ou do not need this software if you use the PC Suite for Nokia 9110 Communicator. See âÂÂTo use the PC Su iteâ on page 39.
Computer conn ectivity 47 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 2 In the Windows Program Manager, click on the âÂÂFileâ menu. 3 Click on menu item âÂÂRunâ and type a:\server in th e command line. Substitute the letter âÂÂaâ with the letter of the diskette drive. 4 Press Enter. 5 Follow the instructions shown on the screen. To use the Nokia Communicator Server with an infrared connection 1 Follow the fir st two steps for i nstalling the PC Su ite. 2 Start the Nokia Communicator Se rver software on the PC. 3 Start the desired PC connectivity application on your communicator. Remember to set infrared as the connection type. To use the No kia Communicator Ser ver with a cable conne ction 1 Connect the 9-pin end of the RS-232 adapter cable DL R -2 to the COM port of the PC, and the other end to the connector at the bottom of the communicator. See âÂÂConnectorsâ on page 26. 2 Start the Nokia Communicator Server software on the PC. Check that the COM port reported by the software is correct. 3 Start the desired PC connectivity application on your communicator. Remember to set cable a s the connection type. Nokia Communicator Ser ver for MacOs To connect to a n Apple Macintosh, you must have the Nokia Communicator Server application running on th e Macintosh a nd a cable connection established between the communicator and th e Macintosh. The Nokia Communicator Server application is compatible w ith MacOS 7.5 or newer versions, provided that they are equipped with a RS-422 serial port. Macs equipped with a USB port can be connected to a communicator using a USB to serial adapter . To connec t to an Apple Macinto sh RS-422 serial port , you need to have an Ap ple Mac modem cable (not pr ovided by Nokia) c onnected t o your Mac. To co nnect the modem cable to the DL R-2 cable ( included in the sale s package), you need to have an 9M25F adapter (not provi ded by Nokia), be cause the Mac modem cable has 25 pins and the DL R-2 RS cable has only 9 p ins. With t his cable combination you can use the Nokia Communicator Serve r software for MacOs. The PC suite connectivity s oftware does not support MacOS. Tip: For information on how to install new software on your comm u nicator with th e Nokia Communicator Server, see âÂÂInstall/ Remove softwareâ on page 134.
Computer conn ectivity 48 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Contac ts 49 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 5. Contacts The Contacts application is used for creating, e diting, and managing all contact information, such a s phone numbers, addresses and speed dials, and for viewing logs of all incoming and outgoing voice, da ta and fax calls and SMS messages. The Telephone, F ax, SMS, Calendar and Mail applications al l use information found in the Contacts di rectory . Contacts directory The Contacts main view shows two win dows: on the left is th e Contacts directory , which is a list of all contact cards, and on the right is the currently selected contact card. The active window is surrounded by a dar k frame. You can toggle between the windows with the Tab key . The contact cards are listed in the Contacts directory in alphabetical order according to th e name in the Name field of each card. To find contact cards 1 Move the selection frame in the Contacts directory with the arrow keys until the contact you are searching for is shown within the sele ction frame. Or, 2 Enter text into the search field. The search looks for matches in the Name , Company and Address fiel ds. The search r e sults can be cleared by removing characters one by one from the search field wi th the backspace key. Figure 1 Tip: Y ou will find the Club Nokia Careline contact card in the Contacts directory. Club Nokia Careline answers questions and offers instr u ctions over th e phone.
Contac ts 50 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To open the selected contact card, press Open . To remove the s elected contact card, press Delete . To use the Menu button Pressing the Menu button in the Contacts directory opens a new set of options: Individual log â Opens the Individual log of the selected contact, see âÂÂLogsâ on page 56. General log â Open s the General log. Duplicate card â Creates a duplicate of the selected card. SIM card memory â Shows the contents of your SIM card. Copy to SIM â Copies the selected con tact(s) to the SIM card memory . Crea te group â Cr eates a new contac t group, see âÂÂContact groupsâ on page 55. List groups â Opens a list of all contact groups. New contact s database â Creates a new contacts d atabase to the memory card. Rename contacts database â Y ou can give the memory card con tacts database a new nam e . Copy contacts â Y ou can copy con tacts to and from your memory card . Move contacts â You can move contacts to and from your m emory card. Contact info â Shows the n umber of contacts and th e amount of contact d ata. Settings â Enables you to change the following settings: Contact card template â You can de fine which fields are included in all new contact cards you create. Changes made to the template affect all new, but not existing contact cards. You cannot enter text into the fields of the template. Log length â You can define how recent contacts will be listed in the General and Individual logs. Select the n e w log length and press OK . The possible values are: Zero / 10 days / 30 days / 1 year / User defined: days (0 â 365 days ). To create a new contacts database on your memory card To create a new contacts databa se on your memory card, press the Menu button and select New contacts database . Note: I f y o u h a v e a m e m o r y c a r d i n s e r t e d i n t h e communicator, the memory card c ontact databases are sh own as folders in the Contacts main view. When you open a folder, you can only call and send messages to the contacts in that database.
Contac ts 51 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To copy and move contacts to and from the new database, select the contact(s) you want and press the Menu button again. Then scroll down to select either Copy contacts or Move contacts . To view the contacts da tabase, press Open . T o make a call to a contact on the database, select the contact and go to the Telephone application. To make contact cards 1 To make a new contact car d , press New in the Contacts main view. 2 When the new contact card ope ns, enter the contact inform ation in the various fields. Use the arrow keys to move from one field to another. You can add lines to the Address and Note fields with the Enter key. 3 To return to the Contacts directory, press Close . When storing phone numbers or DTMF sequences, you can use h yphens and spaces to arran ge the appearance of th e strings. This will not affect th e way the numbers or D TMF tones will be dialled. To add new fields to a contact card 1 Press Fields in the currently open ed contact card. See figure 2. 2 Press Add f ield . A pop-up box opens, listing the ava ilable fields. Tip: Whe n entering phone number s into the Tel f ields, storing a char acter in front of the country code will allow you to use the same phone number abroad . Tip: It is possible to import contacts from a PC or certain handheld devices by using th e IntelliMigrate program on the CD-ROM supplied in the sales pac kage of the communicator.
Contac ts 52 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 3 Select a field and press OK . There can only be one Name , Job title , Company , Note and Password field. To customise the lab el of a field 1 Press Fields in the currently opened contact card. 2 Select a field and press Change l abel . 3 Select one of the predefined labels or scroll dow n to the field with a dotte d line and write the label text, e.g. Modem , and press OK . To remove the selected field, press Delet e field . The Name field cannot be removed. Contact card option s When you pr ess Options in an opened contact card, the following options become available: Ringing tone â Y ou can set a specific ringing tone for each contact in the Contacts directory . Select a tone from th e list, and press Select . The icon appears at the top of the contact card. See figure 2. In or der to use this Figure 2 Note: Th e Tel /Fax field is f or alternating ca lls, the Tel(Se rver) f ield for sending bookings to remote calendar se rvers, and the Password field for the calendar booking password. See âÂÂMultiple callsâ on page 62, and âÂÂCalendar bookingâ on page 121. Note: Remember to put wireless phone numbers into the Tel(GSM) f ields of the contact cards. Othe rwise you cannot send SMS messages to these number s.
Contac ts 53 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. function, however , the In dividual ringing tones setting must first be set on. See âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. Attached image â You can attach a picture of the contact to the contact card. Y ou can then send the picture with a business card, and the picture is shown on the display when the per son calls you. The picture must first be stored in JPEG for m at in the Contact images subfolder of the Downloaded files fol der , where it is then selected. Choose a picture and press OK . When a picture is at tached to a contact card, it is automatically adjusted to the proper size. If there is an old picture in the contact card, it will be replaced by the new pictur e. If you want to keep the origin al picture, make a copy of it and give it a different name, or move the copy to another folder , be fore you attach th e new picture. Speed d ials â Y ou can set a s peed dial nu mber for the s elected c ontact card. To set speed d ials Speed dialling is a quick way to call frequ ently used phone numbers. Y ou can assign speed dials to eight phone n umbers. Number 1 is reser ved for calling your voice mailbox. For in formation on how to use the speed dials, see âÂÂTo use speed diallingâ on page 15 1. 1 Press Op tions in an opened contact card and select Speed dials . All phone number fields of the contact card are shown. 2 Select a field to which you want to assign a speed dial and pr ess Change . 3 Select a number and press OK . The speed dial number will be shown in the contact card with the icon . See figure 2. Note: If the communicator ca n not find the relevant contact card within three seconds from receiving an incoming call, the default ringing tone Grande Valse will r eplace the selected individual ringing tone. This may happ en if you have ma ny hundr eds of co ntacts cards stored in y our communica tor . Note: If you want to attach a picture to a contact card located in the contacts database of the memory card, the picture must first be stored in the Con tact images folder of the memory card.
Contac ts 54 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To change or remove spee d dials 1 Select the speed dial you want to change or remove and press Change . 2 Move the selection frame to the new location and press OK . If you want to remove a speed dial location, ch oose None . To store D TMF tones For information on how to send DTMF tones, see âÂÂMultiple callsâ on page 62, or âÂÂTo send D TMF tonesâ on page 152. If you need both a voice and a D TMF phone number for the contact, store the DTMF sequence in the Tel field, in which case the phone number and the DTMF sequence must be separated by one of the special characters in table 1. Or add a DTM F field to the contact car d with the Add fie ld command. To use the Menu button Pressing the Menu button in a n opened contact card opens a n ew set of options: Duplicate card â C reates a copy of the curren t card. Copy contents â Copies the contents of the card to a clipboard. Y ou can add this information to doc u ments by pr e ssing Ctrl-V. Next card â Open s the next contact card in the directory. Previous card â Opens the previous contact card in the directory . Fetch â If you have selected the URL field of a contact card with the selection frame, pres sing Fetch starts the WWW application and opens a connection to the first UR L address in the field. Belongs to groups â Shows all the groups of which the current contact i s a member . To view the contact info r mation on your SIM card 1 Press the Menu button in the Cont acts directory, and select the SIM card memor y option. 2 Select the contact w ith the selection frame and press Open . Character Function * and # May be used if th e DTMF service requires them. p (pause) Inserts a pau se of 2.5 seconds in front of, or between, DTMF digits. w (wait) When the âÂÂwâ character is stored in a sequence, the rest of the sequence is not sen t until you press Send again in the Telephone application. Table 1
Contac ts 55 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To add a new contact to the SIM card m emor y , press New . To r emove the selected contact(s) from the SIM card me mory , press Clear . To return to the Contacts main view , press Close . If you press the Menu button in the SIM contents view , the f ollowing options become available: Sort by name/Sort by location â Ar ranges the contacts in alphabetical order or in the order of their memory location. Copy SIM contacts â Copies the selected con tact(s) to the Contacts directory . SIM info â Shows the amount of data in the S IM card memory . Contact gr oups Y ou can create contact groups in order to be able to s e nd mail or short messages to a group of people at the same time. See figure 3. To cre ate a g roup 1 Use multiselection in the Contacts directory to select the contacts you want to include in the group. 2 Press the Menu button an d select the Create group option Y ou can also create an empty group by pressing the Menu button and selecting Create group , and add members later . See below . When you close a new group contact card for th e first time, you will be asked to enter the name of the group. To add new contacts to a gr oup 1 Open the group contact card and press Add . A list of contacts opens. 2 Select the contact(s) you want and press Add . Note: The SIM card cannot be accessed if the Fixed diallin g function is on. See âÂÂSettings (Menu 4)â on page 159.
Contac ts 56 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To remove contacts fr o m a group, open the group contact card, select the contact(s) to be removed and press Remove . To use the Menu button When you press the Menu button in an opened group contact card, the following options become available: Rename group â Allows you to give the grou p a new name. Belongs to groups â Shows all the groups to which th e selected contact belongs. List of groups â Opens a list of all contact groups. Logs The Contacts application shows all com m unication events as two logs: th e General log shows all, or cert ain types of, communication events in chronological order . The Individual log shows a list of all communication events relating to the selected contact . To access the log s 1 Press the Menu button in th e Contacts directory. 2 Select either Individual log or General log . To eras e the contents o f the log 1 Press Cl ear list . 2 A pop-up box open s to let you define how old com munications you want to remove. The clearing procedure reflects o n the other lo g as well. To make a new contact card 1 Open the General log. Figure 3 Note: Remote mailbox, Terminal and Internet connections are logged as data calls.
Contac ts 57 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 2 Select a log event and press Create car d . If the contact card already exists, the command is dimmed. To view only certain communicatio n types 1 Open the General log an d press Filt er . 2 Select the communication type y ou want to view and pr ess OK .
Contac ts 58 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Telephone 59 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 6. Telephone The Telephone application is started by pressing the Tel. application button on the keyboard. Some of the operations explained here can also be made via the phone. Y ou can have two separate phone lines, see âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on pa ge 65. To make a call In order to make phone calls, a valid SIM card must be inserted and the phone must be switched on. There are thr ee ways to make a call. To make the call manually 1 Enter the telephone number in the search field. 2 Press Call . To call a number in th e Telephone d irectory When you have no active voice calls, the Telephone m ain view shows th e Telephone directory , see figure 1. Contact cards th at do not contain any phone numbers appear dim med in the dir ectory and ca n not be selected. 1 Select a contact in the Telephone directory either by scrollin g or by using the sear ch field. 2 Press Call . If the contact has more than one phone numbe r, a pop-up box opens, listing all th e contactâÂÂs phone numbers. Ch oose a number from the list and press Cal l . Note: Opening or closing t he cover does not affect active phone calls. If you have made a voice ca ll via the phone and you ope n the cover, the Teleph one application starts a utomatically. You can continue th e call after pressing Audi o on . See âÂÂHandsfree modeâ on page 61. Note: When making a call, make sure that the a nten na at the top of the communicator is u p.
Telephone 60 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To call a number in the Recent calls list 1 Pres s the Rece nt calls command. 2 Select the Dialled, Received or Missed calls list and press Open . 3 Select a n umber from the list and press Call . Once you have made the cal l, you can close the cover and continue the call with the phone, unless you want to use the ha ndsfree option, s ee âÂÂHandsfree modeâ on page 6 1. To call a number on the SI M card 1 Press the Menu button in the T e lephone directory. 2 Select S IM car d me mory and press Select . If you wish to return to the T elephone directory , press the Menu button again and select Telephone directory . To check call costs 1 Press the Menu button in the Telephone directory. 2 Select Show call costs and press Se le ct . To an swer a c all 1 When you receive a call while having the communicator cover open, a note about the incoming call is shown on the display. If you are called by a person who has a contact card in your Contacts directory, as in the figure 2, the callerâÂÂs name is shown on the note, if this feature is supported by the network. To answer the call, pr ess Answer . Or, Figure 1 Tip: When you open the Dialle d, Received or Missed calls li st and select a contact, Create card enables you to make a contact card for the contact.
Telephone 61 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 2 Close the device cover an d answer the call via the ph one by pressing . If you do not want to take th e call, press End cal l or . The caller will hear the alerting tone ch ange to a âÂÂline busyâ tone. To use the Menu button If you press the Menu button while having a call active, the following options become available: Send DTMF â Allows y ou to se nd D TMF tones. Select one of the prede fined sequences, or enter a ne w sequence in t h e input field. V oice recorde r â Enables you to re cord voice memos. See âÂÂV oice r ecorderâ on page 144. More info â Allow s you to vie w the other par tyâÂÂs cont act car d and indiv idual lo g. Settings â Enables you to chan ge the Te leph one settings, see âÂÂT e lephone settingsâ on page 65. Handsfree mode When you have a ca ll, the handsfree mode allows you to s pe ak and listen to the communicator from a short distance wh en the cover is open. This function is not available when the cover is closed. The Telephone setting A u dio when cover opened determines whether th e handsfree mode is activated automa tically after you open the cover . T o set th e handsfree mode on manually , press Au dio on . After the audio has been set on , the command changes to Vol u m e . Press V olume to adjust the speaker volume or to turn the audio off. The indicator shows the chosen volu m e level. Note: You cannot have two active calls at the same time. If the Call waiting network service is activated in your SIM card, the active call is autom atically put on hold when you a nswer the new incomin g call. Tip: If you do not want your communicator to alert, a quick way to make the communicator silent is to close the cover and pr ess the key on the phone. Press the key again until the selection frame is on the Silent profile. To select the profile, press and hold .
Telephone 62 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Multip le calls When you have made a call, information about the call is sh own on the display . In addition to the active c all, you can have a call on hold and a waiting call at the same time. T he conference call, which can accommodate up to five remote participants, is handled as a single call. To switch between multiple calls, u se the arrow keys. The command buttons change according to the status of the selected call. For ex ample, a call on hold can be changed to a n active call by pressing Activa te . The call information may include the f ollow ing (see figure 2): The name or phone number of th e caller and a pi cture, if available. The status of the call: active, on h o ld, waiting, or conference, and whether the audio is off. The call timer displays how much time has expired since the beginning of the call. The timer also counts t he time spent on hold. The call cost counter shows the cumulative cost of th e call, if this network service is available and the call cost setting is on. Y ou can determine w hether to calculate the call costs in currency or charging units in the T elephone settings, se e âÂÂT elephone settin gsâ on page 65. To end a call, select the call with the ar row keys and press End call . Figure 2 Note: The actual in voice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending upon network features, rounding-off f or billing, taxes and so forth.
Telephone 63 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To make a new call 1 If you already have an active call and a call on hold, drop one of the calls or merge them into a conference call. 2 Press New call and make the new call normally. T he previous call will be put on hold. To make a conf erence call The conference call is a network service. Contact your ne twork operator to check if this service is available. In a conference call, you and up to five remote persons can hear each other simultaneously . 1 Make the firs t call norma lly. 2 Once this person has a n swered, make a call to the second participant by pressing New c all . The first call is pu t on hold. 3 Wait until the second person answers the call. 4 To include the first participant in the call, press Conference ca ll . If you want to include a new pe rson in the conference call, r epeat this operation. 5 When all participants have be en included in the conference call, the best voice quality is achieved by closing the cover and continuing the call via the phone. To en d the c all wi th a c onfer ence c all pa rticip ant 1 Press Confe rence commands . 2 Select the caller fr om the list of participants (figure 3 ) and press Drop . To talk p r ivatel y with one of the con ference call part icipants 1 Press Confe rence commands . 2 Select a participant from th e list and press One to one . The call is n ow split into two: the conference call is on h old and the one-to-one call is active. 3 Once you have finished the private conversation, you can connect the person back into the con fer ence call by pressing Co nference call . Figure 3
Telephone 64 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To transfer calls The call transfer is a network serv ice which enables you to connect two calls together and disconnect yourself fr om both calls. 1 When you have one call on hold, and another call active or an outgoing call alerting, press Transfer to connect the calls together. To answer a wait ing call Call waiting is a networ k service to which you must subscribe before you can use it. Call waiting is set on in the Telephone settings, see âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. 1 When you receive a new call while you alr e ady have an ac tive call, you w i ll hear a sound an d see a note informing you of the new incoming ca ll. 2 Press Answer . The previous call will be p ut on hold. To send DTMF tones when you have an active call 1 Key in the digits from the communicator keyboard. Each keystroke will generate a DTMF tone which will b e transm itted dir ectly. Besid es the numbe rs 0 - 9, you can also use the ch aracters p , w , * and # when sending DTMF tones. For information on the functions of these characters, see âÂÂTo m ake contact cardsâ on page 51. Or alternative ly , 1 Press the Menu button and select Send DTMF . The DTMF sequences stored in the other partyâÂÂs contact ca rd are shown. For information on how to store DTMF sequences, see âÂÂTo make con tact cardsâ on page 51. 2 Select a DTMF sequen ce. You ca n edit the sequence, or, if there are no stored sequences, you can write a new DTMF sequ ence into the input field. 3 Press Send . To make alternating calls An alternating call is ma de as a voice call, bu t it changes into a fax call. An alternating call can be made to a fax box, for example: you initiate the call as Note: Calls can be transferred only if all calls are voice calls, not fax or data calls, and n one of the calls is a conference call. Tip: Y ou cannot access the stored DTMF sequences during a conference call. However, you c an send DT MF tones during a conference call by keying in the digits from the keyboard.
Telephone 65 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. a voice call, but it changes into a fax call when your fax box starts to s e nd you your faxes . To make alternating calls, you need to add a special Tel /Fa x field to th e contact cards of th e recipients of your alternating calls. See âÂÂT o make contact cardsâ on page 5 1. Y ou can also chan ge the mode of the call from voice to fax manually by pressing Change call mode . Alternating calls cannot be put on hold or incorporated into a conference call. Telepho ne settings Press Settings in the Telephone main view to open a list of several settings groups. To change the settings 1 Select a settings group and pr ess Change to open it. 2 Select a setting and press Cha nge . The current value of the setting is displayed after the setting name, unless the setting is one the network services: call diverting, barring or waiting. See the following s e ctions. Profile se ttings The profile set tings are used for sel ecting the op erating environment for t he commu nicato r , and for m odifyin g the pro file featur es. One pr ofil e is always in use. Profile in use â Pre ss Change and select the profile you want to use. Pr ess OK . Profil es â With this s etting you can m odify the profi les. The av ailable pro files are: Gener al â Th e normal profile of th e communicator. Silent â You can set this pr ofile on when you want all the alert tones to remain silent. Meeting â You can specify how the communicator operates when you are in a meeting. Outdoor â You can specify how the communicator operates when you ar e outdoors. Figure 4
Telephone 66 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Pager â You can set th is profile on when you want the communicator to act as a pa ger, i.e. the ringing tone sounds only on ce and received SMS messages alert. Flight â Sets on th e flight profile, see âÂÂFlight profileâ on page 6 9 . Car â The car profile is set on automatically when the communicator is connected to a car kit. Headset â The headset profile is set on automatically when a headset is connected to the communicator. Press Rena me to change the names of the profiles. Press Edit to modify the following features of a profile: All alert tones â You can set the incoming call alert an d other alarms to: Ringing â The n ormal alert tone is used. Ascending â The normal alert tone is used, bu t the volume of the tone increases gra dually. Ring once â The alert tone sounds only once. Beep once â A single beep is heard when you r eceive a call or a message. Caller groups â The alert tone will only sound when you receive a call from a member of the selected ca lle r group. See below . Silent â All the sounds, e xcept the alarm clock, are turned off. Whatever the chosen setting, an incoming call is always indicated by a note. Ringing volume â Adjusts the rin ging volume: 1 is the lowest, 5 the highest. Ringing tone â Determines th e ringing tone. To compose your own ringing tones, see âÂÂComposerâ on page 141, and to record a ringing tone with the Digital voice recor der , see âÂÂVoice recorderâ on page 144. Communicator key click â Sets the com municator keyboard sou nd to Of f , Typ e 1 or Ty pe 2 . Phone key click â Adjusts the phone keypad sound: 1 is the l owest, 3 the highest, Off turns off the keypad sound. Divert all voice calls â Y ou can divert all your incom in g voice calls t o another phone number . T he option Default diverts uses the diverts set in the N etwork settings. See be low . Phone lights â The phone display and keypad lights are either permanently on, or they re main on for the pre-set time period. Available in the car profile on ly . Automatic answer â All calls are automatically answered. Available in the car profile only . Caller groups â Set one or several contact groups to Ye s , an d only those calls that come from people belonging to these groups, alert. All the oth er sounds
Telephone 67 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. are turned off, which also means that you wonâÂÂt be alerted if you receive an SMS or a fax f rom a member of a caller group. Call sett ings Own nu mber se nding â You can select whether to k eep your phone number hidden from the recipients of your phone calls. Do not use this function unless it has been activated for your SI M card. On â Your number is shown to all th e recipients of your calls. Off â Your number is hidden from all the recipients of your calls. Preset â The value stored in the network is used. Next on â Your n umber is shown to the r ecipient of your next call. Next off â Your number is hidden from the recipient of you r next call. Call cost settings â Y ou can set on the call cost counter and modify its settings. Changing the settings require s the PIN2 code. Audio when cover opened â Determin es whether the handsfree mode is set on automatically af te r you open th e cover . Call timer display â If set to On , the call timer is shown during calls. Automatic redialling â When this function is set on and y ou call a number that is busy or does not answer , the communicator will attempt to call the number until the call is connected. Phone line in use â If your network and SIM card support this feature, you can have two different subscriptions for voice calls . These subscriptions are refe rred t o as Line 1 and Li ne 2. Ea ch line may h ave sep arat e sett ings fo r som e functions. With this setting, you can determine which phone line is currently in use for all outgoing calls. Default call mode â In some ne twork s you ha ve the sa me phone nu mber fo r all your voice, fax and data ca lls. I f you want to receive any calls , you must set your phone to some answering mode. The available modes are V oice , Fa x , Data and V oice/Fax . Network settings The network services may not b e supported by all operators, or you m ay have to subscribe to them. Information about the s tatu s of these ser vice s is stor e d in the network. Therefore, the current settings are not shown until you request the information from the n etwork by pressin g Get status . While the communicator is making a request to the network, a qu ery note is shown on the display . After a successf u l request, the new status now appears in the settings lis t. To cancel all call diverts or barrings, press Canc el call diverts or Cancel ca ll barring s .
Telephone 68 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Voice call di verting â This network service allows you to direct your incoming voice calls to another phone n umber . 1 Choose a dive rt option: Divert all calls â All incoming calls are diverted. Divert when phone is busy â Incoming calls are diverted wh en the phone is busy. Divert when n ot answered â In coming calls are diverted when you do not answer them . Delay allows you to choose th e time period after which the call is diverted. The available time periods are 5 , 10 , 15 , 20 , 25 and 30 seconds. Divert if not reachable â Incoming calls are diverted when the phone is switched off or outside the network service area. 2 Press Ch ang e , and select one of th e followin g options: To â Enter the number to which you w ant to divert the calls. To voice mailbox â Calls will be diver te d to your voice mailbox. The ph one number of the voice mailbox must be s e t in Other settin gs. Off â Calls are n ot diver ted. Voice call barring â This network service enables you to restrict outgoing and incoming voice calls. If you take the call ba rr ing into use or change the barring settings, you will need the barring password, which you obtain from the network operator . The available options a re: All outgoing calls â Calls cannot be made. All international cal ls â Calls cannot be m a de to foreign cou ntries. International except home country â Calls can be made only within the current country a nd to your home country, i.e. the country wher e your network operator is located. All incoming calls â Calls cannot be received. Incoming calls when abroad â C alls cannot be received when you are outside your home country. Note: If you have subscribed to the Alternate phone line service, this setting applies only to th e selected phone line. Note: W h e n s e c u r i t y f e a t u r e s w h i c h r e s t r i c t calls are in use (call barring, call diverting), calls may be possible to certain emergency numbe rs in s ome networ ks (e.g. 112 o r other official emergency n umber).
Telephone 69 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Call waiting â When this network service is set on, the network will notify you of a new incoming voice call while you have an active call. Y ou will hear a sound and see th e callerâÂÂs name or phone number , and the tex t W AITING on the display . Other settings V oice mailbox nu mber â Set a new or change the phone number of your voice mailbox. You can call your voice mailbox by pressing Voice mailbo x in the Telephone main view . Individual ringing tones â You can set the individual ringing tones function on or off. See âÂÂT o make contact cardsâ on page 5 1. Flight profile The flight profile prevents you from accidentally turning on your phone in an aircra ft. To set on the fl ight profile 1 Press Set ti ngs in the Telephone main view . 2 Choose Profiles and press Change . 3 Scroll to Profile in use , press Change and select Flight . 4 Press OK . With the flight pr ofile active, you m ay read previously downloaded mail, wr ite mail, notes, short messages, faxes, or update your calendar . Once you have left the aircraft, you can turn off th e flight profile by pressing Ex it pr ofile , turn on the phone by pressing , and your short m essages, faxes and mail will be sent automatically. When the communicator is in th e flight profile, emergency calls must be made from the phone: 1 Press . The phone displa y will read FLIGHT PROFILE ACTIVE. 2 While the FLIGHT PROFILE ACTIVE text is visible (for approximately five seconds) you can dial t h e emergency number, e .g. 112. 3 Press . Note: Your network operator may be able to update your voice mailbox number via a specia l SMS m essage. Contact your network operator fo r details.
Telephone 70 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. IMPORTANT ! Never use th e phone wh en in an ai rcraft. If the aircraft personnel allow use of the communicator interface, you MUST activate the flight profile. The flight profile will allow u se of the communicator interface only and will pr event use of th e phone. Be aware that all communications applications, Te l ephone, Fax, SMS, Mail, and Intern et, require use of the phone. Figure 5
Fax 71 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 7. Fax Fax is started by pressing the Fax application button on the communicator keyboard. To send an d r eceive faxes, the phone must be on; the network you are using must support fax calls; and the fax serv ice must be activated for your SIM card. Contact your home s e rvice provider for details. When a fax is being sent or received, the FAX indicator appears in the indicator row of the displa y. The Fax main view shows: Own texts folder â Contains all created faxes, short messages, memos, notes and mail stored on the communicator . Received faxes folder â Contains all recei ved faxes. Document outbox â See âÂÂDocument featuresâ on page 34. To send faxes To wri te a new fax 1 Press Write fax i n the Fax main view. 2 Writ e the fax. 3 Press Re c ipient . T he Fax directory open s. To send your own text as a fax 1 Select the Own texts folder in the Fax ma in view and press Open . 2 Select a document and press Open . 3 Press Re c ipient to access the Fax directory. To forward a receive d fax 1 Select the Received faxes folder in the Fax m ain view and press Op en . 2 Select a fax and press Open . 3 Press Forward to access the Fax directory. Note: Voice calls cannot be made or receive d when a fax is being sent or received.
Fax 72 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To select a recipient 1 Select a contact in the Fax directory and press Select . See figur e 1. The names of contacts who h ave no fax number are dimmed and cannot be selected. 2 If the selected con tact has several fax numbers, a pop-up box opens. Choose a number from th e list and press Select . If there is no contact card in the Contacts directory for the recipient to whom you are sending the fax, pre ss Enter numbe r to enter the fax n umber manually , or obtain the information from the Recent num be rs list by pr e ssing Recent numbers . The list contai ns the fax numbers with wh ich you have recently had contact. Choose a number and press Select . Fax cover page an d send options The fax cover page con tains three fields, see f igure 2. You can edit the entries in all the cover page fie lds. The From f i eld is always filled automati cally according to the U ser data card in t he System appli cation. See âÂÂU ser dataâ on page 1 30. To adjust the fax sending options, press Send options . The send options are: Cover page , Send re solution , Logo file , Signature file , Begi n sending , Resen d , and ECM . For more information, see âÂÂF ax settin gsâ on page 74. To ch ange an option, select it and press Change . Figure 1 Tip: Forward options allows you to select the specific pages you want to send: All , This page , or Pages . Choo se Pages to enter the page numbers, first throu gh last, e.g. 3- 5, that you want to forwa rd. Tip: If you press Clear both li sts in the R ecent numbers view, all in formation in the lists is removed. When you open one of the lists and select a con tact, Creat e card enables you to create a contact card for the contact.
Fax 73 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To send th e fax, pr ess Send . Th e fax is han ded over to the Docu ment ou tbox, which will send the fax as soon as possible. To receiv e faxes Faxes a r e received automatically , provided that th is service is av ailable and that the phone is on and within cellular coverage. All received f axes go to the Received faxes folder. If you do not wish to receive the f ax, close the cover and pr ess . When a new fax has been received, you will hear a tone - unless the system is set to a silent pr ofile - and an information note is shown on the display. To read a received fax There ar e two ways to read a received fax: 1 When you receive a note informing you that you have received a fax, press View . Or, 2 Press Cancel to dismiss the note. You can then open the Receive d faxes folder, wher e unread faxes are marked with . Sel ect the fax and press Open . The fax vie wer opens . Y ou can use the up and down arrow keys to scroll the fax. The left and right arrow keys can be used f or horizontal scrolling. To remove the viewed fax, press Dele te . Figure 2 Note: In case the sen ding fails, be sure to save all your important faxes. Tip: A list of shortcuts for viewing faxes and other operations ca n be found in âÂÂDocument featuresâ on page 34.
Fax 74 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To zoom th e vi ewed fax 1 Press View . A new set of commands becom es available. See figure 3. 2 Each press of Zoom in enlarges the document on the display. The fax can be scrolled horizontally with the left and r ight arrow keys. Each press of Zoom out reduces th e image. Each press of Rotate rotates the fax 90 degrees clockwise with each press of the command button. To return to the previous commands, press Back . To print th e viewed fax 1 Press the Menu button. 2 Select Pr int . Fax settings Press Sett i ngs in the Fax main view to change th e settings of all your faxes. Cover page â Provides you with th e following opti ons: Header â Th e cover page contents will be attached to the beginning of the first fax pag e. Figure 3 Tip: You can also use the Zoom button to magnify the fax on th e display. Tip: You can transf er receive d faxes to a PC with the PC Suite pr ogram. Please note, however , that these faxes will be converted to the TIFF format. To view all the pages of a fax on a PC, use a graphics program (e.g. Windows Imaging).
Fax 75 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Separate page â Only the cover page contents are s h own on the first page of the fax. None â No cover page inform ation will be attached to the fax. The first page of the document will be the first page of the fax. Begin sending â Lets you c hoose w hen the fa x is sent: Immediately â The fax is sent righ t away. At [time] â You can determine the time when the f ax is sent. Use the time format hh:m m . This option enables you to take adva ntage of cheaper calling times. Re ceive r eso lutio n: Standard â The fax will be r eceived using 200 (width) x 100 (height) dots per inch (dpi) resolution. Fine â (200 x 200 dpi). Receiving faxes with fine resolution will take longer and requires approximately twice as much memory as w ith standard resolution. Send resolution: Standard â 200 x 100 dpi. Fine â (200 x 200 dpi). Sending faxes with fine resolution takes longer and temporarily requires more free memory than when using standard resolution. Logo file â Enables you to add for example the logo of your company to the fax cover page. The logo file must fir st be stored in the GIF or JPEG format in the Downloaded files folder . The logo is not shown on the display . No image â No logo is attach e d to the fax. [File name] â All the available files in the Downloaded files folde r are listed in the pop-up box. Select the one you wan t to attach to the fax. Signature file â Allows you to add your signature to the fax cover page. The signature file must first be stored in GIF or JPEG format in the Downloaded files folder . The signature is placed under the Remarks field, but not shown on the display . No image â No signature is at tached to the fax. [File name] â All the available files in the Downloaded files folde r are listed in the pop-up box. Select the one you wan t to attach to the fax. Fax call barring â This network service allows you to place restrictions on outgoing and incoming fa x es. Fax call diverting â T h is network s e rvice allows you to divert incoming faxes to another fax machine. For more information and instructions on how to change diverting and ba r ring settings, see âÂÂT elephone settingsâ on page 65.
Fax 76 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Rese nd â Allows you to choose which pages will be sent again if the fax sending has failed an d the Document outbox tries to send the fax again. All pages â All pages are r esent. Missed pages â Only the pages which were not sent completely are resent. ECM â When the Error Correction Mode is On , any pages containing errors are automatically received again, until th e defects are corrected. Fax polling â Some networks provide th i s service which allows you to make a fax call to a fax machine, then receive information by fax. Contact your network service provider for further details. Alternate fax receiving â As a default, this setting must be set to As f a x . If your network requires you to receive alternate voice/fax calls, you must set this to As voice/fax . This setting applies also to the Fax modem application . Note: When you se t Fax polling to On , Fax polling becomes one of the commands in the Fax main view.
Short messages 77 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 8. Short messages The Short Messages application is started by pressing the SMS applicat i on button on the keyboard. The Short Message Service (SMS) enables you to send and receive short text messages of up to 16 0 characters over the digital ce llular network. If the message is longer , it will be sent as several short messages. To send an d receive short messages, the Short Message Service must be supported by the network you are u sing and activated for your SIM card; the SMS mess age centre numb e r must be stored in the se ttings of the SMS application; and the phone must be on. Contact your home service provider for d etai ls. SMS messages can be sent or r eceived even during a voice or data call. Messages can be read in any wireless phone that has the capability . I f the receiving phone is off at the time of sending, the SMS message centre continues to attempt to send th e message until the validity period allowed by the network expires . The SMS main view shows the f ol lowing folders: Own texts â Texts that you h ave written. Received messages â Messages that you have received. Standard messages â Predefined message templates. Business cards â All contact cards in the C ontacts directory . Info messa ges â Informative me ssages sent by the network. Delivery reports â Information about th e status of sent messages. Document outbox â See âÂÂDocument featuresâ on page 34. Figure 1
Short messages 78 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To send sho rt messages To writ e a new short mess age 1 Press Write message in the SMS main view to open the short message editor, which resembles a postcard. A ch aracter counter showing how many characters you have typed and in how many messages they will be sent appears at the top of th e postcard, see figure 1. 2 Write the me ssage. 3 When the message is ready to be sent, press Rec ipie nt . T he SMS directory opens. To send a prev iously written document 1 Select the Own texts folder and pr ess Open . 2 Select a document and press Open . When you ope n a tex t cont ainin g formatting, you will be asked whether you wish to make a copy of the text (press Copy ), or edit the original text (press Edit ). Editing will lose the formatting of the original text. 3 When the message is ready to be sent, press Rec ipie nt . T he SMS directory opens. To select a recipient There are three ways to select a recipient for your short message: 1 Select a contact in th e SMS directory, and press Select . Or , 2 Press Enter number and enter the phone number manually. Or, 3 Press R ecent numbers to get a list of recent short message numbers, open one of the lists, select a contact, and press Select . Figure 2 Note: You can only send short messages to wireless phon e numbers stored in the Tel(G SM) field of contact cards.
Short messages 79 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. If you want to a dd more recipients to the message, press Ad d r ecip ient . If you want to select the recipients from your SIM card, press th e Men u button, select SIM card mem ory , and choose the recipien ts. To send the mess age 1 If necessary, adjust th e sending options for the current message by pressing Send options . Press Change to set a new value for the curr e nt message. The send options, Reply via same centre , Validity period , Message centr e in use , Message conversion and Requ est delivery report , are t he same as in the SMS settings, see âÂÂSMS settingsâ on page 82. 2 Press Send . If you r mes sage is l onger than 160 char acte rs, it wil l be sent as several short messages , provided that you r network s u pports this feature. To receiv e messages Short messages ar e received automatically , provided that this service is available and that the phone is on and within network coverage. A received short message can be a normal short message, business card or a service card. All received short messages go to the Received messages folder . When a new short message has arrived, a tone will s ou nd â unless the device is set to a silent profil e â and an information note is shown on the display . When you open a received m essage, the stamp on the right half of the message is postmarked, and the time and date the message was sent are shown below the senderâÂÂs name or number . To read a message There ar e two ways to read a received me ssage: 1 When you receive a note informing you of a received short messa ge , press View to read the message. Or , 2 Press Cancel to dismiss the note. You can then open the Received messages folder where unread received messages a re marked with Tip: If you p ress Clear both li sts in the R ecent numbers view, all in formation in the lists is removed. When you open one of the lists and select a con tact, Creat e card enables you to create a contact card for the contact. Tip: T o send the message t o sever al recipients, use multiselection, see âÂÂTo select several itemsâ on page 33, or create a contact group, see âÂÂContact groupsâ on page 55.
Short messages 80 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. and unread received business cards with . Select the message and press Open . To reply to a recei ved message 1 Select the Received messages folder and pr ess Open . 2 Open the selected document and press Reply . The conten ts of the received message ar e not included in the new message automat ically. If you wa nt to include them, press the Menu button and choose the Re ply (include text) option. 3 Write the me ssage and press Send . To forw ard a receiv ed message 1 Select the Received messages folder and pr ess Open . 2 Open the selected docu ment, press Forward . The con tents of the r eceived message are inclu ded in the new message. 3 Press Re cipi ent an d select a recipient f rom the SMS directory. 4 To send th e mess age, press Send . To use the Menu button When you press the Menu button in an opened received message, you can also use the following options: Find number â If the me ssage con tains p hone num bers, pr ess Next n umb er to toggle between these numbers and to s e lect one of them. Press Cal l to make a phone call to the number . Reply (include text) - Replies to a SM S message and includes the recei ved SMS in your reply . Find URL â If the message contains URL addresses, press Next URL to toggle between these addresses and to select on e of them. Press Fetch to start the WWW application and to open a connection to the selected address. Print â Prints the message. Servi ce card s A DTMF ser vice provider may send DTM F sequ ences to its subscribers in the form of a service card that can be stored in the Contacts directory . For more information on DTMF tones, see âÂÂTo send DTMF tonesâ on page 152. Standard messages Y ou can store frequently used short messages as standard messages, an d sen d them instead of writing a new message every time. Standard mess ages are stored in the Standard me ssages folder . To write a new standard mess age, open the Standard messages folder an d press Write mes sag e . The commands in a new standard message are:
Short messages 81 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Reci pient â Opens the SMS di rectory . Delet e â Removes the stan dard message from the Standard m e ssages list. Close â Returns to the Standard me ssages folder . Business cards A business card is a special short message containing personal infor mation about a contact, just like a normal business card. Y ou can send your own business card or any contact card as a business car d. Business cards sen t f rom a device that s u pports the Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator contact card format can be saved directly as new contact cards in the Contacts directory . Ju st open the received bu siness car d and press Cre ate card . To send a contact card as a business card 1 Open the Business cards folder. 2 Select a business card and press Open . 3 Press Opt ions to define which fields to i nclude in the business card. Change toggles the fields on or off. If you are sending the bu siness card to a Nokia 9000 Communicator, Nokia 900 0 i Communicator, or a wireless phone, select Com pact . This makes the business card to a compatible format. When sending the business c ar d to another N okia 9110 Comm unica tor, s ele ct Generi c . 4 Press Recipi ent to select a recipien t for the business card. Or, if you want to send the business card to another communicator via the infrared link, press Transfer via IR (be sure to activate the Infrar ed activation application in the receiving com m unicator). 5 Press Send . Figure 3 Tip: When you have received a business ca rd, press Reply to send your own business card to the s ender .
Short messages 82 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. SMS settings Press Settings in the SMS application main view to change the settings. The setting s you define he re are used un til you chan ge them again . Message centre settings â In order to be able to sen d short messages, you must have stored the number of the message centre in this setting and selected which message centre you w ant to use in Message centre in use . Yo u can add new or edit existing m e ssage centre numbers in Message centres . Reply via same centre: Yes / No â This network service allows the r ecipient of your short message to reply u sing your short message centre. By settin g this option to Ye s , you allow the recipient to reply to your message, even if the recipient does not subscribe to the Short Message Service, provided th at the recipient has the means to type a reply message. Validity period: 1 h / 6 h / 24 h / One we ek / Maximum â I f the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the set validity period, the message is removed from the message centre. If Maxi mum is chosen, the validity period is set to the maximum value allowed by the message centre. N ote that the network must support this f eature. Message conversion: None (sent as a normal s h ort mess age) / Fax / X .400 / Pagin g / E-mail / ERMES / Spee ch (message synthesis e d from a short me ssage) â In order to receive a converted message, the r ecipient must have an appropriate device available, and the network must support this feature. For example, if you choose Fa x , the recipient must have a telefax machine or similar device connected to the number . Request delivery report: Yes/No/Sho w im mediately â When this network service is set to Yes , the status of the sent message ( Delivered, P ending, Failed ) is shown in the Delivery reports folder . When set to Show immediately , you will receive a n ote when the message has been delivered to the recipient. Send long messages: Y es/No â If set to No , messages that are l onger than 160 characters are sent as several SMS mes sages. If set to Ye s , mess ages that are longer than 160 characters are sent as several messages, but if the recipien t Note: Sending a busin e ss card with an attached picture makes the message very long a nd may be expensive. Note: Th e message centre nu mber may be included in some SIM cards. If you use several SIM cards in your communicator, make sure that this setting contains the appropriate message centre nu m ber.
Short messages 83 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. has a Nok ia 91 1 0 Co mmunic ator or a Nokia 9000 i Comm unicato r , the messages are received as one long message. Receive info messages: Yes/No/View index â If your network supports this feature, it wi ll send you information abou t various topics. If you choose Vie w index , the network will send you a li st of topics, and you can select th ose topics on which you wish to receive information. Info service mode: Display and save/ Display only/Save only â If this is set to Display and save , messages are di splayed and saved in t h e Info messages folder . If you select Save only , info messages are not displayed but saved in the folder . If you select Display only , messages are displayed but not saved. Info service language â Y ou can select in which languages you want to receive info messages. Select either All , or a maximum of four languages. Info service topics â Message topics vary acc or ding to the operator . You can define here what type of messages you want to receive. For more information about the Info service, contact your service provider .
Short messages 84 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Internet 85 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 9. Internet To obtain access to th e Internet, the cellular network you use must support data calls; the data service must be activated for your SIM card; you must have obtained an Internet Access Point (IAP) f rom an Internet service provider; and you m u st have entered th e proper Internet settings. Y our service pr ovider will give you instructions on h ow to configure the Internet settings. Follow the instructions caref u lly . To start an Internet application 1 Press the Internet application button on the communicator keyboard. 2 Select an application with th e selection frame and press Se lect . 3 To close an application, press Close . 4 To disconnect f rom the Internet , press Hang up . The âÂÂD isconne ctingâ not e will be shown on t h e display and the data call will end. Inte rnet a pplic ati ons Mail â An electronic mail app lication which lets you send and receive e- mail all over the wor ld using the Inte rnet. World Wide Web (W W W) â A hypertext-based system for finding and accessing resources on the Internet. Telnet â Allows your communicator to connect to computers that provide terminal services th rough the Internet. Terminal â A ll ows your c om municator to c on nect to computers, s u ch as mainframe computers, that provide dir e ct dial-in terminal services. Both Telnet and Terminal emula te the VT100 termina l. Text Web â Used for obtaining inform ation from the Inte rnet via SMS. Tip: With one Internet application active, you can quickly switch to another by pressing the Internet application button. In th is way yo u do not hav e to make a ne w data call. Note: Depending on the network configuration and load, esta blish ing an Internet connection may take up to one minute or even longer.
Internet 86 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To set up your Inte r net access point If you do not already have an internet access point (IAP) or you want a new one, this ser vice provide s you a convenie nt way to set up th e internet conn ection. Before being able to use the In ternet services, you need to configure an Internet connection. You can subscribe to the Internet services of selected providers in your cou ntry directly with your Nokia 91 1 0 Com municator , provided that the data service is activated for your SIM card. See the instructions below . 1 Open the WWW application. 2 Select the bookmark "Internet setup" and press Go . 3 Select your home country in th e list w ith the arrow k e ys and press Go . 4 Confirm the operation by pressing Acce pt . 5 Select the hy perlink to the Internet service providers and press Go . Y ou will be connected to the WWW site where you can select your preferred service provider. The connection is established via a data call. 6 When the con nection h as been made, f ollow t he instruct ions on th e displ ay to select a servi ce provide r and to subscribe to their Inter net servic es. Internet settings Information concerning the settings must be obtained f rom your Internet service provider . The service pr ovider may be able to configure the access point for you via a spec i al SMS message, or a WWW page, which sets all the necessary In ternet access settings. To define the Internet settings manually , press Settings in the main view of the Internet application. To define an Intern et access point 1 In the Internet s ettings main view choos e Inter net ac ces s and press Chan ge . 2 To define a new Internet access point, press New . To modify or chan ge an existing IAP, press Edit . Tip: There is a glossary of Internet terms and abbreviations at the back of this manual. Note: The Internet settings apply to Mail, WW W and Telnet.
Internet 87 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. The Intern et settings are: Modem initialisation â Enables you to define the modem settings of your communicator: Autobauding â The data transmission rate is determined automatically. Most networks support this option. Fixed 9600 b/s â A fixed data transmission rate is used. I f you have problems with making a data call, try this option. Fix ed 1440 0 b/s â Can be used if supported by th e network. Do not use this option, unless you are sure your n etw ork supports it. Cust om â When a data call is establishe d, the modem is initialised accor ding to the str ing you en ter here. Autodisconnect time: None/2/5/10 minutes â The connection to the In ternet will automatically close after th e inactivity period defined h ere. V.42bis compression: On/Off â Speeds up data transfer , e.g. sending or receiving mail, when supported by the cellu lar network. Set this to Off , unless you are sure your n e twork supports th is option. Data call barring â Y ou can restrict your data calls in the sam e way as your voice calls, see âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 6 5 . To see the current barring mode, press Ge t sta tus . To cancel all barrings, press Can cel data barring s . Intern et access â Lists th e de fined Internet access points. Y ou can configure the communicator differently for each Internet access poin t. Press Ed it to change the settings of an existing access point. Press New to define a new access point. Pres s Delet e to remove an ac cess point. Provider name â The name of the Intern et service provider. If you define the access point manually, th e name can be edited freely. Figure 1 Note: Th e exact values of the settings are provided by you r Internet service provider.
Internet 88 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Phone number â Th e telephone number of the Internet access point. User name â Enter your us er name if r equired by the Intern et service provider. The user n ame may be neede d in the PPP authentication process. Promp t pass word: Yes / No â If you must enter a new password e very time you log on to a se rver, or you do not want to sa ve your pass word, set th is to Yes . Password â Enter your password if required by the Internet service provider. The password may be needed in the PPP a u thentication process. Advanced settings â Opens a new set of options with which you can further adjust the Internet access point, if r e quired: Modem initialisation â Enter any modem in itialisation string containing AT commands here, if needed. This initialisation string is executed after the initialisation string you define in the Modem initialisation: Custom option of the Internet settings. Login customisation: N one/Man ual â Some Internet access points do not automatically enable PPP. In such cases you need to choos e either Manual , as it allows you to enter your login na me and password manually in a terminal connection, or press New in the pop-up box, to write and save a n e w login script. If you choose None , your password and user name are automatically taken from the Intern et access point settings. For more information on login scripts, see the scripts.txt file on the diskette supplied with th e communicator. PPP compression: On/Off â Speeds up data transfer when supported by the remote PPP server. If you have problem s with establishing a connection, try setting this to Off . IP address â The IP addr ess of the com munic ator. Default gateway â The IP address of the system that is a gateway out of the local network. Netw ork m ask â Shows which portion of the IP address of the communicator identifies the network. Primary nameserver â The IP address of the primary nameserver. Secondary nameserver â T he IP address of the secondary nameserver. Tip: Some Internet service providers refer to these nameservers as DNS1 and DNS2.
Internet 89 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Mail The Nokia 9 1 1 0 Com municator mail system is compliant with the Internet standards SMT P , IMAP4, POP3, MIME1 and MIM E 2. Mail is started in th e Internet main view by selecting Mail an d pressing the Select command bu tton. The Mail main view shows the following folders: Own tex ts â Contains the documents you have written with the communicator . The documents may contain f ormatted text, but the text will appear in the editor without formatting. Received mail â Contains mail fetched from the Remote mailbox. See âÂÂTo fetch mailâ on page 94. Docume n t outbo x â The outgoing comm unications manager of the commun icator . Remote mailbox â You r electronic mailbox service which receives all your mail. This service may be offered by a network operator , your com pany , or an Internet service provider . The required mailbox and Internet access point settings are described in âÂÂMail setting sâ on page 89. Mail settings Be sure to define your Internet access point as described in âÂÂInternet settingsâ on page 86. To define the mail s ettings 1 Press Set ti ngs in th e Mail main view. 2 Select the item you want to change, and press Change . Show header fields â The term header f ield refers to the in formation given at the top of an e-ma il message. This settin g control s which hea d er fields within the received message will be shown when the m e ssage is opened: None â Shows no h eader fields, although the sender and the subject of the message are still shown in the name of the message. Bas ic â Shows the Date , From , To an d Subject fields. All â Shows all po ssible fields. Figure 2
Internet 90 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Editor and viewer font: URW Mono / URW Roman / U RW Sans â Determines the font u sed in the m ail editor and view er . Remote mailbox in use â Determines the mailbox to which the connection is ma de. Remote mailboxes â Pres s Change to open the Rem ote mailboxes view , where you can add new mailboxes, and edit and remove existing ones. When you press New or Edit in the Re mote mailboxes view , the f ollowing options become available: Remote mailbox name â Enter the name of the remote mailbox. The name can be enter ed freely. Internet access â Select which Internet access point you want to use for connecting to this mailbox. Sending settings â Press Change to define the settings of the mail messages you send from this mailbox. The settings are: Own mail address â You must enter the e- mail address given to you by your Internet service provider. The address must contain the @ character. Replies to your m essages will be sent to this address. Sending host â The IP address or host name of the computer that sends your Internet mail. Send mail: I mmediately / Upon request / During next conn ection â Choose Immediately to send mail automatically; Upon request if you want to write several mail messages and send them at your convenience; or During next conn ection if you want your ma il sent the next time you make a connection to the Internet access point that your mailbox uses. See âÂÂTo send mailâ on page 92. Copy to own mail address: Yes / No â If set to Yes , a copy of the mail will be automatically sent to the address defined in O wn mail addre ss . MIME character enc oding: On / Off â Allows anothe r MIME-compliant mail syste m to read the character set used in yo ur communic ator. Only when text containing spe c ial cha racters, e.g. á, ä, ÃÂ, is sent to a non- MIME-compli ant mail system, sh ould the MIME ch aracter encodi ng be turned off. When the MIME character en coding is o ff, special c haracters are automatically converted to ASC II characters: á become s a and so on. Signature file â Allows you to add your signature to the m ail message. The signature file must first be stored as a text file in the Own texts folder, where it is then selected. Note: E-mail addresses cannot contai n accented characte rs, such as é or ä.
Internet 91 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Receiving settings â Pr ess Change to define th e settings of th e mail messages you receive to this mailbox. Y our remote mailbox service provider will supply you with th e r equired information. The settin gs are: User nam e and Password â These may be requir ed to connect to the server and to open your m ailbox. The password characters appear as asterisks (*) on the display. The user name and p assword store d here wil l automatically be offered to the server. I f you enter your us er name and password in correctly, you will be prompted to enter them again w hen you conn ect to the Remote mailbox. If you enter your user name and password incorrectly three times, the connection to the Remote mailbox will end. For information on how to change the password, contact your remote mailbox service provider. Receiving host â Th e IP address or host name of the computer that receives your e-mail. Folder â INBOX is the default folder for your incoming mail. Do not change this setting without consulting your remote mailbox service provider. This setting is only available when the mail protocol is IMAP4. Protocol: IMAP4 / PO P3 â Choose the mail protocol your remote mailbox service provider recommends. Fetch he aders: Al l / Recen t â Determin es whether all mail or just the mail received sin ce the l ast connect ion will be shown in the Remot e mailbox. It is possib le to have old or u nread mail in the Remote ma ilbox. Fetch attachments: Yes / No â Determines whether possibl e mail attachments are fetched or not. This option is on ly available if the mail protocol is IMAP4. Note that text attachments are always fetched. Delete fetched: Yes / No â De termines whether fetched mail will be automatically removed from the Remote mailbox. All fetched mail goes to the Received mail folder. Timed fetching settings â With th is setting you can set your communicator to fetch mail automatically. Timed f etchin g: On/Off â Determines whether the timed fetch i ng function is in use or not. Start at: Date an d Tim e â You can specify th e date and tim e when the communicator starts to fetch your mail. Use the date and time formats specified in the System settings. Time limit: None/5 /10/30/6 0 min â You can set th e time limit for the fetching operation. This way your communicator wil l not fetch too large messages, which would take too much time.
Internet 92 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Frequency: None/ Daily/ Weekly/ Working days/ Every oth er week/ Monthl y â De termines how often mail is f e tched. Size limit: None/5/10/50/ 100/250 kB â You can set the size limit for the mail to be fetch ed. This w ay your com municat or wil l not fetch too larg e messages, which would take too much time and occupy too much memory. To send mail To writ e new mail 1 Press Write mail in the Mail m a in view. An empty ma il editor opens. 2 Write the message. You can change th e font within the Mail s e ttings. 3 When the messa ge is ready to be sent, pre ss Recipi ent . The Mail dir ectory opens. To send pre viously written documents 1 Select the Own texts folder in the Mail main view a n d press Open . 2 Select a document and press Open . If the docum ent contains text formattings, you will be asked if you want to edit the original and lose all formattings, or create a copy in the Ow n texts folder and edit the copy instead. 3 When the document is ready to be sent, press Recipient to open the Mail directory. To select a recipient There are two ways to sele ct a recipient for your mail message: 1 Select the contact(s) in the Mail directory with the selection frame an d press Select . If a contact has s everal mail addresses, a pop-up box opens, listing the available m ail addresses. Select an address and press Select . Or, 2 Enter the recipientâÂÂs address manually by pressing Ent er address . Remember that the mail address must contain the @ character, and that the address ca nnot contain accented characters . The Mail envelope opens whenever you are about to send mail, see figure 3. All the field e ntries are editable. Figure 3
Internet 93 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To add addr esses to the To or C c fields of the Mail e n velo pe 1 Select whether to add a new recipient to the To or the Cc field by scrolling to the appropriate field. 2 Press Add reci pient . 3 Select the recipie nts as described above. To determine ho w the current mail messag e will be sent Press the Menu button in the mail envelope and select Sen d options . To change a setting, pre ss Change . The possible options are: Send mail: Immediately/ Upon request/ During next connection Copy to own mail address: Y e s / No MIME character encoding: On/ Off For more information, see âÂÂMail settin gsâ on page 89. To sen d ma il upon requ est When you have se ve ral mail messages to send, you ma y want to use the Upon reques t option. This way you may send all your mail during the same data call. 1 Write your m ail, select the reci pient, press the Menu bu tton and select Send options . 2 Select the Send mail: Upon request option and then press Send to send the mail. 3 Go to the Document ou tbox and press Op en . 4 Press Start t o send your mail. Y ou can also select the During next conne ction option, with which your mail will be sent automatically the next time you make a connection to th e Internet access point your Remote mailbox uses. To add attachments to the messag e 1 Press Att ac hments . 2 A list of attachments opens. T o add documents to the list, press Add . 3 Select the document(s) from the Ow n texts and Dow nloaded files folders and press Select . 4 When all the desired attachments are in the list, pr ess Clos e . 5 To send the messa ge, press Send . Note: Multiple addresses in the To and Cc fields must be separated by a comma.
Internet 94 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To fetch mail E-mail addressed to you is not automatically received by your communicator , but by a Remote mailbox, see figure 4. This is to let you determ ine which messages you want to r ead and when. To read you r mail, you must first connect to your Remote mailbox and th en select the messages you wish to fetch onto your communicator . Connection to the Remote m ailbox is established via a data call. If your Remote mailbox server is ca pable of sending you special short messages, you will hear a ton e - unless th e system is s e t to a s ile nt profile - and see a note when new mail arrives in your Remote mailbox. The message may also contain information about the mail message, in which case you can either fetch or remove the mail by pressing Fetch or De lete in this SMS message. To connect to t he Remote mailbo x The Mail and Internet access poin t settings must be configured correctly . Read âÂÂMail settingsâ on page 89, and follow the instructions given by your Remote mailbox and I nternet service providers. 1 Move the selection frame in the Mail main view over the Remote mailbox and press Connect . Unread messages in the Remote mailbox are marked with , unread messages with a ttachments with and deleted messages with . To fetch all new mail 1 Once you have connected to th e Remote mai lbox, press Fetch new . 2 All mail with the icon is fetched to the Received mail folder . 3 After all new mail has been fetched, connection to the Remote mailbox is closed and the Received mail folder opens. To fetch a selected mes sage 1 Select the mail message(s) you want to fetch and press Fetch selected . 2 After the mail has been fetched, the Remote mailbox view returns. Figure 4
Internet 95 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To remove a mail message 1 Set the Delete fetched setting to Yes in the Mail settin gs. All fetched messages are removed from the Re mote mailbox. Or, 2 Select the message(s) you wan t to remove with the selection frame, and press De lete . If you want to canc el the removi ng, pre ss Un del ete . The messages will be removed when you exit the Remote mailbox. However , all fetched messages will be retained in the Received mail folder . To use the Menu button If you press the Menu button in the Remote mailbox, the following options become available: Change folder â Opens another mail folder . Create folder â Creates a new folder . Copy â Copies th e selected mail message(s) to another folder. Move â Moves the selected mail message(s) to another folder . Remove folder â Removes th e selected fol der and its con ten ts and s u bfolders. Rename folder â Gives the folder a new name. Off-line â Ends the data call. On-line â Re-establishes th e data call. To di sco nnec t from th e Remo te m ailbo x 1 Press Hang up . 2 If you have m essages marked as deleted, you will be prompted to confirm the deletion . 3 The connection to the Rem ote mailbox closes, and the Mail application main view returns to the display. If you have fetched messa ge s, the Received mail folder opens on the display. To read mail Mail that you fetch from your Remote m ailbox is stored in the Received mail fold er . To read a mail message 1 Select the Received mail folder in the Mail main view and press Open . Mail messages that have not yet been opened in th e communicator are marked with . 2 Select the message, and pr ess Ope n . When you open a r eceived mail, the followin g commands become available: Attachments â Lists all MIME attachments: text, image, audio, video or application. If the message does not contain any attachments, this command
Internet 96 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. is dimmed. When viewing the list of atta ch ments, you may select a n attachment and choose fro m the following options: View â Opens the attachment if there is e nough memory and if the message can be opened in the communic ator . Save â Saves the attachment in the Downloaded files f older. Close â Returns you to the previous screen. Delet e â Removes the open mail message. Close â Retu rns you to th e Received mail folder . To use the Menu button If you press the Menu button in an opened mail message, the followin g options become available: Reply (include text) â Replie s to a mail message and includes the received mail in your reply . If the received mai l message is a MIME document, only the first text part is copied to th e message an d may be edited. Attachments cannot be included in the reply message Reply â Replies to a mail message without including the received mail in your reply . Reply all (include text) â Replies to all the persons who received the mail and includes the received mail in your reply . Reply all â Replies to all the persons who received th e mail without including the received ma il in your reply . Forward â Forwards the received mail and the possible mail attachments. Find URL â This option searches for a U RL address in the message. If there is a URL, you can open a con nection to the selected address by pressing Fetch . Hierarchical structure â Shows the hierarchical structure of the mail message. Print â Prints the message. Scroll to any of th ese and press Select . Figure 5
Internet 97 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. World Wide Web The Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator supports H T ML 3.2, with the exception of some features. SSL, the security protocol, is also supported. See âÂÂGlossaryâ on page 177. SSL provides export grade en cryption, which means that it is not secure enough for highly confidential purposes. The WW W browser does not support Java or Java sc ript. To connect to the W orld W ide Web , the Internet service must be activated for your SIM card, and y ou need an account with an Internet service pr ovider . To ope n the W orld Wide Web application, select WWW in the Internet main view , and press Select . To exit the WWW , press Clos e or Hang up in the Bookmarks list, which is th e main view of the application. This ends the data call and closes the WWW application. For information on how to create tailored WWW pages for the Nokia 91 1 0 Communicator , see the documents on the CD-ROM. WWW settings To ch ange the WWW settings: 1 Open the WWW application an d press the Menu button. 2 Select Settings . 3 To change a setting, select it and press Chang e . The WWW setting s are: Autoload images: Y es / No â If set to Yes , the communicator automatically fetches the inline JPEG or G I F images on a WWW page. When set to No , WWW pages are fetched without images and shown much faster . Clear cache on exit: Ye s / N o â Most recently fetched WWW pages are kept in the temporary memory of th e communicator , the â cacheâ . I f set to Ye s , the cache, history list and cookie file ar e automatically emptied af te r you close the WWW application. If set to No , the cache stores as much information as possible. When you restart the WWW application, the m ost recently stored information is fetche d f rom the cach e without making a new data call. Accept all cookies: Y es / No â Determines whether the cookies functionality is enabled. See "Glossary" on page 177. Default access point â Defines the Internet access point used as a default in the WWW application. Proxies â To change the pr ox y settings, press Ch ange . Internet access point â You can select an IAP to be used for this particular WWW page. HTT P pr oxy â The hostname of the HTTP proxy server used with the selected IA P.
Internet 98 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. HTTP proxy port â The prox y port of the proxy server. Security proxy â The proxy that is used with SSL secure connections. Security proxy port â The security proxy port of the proxy server. No proxy for â You may define domains for which the HTTP proxy is n ot needed. Domain names ar e separated with commas, for example nokia.com, edu.fi. You may specify the domains as accurately as you wish. Bookmarks The WWW main view shows the Bookmarks list. When you s e lect a bookmark from the list, the name of the Internet access point used for con n ecting to the bookmark is shown on the top right corner . Th e date when the bookmark was last fetched is shown beside the name of the bookmark. See f igure 6. Below the Bookmarks list is the address field where you can enter the URL address of the WWW page you want to fetch. If you select a bookmark from the list, th e address field shows the URL address of the bookmark. To fetch a WWW page 1 Select an entry in the Bookmarks l ist or enter a U RL in the addr e ss f ield. 2 Press Go . To add a n ew bookmark 1 Press Add , or if you want t o modify an e xisting bookmark, press Edit . 2 Enter the name you want for th e bookmark in the Name field. Figure 6 Tip: To fetch WWW pages stored in the Own texts or Downloaded files f olders of the communicator or the m emory card, use the prefix âÂÂfile:// /â (note: three slashes) instead of âÂÂh ttp://âÂÂ.
Internet 99 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 3 Enter the URL address of the bookmark, e .g. www.nokia.com, in the Address field. To set advanced bookmark proper ties Select Details and press Ch ang e . The advanced settin gs are: User n ame â If a user name is needed to fetch the bookm ark, enter your user name h ere. P assword â If a pass w ord is needed to fetch the bookmark, enter your passw ord here. Internet access selection: Automatic/Manual â If you select Automatic , the current or the default IAP is used for this bookmark. If you set this to Manual , only the IAP defined in the f o llowing setting is used. Internet access â This setting is available only if the previous setting is set to Manua l . You can select which IAP to use for the bookmark. To fetch items with a page already open Y ou can fetch a WWW pa ge even if you h ave a page already open: 1 Press the Menu bu tton and select Bookmarks . A simplified form of the Bookmarks list opens. 2 Select an entry in the Bookmarks list or e nter the URL in the address field. 3 Press Go . To close the Bookmarks list, press Close . To use the Menu button If you press t h e Menu button in th e Bookmarks list, the following options become available: History â Contains a list of browsed documents . T o fetch a page from the list, select the page and press Go . To empty the history lis t and the cache, press Clea r histo ry . Find â Y ou can search for n ames and addresses in the Bookmarks list. Open file â Y ou can open files from the Ow n texts and Downloaded files folders. Move â Y ou can move the selected bookmark fr om one folder to an oth er . Delete â Removes the sele cted bookmark or bookmark folder . Create folder â Creates a new bookmark folder. Import bookmarks â Imports a bookmark file from the Own texts or Downloaded files folder to the Bookmarks list. Export bookmarks â Converts the boo kmark file to the HT ML format a nd saves it to the Own texts folder. Clear cache â Empties all ca ch es and temporar y files. Settings â Opens the WWW settin gs. See âÂÂWWW settingsâ on page 97.
Internet 100 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To make a smart bookmar k A smart bookmark contains a WWW page which your communicator fetches at certain time. These WWW pages can only consist of text or images, and they cannot be SSL secure. 1 Create a new bookmark folde r by pressing the Menu button and selecting Create folder . 2 When the new folder is ready, press Edit . The follow ing options become available: Timed fetching: O n/Off â When this is set to On , a clock symbol appears in the folder, and the WWW pages in the folder are fetched according to the settings defined below. Fetch at â You can define the time and date when the pages are fetched. The date and time formats are set in the System settings. Time limi t: None/5/1 0/30/60 mi n â You can set a time limit for the fetching process. This way the data call will not last too lon g and thus become very expensive. Frequency: None/Daily/Weekly/Working days/Every other wee k/Monhtly â This se tting enab l es fre quent fetch ing of the WWW p ages. Fetch inline images: Yes/No â You can decide whether the inline images in the WWW pages are fetched. Fetch links: Yes/No â If set to Yes , all links to othe r texts and images in the defined WWW pag es are fetched. If set to No , on ly th e WWW pa ges are fet che d. 3 Press Cl ose . 4 Select the page(s) you want to fetch with the selection fram e and press th e Menu b utto n. 5 Select Move and then choose the folder which you just created. T he bookmark(s) will be moved to that folder. Pa ges fetched with the smart bookmarks function a r e stored in a f older cache. To empty the cache, press the Menu button in the smar t boo kmarks view and Figure 7
Internet 101 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. select Empty folder cache . If you select Go , all the items in the folder are fetched in the folder cache. To navigate in WWW 1 Select a bookmark in the Bookmarks list or enter a URL address into the address field and press Go . 2 If the WWW page was alr eady recently fetched, the page is fetch e d from the cache. If not, the page is fetched from the Internet by making a data call to the selected Internet ac ce ss point. 3 Some servers h ave access restriction s that require a va lid user name and password. In t his case, you will be asked t o enter the user name and pa ssword before the WWW page ca n be fetched. The c ommunica tor stores the p asswords and user names that yo u enter to gain acc ess to that domain, and t h e next tim e you connec t to the same dom ain, they will b e offered autom atically. 4 When the WWW page is being fetched, the line on top of the display shows the status of the conn ection, the title of the page, and how many bytes of the page have been r e ceived. When the page is on the display, use the arrow keys to scroll the view and to choose hyperlinks and hotspots. Each arrow key press selects the nearest hyperlink or hotspot, or moves the view on e line up or down. See figure 8. Figure 8 Not e: WWW pages secured with SSL are never stored in the cache. Note: Stored passwords to individual web sites ar e removed when the communicator is rebooted. Tip: To select the ne xt or previous hyperlink on the WWW page, press the Tab key or Shift Tab, r espectively.
Internet 102 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To use th e navigation co mmands After the WWW page has been fetched, the following commands become available: Go â If there is a l ink to another WWW page in t h e currently open page, select the link with the se lection frame and press Go to f etch the page. If the selected item is a button for sending or r esetting a form, Go eith er sends the form or resets it to defa u lt values. Get image â If the selected item is an inline image icon, the first command changes to Get im age with which you can fetch the image. If the image is of an unsupported format, the im age icon looks broken on the display and cannot be selected. Chan ge â If the select ed item is a select ion list, c heck box or radio button, th e first command i s Change . With Cha nge , you can tick t he box or bu tton on and o ff. If you have a form open, Change allows you to attach a file to it. Y ou can select the attachment from the Own texts, Received messages/mail and Downloaded files folders. Press Ope n to open the folder , choose the desired file and press Select . Back â If you have browsed th rough at least two WWW pages, Back allows you to fetch the previous page Forward â If you h ave browsed through at le ast two WWW pages, and viewed the previous page with the Bac k comman d, yo u can fet ch the nex t page by pressing Forward . Close â Returns to the Bookmarks list. Cancel â Int e rrupts the fetch ope ration. To use the Menu button When you have a WWW page open and you press the Menu button, the following options become available: Add bookmark â Adds the current address to th e Bookmarks list. History â Contains a l ist of browsed documents. Find â Y ou can search for various items, such as words in the WWW page. Open f ile â You can open files from the Own texts and Downloaded files folders . Tip: You can copy text on the WWW page by pressing Ctrl-C. You can th en for exa mple open the Notes application, open a new document and paste the copied text into the document by pressing Ctr l- V. You can also print the copied text in the N otes application.
Internet 103 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Bookmarks â Opens the Bookmarks list where you ca n select a new page to be fetc hed. Go off-line â Ends the data call. Reload â Reloads the curr ent WWW page from th e network. Activate automatic update (Ctrl-U) â With this option the ope ned WWW page updates itself continuously in every 10, 30 or 60 seconds. This is very convenient for example when browsing stock exchange W W W pages. Disable automatic update (Ctrl-U) â Stops the continuous updating of the WWW page . Save â Saves the page contents or th e image to the Downloaded files folder , or adds the address of the page to the Bookmarks list. Clear cache â Empties all ca ch es and temporar y files. Settings â Opens the WWW settin gs. See âÂÂWWW settingsâ on page 97. To vi ew ima ges Images that are part of the fetched WWW page ar e called inline images. By default, inline image s are not fetched with the WWW page, but will be displayed as icons, unless the option Autoload images is set to Ye s in the WWW settings. To fetch an image, select the image icon and press Get image . The communicator is capable of fetching images th at are in JPEG or GIF form at. Inline images can also be image maps. An in line image map acts like a hyperlink. A fetched image map con tains a cursor that can be moved with the arrow keys. When you press Go , th e pixel coordinates of the cu rsor are sent to the server , and the cor r esponding WWW page is f e tched. Images that are separate documents and not part of a hypertext document are called external images. When an external image is fetched, it is viewed separately from the hyper text document in the image viewe r . The commands in the extern al image viewer are the sa me as in the fax viewer . Tip: You can also reload a WWW pa ge by pressing Ctrl-R. Note: The continuous updating disables the Autodisconnect time f unction. Therefore, the data call does not go o ff- line, which may make the call expensive.
Internet 104 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To downlo a d add-on software The WWW application can be u sed to install applications and plug-ins on your communicator . If you install plu g- ins, the WWW application activates them when nece ssary . 1 Go to th e WWW page where the add-on software package exists . 2 Select the h yperlink that points to the software package. 3 Press Go to fetch the package. After the software package h as been successfully fetched, the software installation view opens. Press In stall . If there is sufficient memory available, the software will be installed. Terminal The Terminal application is started in the Internet main view by selecting Terminal an d pressing Sele c t . The Terminal application is used to connect directly , not via the Internet, to a r e mote computer by way of a data call. The Terminal main view shows the defined Terminal connections. The T erminal application is similar to the Telnet application, in that both of the m emulate the VT100 terminal display . See figure 10. To connect with a pre-defined Terminal connection, select the connection and press Connect . To create n ew or edit existing connections, press De fine . To change the settings for incoming data calls, press Setti ngs , select the setting and press Chan ge . The available settings are: Local echo for incoming data call â If set to On , cha r acters typed from the communicator keyboard are ech oed locally to the c ommunicator . If set to Off , they are echoed to the remote hos t computer . Caution: Beware of vir uses. Only install on the communicator software you have obtained fr om sources that offe r adequate protection against viruses.
105 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Line end for incoming data call â Def ines which character is generated with the Enter key in incoming data. The alternatives are: Carriage return ( CR ), Linefeed ( LF ), and Carriage return - Linefeed ( CR/L F ) To define Te rminal connections After you have pr esse d Defin e in the Terminal main view , the defined Terminal connections are shown. To rem ove the selected connection, press De lete . To edit existing connections, press Edi t , or press New to define new Terminal connections. The following settings become a vailable: Conn ection nam e â Write the name of the connection . The name can be defined freely . Phone number â The phone n umber for accessing the service. T he phone number may include spaces a nd hyphens. Data bits: 7/8 â Service/host-specific communication parameter . P arity: Non e /Odd/Even â Se rvice/host-specific communication parameter . Stop bits: 1 /2 â Service/host-specific communication parameter . Local echo: On/Off â If set to On , characters typed from the communicator keyboard are echoed locally to the communicator . If set to Off , the y are echoed to the remote host com put er . Modem initialisation â Enter here a modem initialisation string cont ain ing AT commands, if needed. Th is initialisation strin g is executed after the string you define in the Modem initialisation: Custom option of the Internet settings. Backspace key: BS/DEL â Defines whether the keyboard backspace key is used as a back space or delete key . Line e nd â Defines which character is generated with the Enter key in the terminal session. The alternatives are: Carriage return ( CR ), Lin efeed ( LF ), and Carriage return - Linefeed ( CR/ LF ). Figure 9
106 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Terminal connecti on When you have connected to the remote system, the following commands become available: Press Keys to emulate the VT100 special keys, which are not a vailable on the communicator keyboard. The special keys include : Four function keys: PF1-4. The specific function of these keys depends on the service or progr am to which you are connected. All VT100 application keypad keys: numbers 1-9, hyphen, comma, period, enter. The following VT100 functions: reset terminal, Ctrl-\, Ctrl-], Ctrl-~, Ctrl-?. The selected special character is entered to the lef t of the cursor by pressing Inse rt . The arrow keys can be used for scrolling the view . Scrolling does not a f fect the cursor position. Pressing any keyboard key retu rns the view to the cu rsor position. Press Hang up to close the connection to the host, end the data call and return to the Terminal main view . To transfer text The purpose of the text tr ansfer function is to enable you to send text from the communicator to the host computer , or to copy text from the host computer to the communicator . This function can be used, for ex ample, to send pre-written mail messages to the company main f rame computer , or alternatively , copy received mail and th en read it la te r , off l ine. To send text to the h ost computer 1 Press Send text . 2 Open one of the folders shown and select th e document you want to send. 3 Press Sen d . If you want to stop the sen ding procedure, press Stop sending . While the text is being sent, the keyboard is in active. To copy text from the host computer 1 Prepare the text reading application on th e host. 2 Press Cap ture t ext . All interaction with the host will be recorded in a file in the Downloaded files folder. Control characters, except lin e changes, will not be stored. Press Stop captu re to en d the text capture process.
107 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Telnet The Telnet application is similar to the Termina l application, in that both of them emulate the VT1 00 terminal display . See figure 1 0. Once a T e lnet connection is established, you must in m ost cases enter your login name and a password in order to be able to use the ser vices provided by the host computer . The Teln e t main view shows all pre- defined Telnet hosts. To conne ct to a pre-def ined T elnet host, select the host and press Connect . To create new or edit existing con nections, press Defin e . To define Tel net connections Afte r you have pr essed Defin e in th e T el net main view , the defined T elnet connections are shown. To rem ove the selected connection, press De lete . To edit existing connections, press Edit , a nd to def ine new Teln e t connections, press New . The following settings become available: Conn ection nam e â Write the name of the connection . The name can be defined freely . Destination host â Enter the connection address. T he host is ident ified by either a numeric IP address or a tex tual host name. If required, place the n ame of the destination T CP port after the IP address, s e parated by a colon (:). Internet access points â Select an Internet access point from those currently defined. To change the IAP , press Ch ang e and select a ne w IAP from the list. Backspace key: BS/DEL â Defines whether the keyboard backspace key is used as a back space ( BS ) or delete ( DEL ) key . Note: The Telnet application can be installed to your communicator from the CD-ROM included in the sales package.
108 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Telnet conne ction When you have connected to the remote system, press Key s to emul ate the VT10 0 special keys, which are not available on the communicator keyboard. The special keys include: Four function keys: PF1-4. The specific function of these keys depends on the service or progr am to which you are connected. All VT100 application keypad keys: numbers 1-9, hyphen, comma, period, Enter. The following VT100 functions: reset terminal, Ctrl-\, Ctrl-], Ctrl-~, Ctrl-?. In a Telnet connection, these special keys include the following commands that can be used in the remote systems that support them: Interrupt â Interrupts the current proc ess on the remote computer . Skip command output â Prevents the commands from being shown on the display . Are you there ? â Enquires whether the remote system is s till r unning, if the execution of a task seems to take too long. Select a special character and press Insert . The inserted s pecial character sends a control signal to the remote computer; it is not sh own on the display . The arrow keys can be used for scrolling the view . Scrolling does not a f fect the cursor position. Pressing any keyboard key retu rns the view to the cu rsor position. Press Hang up to close the connection to the host, end the data call and return to the T eln et application m ain view . Figure 1 0 Note: The te xt transfer function is also available in T elnet. See â To transfer textâ on page 106.
109 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Text Web With Text W eb you can fetch information from the Internet, using SMS. Such information can include f or example flight s ch edules, weather reports an d stock news. Y ou can also access services provided by your network operator and Nokia. Nokia service s The contents are maintained by Nokia, and they cannot be changed. Nokia updates the contents from tim e to time. Operat or services The Oper ator servi ces a ll ows the network operator to provide various services to the subscribers. The operator-spec ific items may vary from subscriber to subscriber , and can be updated by the network operator . To define ser vices 1 To define new ser vice access points, press Settings in the Te x t Web main view. 2 Press New to open an empty service information card, or pr ess Edit to modify an existing service. Enter th e title of the service, the server number, which is a message centre number, and the service number, which is a phone number. To fetch informatio n 1 In the Text Web main view, scroll to one of the service access points that you have defined and press Select . 2 Enter in the space pr ovide d a keyword that describes th e type of information you are looking for. If you press Get keywor ds , you will receive a list of available keywords. History list contain s keywords th at you have used previously. 3 To send the keywor d, press Send . When you re ceive a reply from th e service provider, the TTML browser opens up. To use the bro wser Press the arrow keys on the keyboard to move from one hotspot to another . To follow a hyperlink, press Fetch . With Change you can tick off boxes and buttons. To add the form to the Saved forms list, press Save and select Save form . To copy the text to the Downloaded files f older , select Co py text .
110 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To s end the fo rm, pres s Se nd . Save d forms Saved forms is a âÂÂhotlistâ to which you can add items from the other services. It grants you quick access to I nternet services. To open the selected for m, press Open . The TTML browser opens up with the same commands as above . To rename a service, press Rename in the Saved forms main view . To remove the selected form, press Dele te . Figure 1 1
Notes 111 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 10. Notes Notes is used for writing texts and managing various documents stored on the communicator . Folders in the Notes main view ar e: Own texts â Written ma il, faxes, shor t messages, notes and memos Received faxes/ messages/ mail â All r e ceived documents Downloaded files â Docu ments downloaded with the Internet applications Document outbox â Documents waitin g to be sent If you have a memory card inserted in the communicator, the memory card icon will be shown at the bottom of the folders list. See figure 1. To wri te a do cume nt 1 Press Write note . The note editor open s. 2 Write the document. To read a document 1 Select a folder and press Open . 2 Select a document from th e list and press Open . Figure 1 Note: When you open a document, the document is opened in the appropriate editor or viewer. The available comman ds vary according to the editor/viewer.
Notes 112 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To pr int a doc ume nt 1 Open the docum ent. 2 Press the Menu button and select Print . For more in formation, see âÂÂDocument featuresâ on page 34. To remove a document 1 Select a f older and press Open . 2 Select a document from the list an d press Delet e . To make a subfolder 1 Select a f older and press Open . 2 Press the Menu button and select Create folder . 3 Write down the name of the folder and pr e ss OK . To re move a subf olde r 1 Select the folder under which th e subfolder is located and pre ss Open . 2 Select the subfolder and press Dele te . To use the Menu button When you press the Menu button in an opened folder , the following options become available: Rena me â Y ou can give a new name to the selected subfolder or document. Pe r manent folders cannot be renamed. Copy â Y ou c a n choo se a folder in to which the selec ted documen t will be copied. Move â Y ou can choose a folder into which the selected document w ill be moved. Create folder â Y ou can make a new subfolder . Copy to sounds â Y ou can add the selected tune to the list of ringing tones. Transfer via IR â You can copy files to another Nokia 91 1 0 Com municator via the infrared link. The IR port of the receiving device must be activated before the operation. See âÂÂInfra red activationâ on pa ge 131. Note: If the opened document is very large, i.e. dozens of pages long, the time required befor e the document opens, is longer than with smaller documents. Note: Ca lend ar me mos an d Con tact images are permanent su bf olders and thus c an not be remov e d.
Notes 113 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To edit documents For information about the available editing shortcuts see âÂÂDo cument featuresâ on page 34. Documents that ope n in the Notes editor can be directly edited and formatted. To format the text, press Style . Choose from the following options: Font: URW Mono / URW Rom an / URW S ans (true type fonts) Size: 10 / 12/ 14 / 18 / 24 / 36 / User defin ed (measured in points) Bold (Ctrl-B): On / Off Italics (Ctrl-I): On / Off Underlined (Ctrl-U): On / Off Justification: Left / Cen tred / Right / Full Margins â O pens a new view where you can choose a value for the top, bottom, left and right margins. The unit o f measurement is ei ther inches or centimetres, chosen in the System settings, see âÂÂSystem settingsâ on page 125 . A new style setting aff e cts all new text from t h e cursor point forward. The margin settings, however , apply to the whole document. If you wish to change the settings permanently , do it in the main view settings, see âÂÂNotes settingsâ on page 1 15. Special character s The special character key , Chr , on the communicator keyboar d is used to create characters that are not included on the keyboard. The character key can always be used when you are able to enter char acters from the keyboard. To insert spec ial characters from the character table 1 Press and release the Chr key. The character ta b le opens on the display, see figure 2. 2 Move the selection frame over th e desired character with th e arrow keys. 3 Press Insert to close the character table and to insert the selected character to the l eft of the cursor . Figure 2
Notes 114 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To insert spec ial characters from the keyboard 1 Press and hold the Chr key a n d simultaneously pr ess a key with a special character printed on the key as the third character. The special key will be inserted on the display. In addition, special characters can be generated using certain unmarked keys, for ex ample, âÂÂaâ and â e âÂÂ: 1 Press and h old the Chr key and simultaneously press a letter key. The first special character is displayed. 2 Continue to hold down the Chr key an d press the letter key again. The second special chara cte r is shown in the place of the first, and so on, until the first character is shown again. The case of the special character is determined by w hether Shift or the Caps lock ke y has been pressed. To send docum ents When you pres s Send in the Notes e ditor , the following options become available: Send as fax â You can send the document as a fax. This option opens the fax directory . The sending procedure from this point on is similar to that described in âÂÂTo send faxesâ on page 7 1. Send as short message â Y ou can s end the documen t as a short message. T he sending procedure is similar to that described in âÂÂTo send short messagesâ on page 78. Send as mail â Y ou ca n send the document a s an e- mail messa ge. The sending procedure is similar to that desc ribed in âÂÂTo send mailâ on page 9 2. Downloaded files and read-only documents All downloaded and captured texts ca n be opened in the Note editor . Received short messages, received mail and ASCII text files transferred to the communicator are read-only documents. Re ad-only documents themselves cannot be edited, but an editable copy can be created: 1 Ope n a read- only d ocument . The co ntents are show n as plai n text . 2 Press any character key. Y ou will be asked if you want to create an e ditable copy. 3 Press Create to close the original file and copy its contents to a new text file. If the original file is in DOS format, it will be removed after an editable copy has been created. 4 Edit the n ew note normally. The contents of a received fax cannot be conver ted into text or edited. Opening a fax activa tes the fax viewer and opening a n image activates the image vie wer .
Notes 115 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Notes settings Y ou can change the defa ult settings of the note editor by pressing Setti ngs in the Notes main view . The settings are valid until they ar e changed again. To change the settings, choose a setting and press Change . Font: URW Mono / URW Rom an / URW Sans Size: 1 0 p oints / 12 / 14 / 18 / 24 / 36 / User def ined Margins â Opens a new view where you can define values for the top, bottom, left or right mar gin. The unit of m easurement used in this setting is e ither inches or centimetres, an d it can be changed in the System settin gs.
Notes 116 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Calen dar 117 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 11. Calendar In the Calendar application, you ca n check your sche du led events, keep a list of tasks in th e To-do list, set alar ms and link memos to events, an d book events in other peopleâÂÂs calendars. Monthly schedule The monthl y sched ule shows the days o f the current month in rows according to the numb er of the w eek. The w eek numbe r is sho wn in the co lumn on th e left. TodayâÂÂs date is shown in a frame (in the figure 1, August 6th). The currently selected date has a dar k background wit h white digits (August 28th). Use the arrow keys to select another date. Dates that have sche duled events are marked in bold (A ugust 9th ). If the selec ted date contains scheduled even ts (as in the figure, August 28 th), they are shown in a separ ate daily events list o n the right side of the display . The schedule can be e dited b y selecting the date and pressing Day or the Enter key . If the whole date ha s been reserv ed for an event, th e event is shown in th e daily events list in bold (as âÂÂDesign conferenceâ in figure 1). To write yourself reminders of important matters, press To-do l ist . Figure 1 Tip: In order to optimise the amount of data stored on your communicator and the operation of the Calendar, it is recommended that you regularly remove old calendar events with the Data removal function. See âÂÂData removalâ on page 134.
Calen dar 118 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Weekly schedu le The weekly schedule shows the timetable of th e selected week. TodayâÂÂs date is outlined by a square frame (Tuesday 17th in figure 2). The currently selected time box is shaded (Thursday 19th, 12:00 in figure 2). All the event s are mar ked with gre y bars accordin g to their star t and end times . The bars are thi nner if the e vents of the day overlap (Fr iday 20th in fig ure 2). If the w hole day has been r eserved for an event, all the time boxes are marked with a dark grey bar (Tuesday 1 7th in figure 2 ). To open the daily or the monthly schedule, press Day or Month , r espec tively . Y ou can u se the arrow keys to scroll inside a day in the wee kly schedule. If you scroll to a tim e box containing an event, the bar across the bottom of the weekly schedule wi ll show the basic details of the even t. See figure 2. The numbers to the r ight of the event description indicate the number of events contained within that time box, e.g. âÂÂ2/3â means that you are seeing the details of the second of th ree events. If a time box contains more than one event, you may view the basic details of each event by scrolling to th e time box and pr essing the T ab key on the keyboard. The details will be shown on the bar across the bottom of th e weekly schedule. To view the previous event, press Shift and Tab . Figure 2 Tip: To add events to the month ly and weekly schedules, just start writing the event description. T he Details view opens automatically.
Calen dar 119 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Daily sched ule Open the daily schedule by pressing Day in the monthly or weekly schedule. The daily events list displa ys the schedule for the selected day . The contents of the entries are freely editable. Daily schedul e symbols â Attached alarms â Calendar bookings â Attached memos â Recur ring events â Annual events The symbols appear in the order of priority before the eve nt description. See fig ure 3 . To add events 1 Move the selection frame over the starting time of the event. 2 Type the event on the dotted line. If you want to add an event without a start time, wr ite the event, press De tails and remove the start time. The event will be shown with a dot in front. To rem ove ev ents Select the event and press Delete . If you remove or edit recurring events, you will be asked if you want to apply the ch anges to all or only to the selected event. To adjust the de tails of the select ed event Press De tail s . A new view opens, allowing you to adjust the following details: Description â The description of the even t. Figure 3 Tip: If the st ar tin g tim e alr ead y contains an event, pr e ss En ter to create a new row with the same starting time.
Calen dar 120 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Reserve whole day(s) â You can write down the number of days required for the event. Start: Date â The date of the event. The default date is that of th e selected day . The date format is set in the System settings. Time â The time when the event sta rts. End: Date â The date when the e vent ends. Time â The time wh en the eve nt ends. Alarm â Sets an alarm for the selected event. See âÂÂAlarmsâ on page 1 23. Frequency â You can define how often the event repeats. The options are None /Daily /Weekly /Monthly /Annually/Every other we ek/Wor kin g days . Repeat until: [date] â Y ou can write down th e last date of the r ecurring event. Event sent to â Lists all the people to whom you have booked the event. The list shows the status of the sent event: Accepted or Confirmed â The recipient has accepted th e booking. Discarded â T h e recipient has rejected the booking. No reply â No information has been received from the recipient. Forced â T he booking was sen t as a reservation. To attach memos to an even t 1 Move the selection f rame over the desired event and press Detai ls in the daily schedule. 2 Press Memo . 3 Write the memo. The following command buttons are available: Send â Y ou can sen d the memo as a fax, SMS or mail. Style â You ca n form at the text. Delet e â Remo ves the mem o. Close â Links the memo to the sel ected event. Memos are stored in the C alendar memos subfolder of the Own texts folder. To use the Menu button When you press the Menu button in the monthly , daily and weekly schedules, the following options become ava ilable: To-do list â Opens the To-do list. Available in the daily schedule only . Pe ndi ng requests â Open s the list of pending calen dar event requests. Today â Shows the current day. Next month/week/day (Ct rl- N) â Shows the next month, week or day .
Calen dar 121 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Previous month/week /day (Ctrl-P) â Shows the p revious month, we ek or day . Settings â Enables you to cha n ge the following options: Booking password â You can set a password to protect your calen dar from receiving reservations from anyone except those who have your password. The maximum length of the password is 8 characters. When a pass word is written in the field, all char acter s appear a s asterisks. Default alarm â When you set an alarm to an event, the alarm will go off 10 minutes before the scheduled time of the event, unless you spec i fy otherwise here. Beginning of week â You can select which day is considered to be the first day of the week. Calendar booking Calendar booking enables you to send even t requests or reservations to other communicators or calendar servers. The diffe rence between an even t request and an event reservation is that the r ecipient may decide whether to accept or discard an event request, but e vent reservations can only be accepted. Bookin g password Sending event reservations requires that you know the recipientâÂÂs booking password. If you add the recipien tâÂÂs password to the booking password field of the recipientâÂÂs contact card, the password is automatica l ly taken from t h ere when yo u send a re serv atio n. When you send a re ser vation with an incorr e ct password, the recipie ntâÂÂs communicator discar ds the reservation. Y ou can give your own booking password to those whom you allow to s end reservations to your calendar . If you do not set a password, your communicator accepts all reservations. Define your booking password in the Calendar settings. To make requests and res ervations 1 Select an event in the daily schedule or w rite a new one. 2 Press Cal endar booki ng in the Details vie w. 3 Select whether to send the event as a request or a reservation. 4 Press Transfer via IR to send the booking to another Nokia 9 110 Communicator via the infrared link, or press Send as SMS to open the SMS directory where you can select the recipient for the bookin g. Note Note: The r ecipientâÂÂs booking passwo rd is not nee ded when you se nd event req uests.
Calen dar 122 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. that the recipient mu st have a phone number in the Tel(GSM) field, or, if you are sending the booking to a calendar server, a se r ver number in the Tel(Server) field . 5 Press Send to send the booking. To receive requests When you receive an event request, a note appears on the display showing the details of the event, and the name or number of the sen der . On the left side of the note is your schedule for the day, w here you can check whether you have other appointments at th e same time. If you pre ss Acc ept or Den y , your communicator sends a reply to th e sender informing about your decision. Accepted events a re moved to your calendar . The received r equest can be dismissed by pressing Cancel . If you press Hold , the event request i s moved to th e Pending requ ests list to wait for your decision. This list is accessed by pressing the Menu button in the monthly , weekly or daily schedule and selecting P ending requests . On the right side of the list is your schedule for the day , where you can check whether you have other appointments at the same time. The commands in the P e nding requests list are Accept and Deny , the f unction of which is explained above; and Dele te , which removes th e event from the list. To re ceive rese rvations When you receive an event reservation, a note appears on the display giving the details of the event. When you pr ess OK, the reservation is mov e d to your calendar . If you press Confirm , the event is moved to your calenda r and a confirmation note is sent to the sender of the reservation. To cancel bookings There are two ways to can cel bookings that you have sent: 1 Remove the event from your own calendar. Your communicator will check the âÂÂEvent sent toâ list (see âÂÂDaily sc hedu leâ on page 119) and send a Figure 4 Note: Old events are not removed when new events are a dded, even if they have the same date and time.
Calen dar 123 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. special SMS to all the participants who share the even t, removing the event in their calendars as well. Or, 2 Select a participant in the â Event sent toâ list and press Ca ncel event . The event is removed from the participantâÂÂs calen dar. To cha nge a boo king t hat y ou ha ve s ent Select the event and press Details . Make the desired changes. The changes are sent to the calendars of the persons to whom you have sent the booking. Alarms To set an alarm to the currently se lected event 1 Press De tails in the daily schedule. 2 Select the Alarm option a n d press Chan ge . 3 Select one of the alarm options: None â No alarm is attached to the event. At start time â The alar m will sound a t the start time. ... minutes befor e event â The alarm will go off as set in the Calendar settings unless you specify otherwise here. Y ou can choose the a lar m tone in t he System sounds settings of th e System application. An active alarm is indicated by the bell icon in the daily schedule (in the figure 3, the 1 1 :00 event). When the alarm sounds, a note is shown on both displays. The alarm sound can be turned off by pressing any key . If you have set the communicator to a s i lent profile in the T elephone settings, only the alarm note will be shown. To-do li st The To-do list is a list of tasks which must be completed ev entually , but are not connected to any specific time or day . The en tries in th e To- do list are Tip: To set alar ms that are not related to any calendar event, use the Clock application, see âÂÂClockâ on page 138. Tip: After a cale nda r alarm ha s occurred, you can m ove the message contents of the alarm to the To-do list by pressing Move to To -do list .
Calen dar 124 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. numbered, and th ey can be given different statuses. High priority entries are shown at the top of the list. See figure 5 . To access the To- do list 1 Press the To-do list command button in the monthly or weekly schedule. Or, 2 Press the Menu button and select the T o -do list option in the daily schedule. To change the status of the se lected task 1 Press Pr iority . A pop-up box opens. 2 Change the status of the entry to High priority or Normal priority , or mark the task as Completed , as the task number four in f igure 5. To write down a n e w to-do task, press New . An em pty entry field is added at the end of the To-do list. To remove th e currently selected task f rom the list, press Delet e . Figure 5
System 125 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 12. System System contains the following applications: Security , User data, Memory , Infrared activation, Digital camera connectivity , Remote synchronisation, Fax modem, Data removal, Install/Remove software, Backup/Restore, Memory card tool, and About this product. To start a System appli cation 1 Press the System application button. 2 Scroll to the application and pr ess Select . 3 If a System application is active, you must close it by pressing Clos e in the main view of the applica tion before y ou can sta rt another . System settings To change the System settings 1 Press Set ti ngs in the System main view. 2 Select the setting you want to change. 3 Press Change . The System settings include all system-related per manent settings: Syst em sou nds â Covers all the sounds in the c om municator . The available settings are: Default ringing tone â You can select one of the tones in th e pop-up box or compose a special ringing tone for your telephon e with the Composer application. See âÂÂComposerâ on page 141. You can also use the sounds you have recorded w ith the Digital voice recor der as ringing tones. Se e âÂÂVoice recorderâ on page 144. If a tone or sound is e rased, the default ringing tone Grande valse will replace it. Alternate ringing tone â If your SIM card suppor ts the alternate line service, you can select a different ringing tone for Line 2. See âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. Note: When one of the PC connectivity applications or the fax m odem is in use, the communicator consumes more power than normally. To exten d the battery operation time, these applications should be closed when they are not used.
System 126 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Notification tones: On/Off â Determines whether a sound is heard, for example, when the me mory is too low. Application tones: Calendar alarm, Clock alarm, Received fax, Received SMS, Received mail â For each of these items you can set a specific r inging tone. You would then be able to tell by the tone whethe r you have received a fax or a short message, for exam ple. The None option allows you to turn the selected tone off, with the exception of the clock alarm. Note that when the phone is turned off, only calendar and c l ock a larm ringing tones can be he ard. This requires, however, that the ringing tones are set through the System settin gs. Print settings â Y ou can select the default settings for printing. For more about printing, see âÂÂDocument featuresâ on page 34. Connection type â Se lect whether to use infrared or cable connection. Header â Set this on if you want to print your name and the date and time of printing on th e top of each page. Paper size â Choose eith er A4 or Letter . Default printer â Select the printer used in the cable con n ection. Baud ra te: 9600/1 9200/57 600/115 200 â Select the data transm i ssion rate used in the cable c on nection. Flow control: Software/None â Y ou can select whether to let the software control the data flow . Data bits: 7/ 8 â Host-specific communicat io n parameter for the cable connection. Parity: None/Odd/Even â Host-specific communication parameter f o r the cable connection. Stop bits: 1/2 â Host-specific communication parameter for the cable connection. Backlight period â Y ou can set the time period for which the backlight is switched on. The available settings are 15/30/45 seco nds /1/2/3/4/5 m inutes . The backlight can also be turn ed off by pressing the button. Figure 1
System 127 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Screen blanker period â Y ou can s et the time period after which th e display will blank out if the device remains inactive. This feature saves the battery and increases the operation time of the com municator . The time-out period can be from 2 to 15 minutes. The screen blanker cann ot be turned off. Cont rast contro l â The contrast view shows a test picture and a s et of commands that can be used to adjust the picture. The command button increases the contrast. Th e â command bu tton decreases the contrast. When the setting seems sa tisfactory , press OK . Pr eferenc es â Preferences lets you change date and time formats and the u nit of measurem ent: Date format: dd.mm.yy / mm.dd.yy / yy.mm.dd . â For example , 22.03. 98 / 03.22. 98 / 98.03.2 2. Time forma t: 24 h our / AM /PM â For e xample, 09: 35 / 9: 35 A M. Unit of measure â Choose either Centimetre or Inch as th e basic uni t of meas ure. Security Note: The predete rmined default lock code 12345 is provided in the sales package of the communicator. For security reasons, it is imperative that you change the lock code. Change the code eithe r in the Security options menu of the phone (see âÂÂSettings (Menu 4)â on page 159), or via the com m unicator interface (see âÂÂT o change the security settingsâ on page 128). Keep the new code secret and in a saf e place, separate from the communicator . To lock the communicator automati cally 1 Press Set ti ngs in the main view of the Security application. 2 Select Autolock period and press Change . 3 Enter you r lock code at the p rompt, an d define th e autolock period. W hen the comm unicator remain s inactive for the de fined period , it will loc k itself. To lock the communicator manually 1 Press Lock sy stem in the main view of the Security application. 2 If the A utolock pe riod is in use, the de vice wi ll lock im mediately . If the Autolock period is off, you must enter your lo ck code bef ore the devi ce is locked. Note: Extens ive use of the backlight may drain the battery.
System 128 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. After the communicator has been locked, it cannot be used until the correct lock code is given. However , incoming voice calls can be answered via the phone, and faxes and short messages are received normally . To unlo ck the communi cator 1 Enter your lock code in the input field. 2 Press OK . To change the securit y settings 1 Press Settings in the Security main view. 2 Select the setting and press Change . 3 When you are prompted for a code, enter it an d press OK . Choose a new value. The codes are shown as asterisks. If you are changing a code, you will be prompted for the current code and then the new code twice. The code cannot be changed if the corresponding security feature is not in use. For example, if the PIN code request is set to Off , the PIN code cannot be changed. Pressing Clos e will close the security settin gs and return to the Security main view . Note: When the communicator is locked, it may be possible to make a ca ll via the phone to the emergency number pr ogrammed into your phone, e.g. 112 or other official emergency n umber. Tip: Most of the se curity features can also be c h anged in the Security options menu of the ph one. See âÂÂSetting s (Men u 4)â on page 159.
System 129 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Security settings PIN code request: O n / Off â If you set the PIN code re quest on, the communicator requests the code eve ry time the phone is tu rned on by pressing . This setting cannot be changed if the phone is switched off or if there is no valid SI M card inserted. If you enter the PIN code incorrectly three times in a row , you will need a PUK code to unblock the S IM card. When the SIM card is blocked, you cannot send or receive any documents or calls, except emergen cy calls. Otherwise, the communicator can be u s ed normally . Autolock period: Autolock off/1/2/5/15/30/60 minutes â Determines the security time-out period, after which the communicator will lock. The timer is reset by any input, calls, data transfer , printing, etc. SIM change security: On / Off â Wh en active, every time the phone is switched on this security option checks whether the SIM card in the communicator h as been changed. If the SIM card has been changed and the new SIM card has not been used with your communicator previously , the communicator locks itself until the lock code i s correctly entered. The communicator recognises five diffe rent SIM cards as th e ow nerâÂÂs cards . PIN code â This setting allows you to change the PIN code. The changing procedure is described at the beginning of this "Security" section. The new PIN code must be 4 to 8 digits long. Changin g the PIN code requires that the PIN code request is set on, the phone is on, and that there is a valid SIM card inserted in the communicator . PIN2 code â This setting en ables you to change the PIN2 code. The PIN2 code is required to access some functions, such as the call cost settings, which must be supported by your SIM card. If you enter an incorrect PIN2 code three times in succession, you will ne ed a PUK2 code to unblock the PIN2 code. The length of the PIN2 code is 4 to 8 digits. Figure 2 Not e: Some SIM cards do not allow you to turn the PIN code request of f.
System 130 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Lock code â This setting allows you to change the lock code . The changing procedure is described at the beginning of this "Security" section. The new code must be 5 digits lon g. If you key in an incorrect lock code several times in succession, the communicator must be sent bac k to the dealer to be unlocked. Barring pa ssword â T his setting allows you to c hange the b arring passwor d. The new cod e must be 4 digits long. To change the password, the phon e must be on and within the network cov erage, th e Call barrin g service mu st be activated for your SIM car d which m ust b e valid a nd ins erted i n the co mmunica tor . If you enter an incorrect barring password three times, the password is blocked and you must as k the network operator for a new password. User data The User data card contains your pers o nal information. Y ou can freely edit the information in the Name , Company , Job title, A ddress , Tel , Fax , Tel (G SM ) , Fax( GSM ) , Mail and UR L fields. The User data will automatically be included in the corresponding f ields of the fax cover page in the F ax application. Likewise, the SMS application uses this informa tion when y ou send your own business ca rd. When you pres s Attach image in the user data card, you can attach your own picture to the card. The picture m ust first be stor e d in JPEG format in the Contact images subfolder of th e Downloaded files f older . Memo ry This application shows the amount of av ailable free memory for storing data and installing new software. Press Details to open up a list of folders and other data in the communicator . The list shows how much memory each of them takes up, and it is updated each time you press Deta ils . If your memory card is inserted in the communicator , press Memory card to check the amount of available memory in the card. If the memory is getting low , you should remove some documents. Bef ore removing, you can print, f ax or mail them, or transfer them to a PC or a memory card. Note: Avoid using codes that are similar to emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency n umber.
System 131 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Infrared activation If you want to use the PC Suite for Nokia 9 1 1 0 Com municator program (see âÂÂTo use the PC Suiteâ on page 39) with the in frared connection, or if you want to receive data from another device via the infrared, you need to use the Infrared activation application. 1 Make sure that the infrared port of the communicator faces the infrared port of the PC or another device. 2 Open the Infrared activa tion application on the communicator. 3 Press Acti v ate . 4 To end the infrared connection, press Disa ble . To transfer data betwe e n two communicators 1 Make sure that the infrared ports of the com municators face each other. 2 Open the Infrared activa tion application on the receiving communicator. 3 In the sending communicator, go to the application from where you want to transfer data, and press Transfer via IR . Digital c amera connecti vity The Digital camera connectivity application en ables you to transfer images between your communicator and a digital still camera or another communicator via t h e infrared connection. When you start the application, press Image list to open a list of the images in the Downloaded files folder . However , you can only select image files with the extensions UPF or JPG. To transfer images fr om another device to the communicator The connection to a digital camera or another commu n icator is always established by the receiving communicator . Note: A m aximum o f 20 files can be transferred at a time. Tip: The infrared link can also be activated by pressing C hr-1 on the communicator keyboard. Note: The infrared protocol of th e digital camera must be IrTran-P in order to be com patible with the Nokia 91 10 Communi cator.
System 132 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 1 Make sure that the infrared port of your communicator faces the infrared port of the oth er device. 2 Open the Digital camera connectivity a pplication and press Image list . 3 Press Rec eive to start transferring the selected UPF images from the other device to your communicator. To transfer images f r om the communicator to anot her device 1 Open the Digital camera connectivity a pplication and press Image list . 2 Select the UP F image(s) you want to transfer. 3 Make sure that the infrared port of your communicator faces the infrared port of the other device, and press Send . To rename the selected image, pr ess Rename and write the new name in the input field. Do not change the extensi on at the end of the name. To use the Menu button When you press the Menu bu tton in the Image list, the following options become available: Open â O pens the image. Y ou can then zoom in and out as well as rotate the ima ge. Delete â Re moves t he ima ge. Convert to JPEG â Conv erts the s elected image(s) from UPF to JPEG format. Convert to UPF â Converts the selected image(s) from JPEG to UPF format. Image information â Pr esents information about the image. Y ou can also view the information with the Ctrl-i key com bination. Remote synchronisation To synchronise your calendar data with a PC calendar , us e the Remote synchronisation application. With this application, you connect to the PC via the I nternet. Note that you need an Internet access point, see âÂÂInternet settings â on page 86. The PC Suite for Nokia 91 10 Communicator program must be running on the PC to whic h you are conn ecting. To synchronis e calendar data 1 Press Settings and define the destination host, which is the IP address of the server PC, and select the I nternet access point used. 2 Press Start . A data call is made, and the calendar data is sent from your communicator to the destination host. 3 When the synchronised calendar data has been sent back to your communicator, the data call ends.
System 133 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Fax modem Before your PC can recognis e the communicator as a fax modem, the PC needs to be properly confi gured. Consult the userâÂÂs guide of your PC on h ow to install new modems. PCs wi th Microsoft W indows 95 or NT 3.5 1 or higher operatin g systems can use th e modem informatio n file found o n the d iskette supplied i n the communica tor sales pac kage. See also the Documenta tion section on the CD-ROM. Using the communicator as a fax modem requires that data calls are supported by the network you are using and that this service is activated for your SIM card. Contact your home ser vice pr ovider for details. 1 Press Settings and select the c o nnection type. The functioning of a cable connection when the communicator is used as a fax modem is not guaranteed. 2 Connect the communicator to the PC via an infrared link as descr ibed in âÂÂTo use the PC Suiteâ on page 39. 3 Wait until the connection is esta blish ed. 4 Press Activate in the Fax modem main view . This will change the communicator to a fax modem. When the com m unicator is used as a fa x modem, the call status in dicator shows the text MODEM. 5 To stop using the com m unicator as a fax modem, press Disable . The operations of a modem ca n be controlled by A T commands and S- registers. These commands gi ve the advanced us er an opportunity to contr ol all the features of the modem. Should you need to enter the commands manually , consult the documentation of the PC application tha t you are using. A list of c o mmon A T commands based on the ETSI 0 7 .0 7 standar d and supported by the Nokia 91 1 0 Communicator are available in the atcomm.txt file on the diskette included in th e sales package of your communicator . When the communicator is used as a fax modem, its nor mal communication features are disabled. O therwise, the applications r ema in functional. If an active PC connection is idle for longer than 20 minutes, the f ax modem is automatically disabled to conserve power . However , when the communicator is connected to an electrical o utlet, for example, while ch arging a battery, the time-out is not active. Figure 3
System 134 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Data removal The Data removal applicat i on comes in handy if you want to remove personal information from the com municator , for example, before lending it to someone else. In this way you need not remove data one by one. 1 Select what kind of data you want to remove. The removable data is arranged in four groups: All device data , Calen dar data, Documents, Contacts and speed dials . 2 Press De lete . 3 Before any data is removed, you must enter your lock code. See âÂÂSecurityâ on page 127. When removing calendar data , you can choose to re m ove all calendar data or only events that occur bef ore a given date. Install/ Remove software The Install/Remove software application enables you to install n e w software from a PC to the communicator and later remove the software. To use this application, you need to start the Nokia Commun i cator Server on your PC and connect your communicator to the PC. See â To use the Nokia Communicator Serverâ on page 46. Press Install and select the software you want to install, or press Remov e and select the software you want to remove. The set of applications that were on the communicator a t the time of purchase cannot be removed. This is to ensure that the basic functions of the communicator are always available. Note: Even if you choose the All device data option, your Internet settin gs will not be removed. If you want to restore your communicator to the same state it was in at the time of pu rchase, see chapter 15 "Troubleshooting" on page 165. Caution: Beware of viruses! Only install on the Nokia 91 10 Commu nicator soft ware you have obtained from sources that offer adequate protection against viruses. Tip: To sa v e th e m em or y s pa ce of the communicator, you can install sof tware to a memory card.
System 135 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Backup/Restore The Backup/Restore application enables you to make back ups of various data on your communicator , and to restore it later . Data is backed up in sets which are stored in separate dir e ctories on the PC. To use this application , you need to start the Nokia Communicator Server on your PC and connect your communicator to the PC. See âÂÂTo use the Nokia Communicator Serverâ on page 46. Select whether to backup All data , Documents , Con tacts, or C alendar and press Ba ck up . A backup directory w ill be created if necessary . The r estorati on proc edur e is car ried ou t in the same wa y as the backup oper ation, excep t that inst ead of Backup you must pr ess Restore . When da ta is rest ored, files w ith s imilar names i n the destin ation f older will be ove rwrit ten. To make backups or restore data between a Nokia 9000 Communicator or a Nokia 9000i Communicator and a Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator , see âÂÂTo transfer data from older communicator modelsâ on page 37. Memory card tool The Memory card tool application can only be started if there is a memory card inserted in the communicator . With this application, you can format and rename the memory ca rd, and check the condition of t h e files. About this product This application displays information about the Nokia 91 1 0 Communicator . Note: While the Backup/Restore is in progress, the other applications of the communicator cannot be used. To interrupt the ope ration, for example, to make an emergen cy call, press Canc el and confirm by pressing Inte rrupt . Tip: While travelling, you can make backups of important documents to a memory card.
System 136 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Ext ras 137 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 13. Extras Press the button on the keyboard to open the Extras application group, which contains Calculator , Clock, Composer and V oice recorder . With Extr as you can also launch applications located on your memory card. To star t one of the applications, select it and press Select . To close an active application, press Close . Calculator The Calculator contains an input field at the bottom of the screen, and above it a list where previous calculations, if any , can be seen. The most recent calculations are shown at the bottom of the list. The list can be scrolled with the arrow keys, and it can be emptied by pressing Clea r list . The results of the calculations appear in bo ld . As long as you have not pressed Enter or âÂÂ=âÂÂ, you can move in the ca lcu lation string with the arrow keys and edit the string. Figure 1 Note: More applications ca n be installed to your communicator from the CD-ROM included in the sales package. Tip: W ith on e Extras application active, you can quickly switch to another by pressing the button.
Ext ras 138 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. The following characters can be used for t he corresponding operations: To add functions in the i nput field 1 Press Functions . 2 Select one of the available categories and press Se lect . You will see a list of functions and you can select th e one you want. You can sele ct several functions before returning to the Calculator main view. To copy calcul ations in the in put field 1 Press Co py to select and copy a calculation or a result back to the input field for modification or r ecalculation. 2 To copy a calculation, press Copy calcul ation , and to copy a result, press Copy res ult . 3 Press Bac k . The sele cted item will be copied to the input f ield. To change the m ode of the calculator When you press the Menu button in the Calculator main view and select Settings , you can change the mode of the calcu lator . Select either Radian s , Degrees , or G radients , and press OK . Clo ck The Clock shows the time and date in your home city and country , as well as in several other cities and countries in the world. The Clock also includes an alarm clock. Character Function Numbers 0 to 9 . (full stop) decimal point addition â subtraction * multiplication / division ( ) brackets = or Enter sum Esc clears the e ntry field
Ext ras 139 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To set an alarm An alarm ca n be set to occur within the next 24 hours. Alarms that occur l ater than this a r e set in th e Calendar application. 1 Press Alarm clock in the Clock main view. 2 Press or - to adjust the time shown in the alarm clock display. Each press changes the time by one minute, but if you hold the button down a wh ile longer, the time will start to ch ange in15-minute steps. 3 Press OK to accept the set alarm. Whe n an alarm is set, the bell icon an d the time of the ala r m are sh ow n in the Clock ma in view . There can only be one active alarm. If an alar m is already active, the command names are different. A counter on th e lower right side of the scr e en shows how much time remains to the time of the alarm. Press Change alarm time if you want to readjust the tim e of the ala r m. Press Delete alarm to cancel the alarm. To turn off the alarm sound 1 When the alarm sounds, press an y phone or communicator keyboard key to silence it. 2 Press the OK command button. If you do n ot press OK , the alar m will sound four more times or until you press the OK button. However, if the alarm interval is set to zero, the alarm will sound only once. Set the alarm interval in the clock settin gs. Figure 2 Note: Alar ms will occur according to the home city tim e. When in a diffe rent time zone, re member to change the home city.
Ext ras 140 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. World t ime World time (figure 3) is accessed with the World time command in the Clock main view . The Home box shows the nam e of the curren tly selected home city , countr y , time, date and wh ether daylight saving time is in use. The Destination box shows the same information for the cu rrently selected destination city , as well as the international call prefixes needed to make a call from the home city to the destination city . The world map shows the currently selected destination city in cross hairs. To select the d estination city 1 Press Set destinat ion . 2 Select a city from the list by scrolling the list with the arrow keys. 3 Press OK . To ed it an d add citi es 1 Press Ci tie s in the world time view to ope n a list of cities. 2 To make changes to existing cities, press Edit city . The city information is presented in the form of a ca r d with the following fields: City â The name shown in the list of cities. Can be entered manually. Country â The name of the countr y associated with the city. T he country name is selected from th e list of countries. Area code â The area code r e quired when calling the city. The area code can be entered with or without a national prefix. Only numbers can be entered. Figure 3 Tip: A quick way to select a city f rom the list of cities is to type the first letter of the city with the keyboard. The selection frame jumps to th e first city starting with that letter.
Ext ras 141 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. GMT offs et â Indicates by how much the local time differs from the Greenwich Mean Time. Select a value for the offset from a list. The offset can ra nge fro m âÂÂ12 to 12 ho urs. Set position â O pens a world map view w here you can deter mine the position of the city by moving the cross hairs with the arrow keys. W hen the city is wh ere you want it to appear, press OK . To create a new city card, press Add city . To remove a city from the list, press Delete city . T he cur rent home ci ty can not be removed; you will have to change the h om e city first. To change the Clock settings 1 Press Set ti ngs in the Clock main view. 2 Select the setting you want to change and press Change , or type the new time or date from the k e yboard. Home city â Se lect the home city by scrolling the list of cities with the arrow keys. W hen your home city has been selected, pr ess OK . If you select a city that is in a different time zone t han your current home city, the system time will change. Time â Enter the new time . The time form at is selected in the System settings. Date â Enter the new date. The date format is selected in the System settings. Alarm interval: 0/1/2/3/4/5 minut es â Choose the interval between alarms. If you select 0 , the alarm will go of f only once. Daylight saving â You can set the daylight saving time of the home city and destination city On or Off . This setting remains the sam e even if the home/destination city is changed. Composer The Composer application enables you to cr eate your own, customised ringing tones. To start the composer for the s elected tune, pr ess Open . To compose a new tune press Compose . Note: Changing the time or daylight saving time of the home city will also adjust the time o f the whole time zone, a s well as the system time. If a set alarm is skipped be cause of a changed time, the alarm will go off immediately.
Ext ras 142 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To play the selected tune, press Play . While the tune is being played, the command changes into Stop playing . To edi t a tune 1 Open a tune or press Compo se . A cursor appears at the bottom of the screen, indicating the currently selected n ote or rest. 2 To create a n ote or to alter th e pitch of the note, press th e u p or down arrow keys. Each press changes the pitch of the note. A rest will appear after all possible note le vels have been scrolled through. 3 To move th e cursor, press the left or right arrow keys. When a composition is be ing made, the following commands are available: Durati on changes the length of the selected note. Choose a quarter note, half note, whole note, sixteen th note, or eighth note. Press the command button until the value you wan t is shown. Tempo opens a pop-up box with a new set of commands. Tem po is measured in beats per minute. To alter the tempo, remove th e old value with the backspace key and enter th e new value in the in put field. To accept the tempo, press OK . To test the tempo, press Te st . The tune will be played with the tempo Figure 4 Note: You can change the phone ringin g tone in the Profile settings of the Telephone application or in the System sounds setting of the System application. See âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65 and âÂÂSystem settingsâ on page 125. Note: To edit the preset tunes that were in the communicator at the time of purchase, press the Men u button and select Copy .
Ext ras 143 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. shown in the entry field. To use th e default tempo 1 60 beats/min., press Defaul t . Play p lays the composition shown on th e staff. To remove a composition, press the Menu button, and select Delete . To restore the tun e to what it was before ed iting, press the Menu button and select Undo changes . Close returns to the Composer main view . To use shortcuts While editing, you can use t he follow ing shortcuts: To use the Menu button When you press the Menu bu tton in the Composer main view , the following options become available: Copy â Copies th e selected tune. Delete â Removes the se le cted tune(s). Rename â You c an write the new name into the input f ield. Send as SMS â Opens up the SMS directory where you can select a recipient for the composition(s). To send the composition(s), press Send . When you receive a composition via SMS, a note showing the name or n u mber of the sender and the name of the sent composition will appear on the display . Character Function Enter Plays the tune : (colon) Staccato - (hyphen) Insert s a rest Space bar Inserts an empty column to the left of the cu rsor. Backspace Deletes the selected column con taining a note or a rest . . (full stop) Lengthens the duration of the note or rest by half Tip: For quick composing, press the corresponding letter ke y on the keyboard to generate a note . For example, pressing D generates the note D. When you press Shift and a letter key, a sharp note is generated, e.g. Shift-D generates D sharp.
Ext ras 144 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To add the composition to the list of tunes, press Acce pt . To discard the composition, press Canc el . Transfer via IR â Enables you to send tunes from one communicator to another via the infrared link. The IR port of the receiving device must be activated before the operation. See âÂÂInfrared activationâ on page 13 1. Copy to mem ory card â Copies the selected tu n e(s) to the mem ory card. Copy fro m memory card â Copies th e selected tune(s) from the memory card to your communicator . Voice r ecorde r The Voice recor de r allows you to record telephone conversations and voice memos. Yo u can also listen to your recordings and other sound files. The maximum length of a recording is 3 0 seconds. The main view of the V oice r ecorder shows a list of all th e sou nd files currently stored in your communicator . To open the selected file, press Open . New fi le creates a new file into wh ich sound can be recorded. Delete allows you to remove the selected file. When you open a sound file, you will see the length, which is measured in seconds, and the size, w hich is measured in kilobytes, of the f ile. To play a re cording 1 Open the file and press Play . 2 The Pause command temporarily stops th e playing of the sound file. To start playing again, press Cont i nue . 3 To stop playing, press Stop . To reco rd 1 Open the file into which you want the sound to be recorded, and press Recor d . If you are recording a telephone conversation, you will hear a tone when the recording starts. Tip: With the Voice recorder you ca n record sounds and speech and set them as ringing tones. See âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. Note: Local laws may apply to recording conversations. Do not use this feature illegally.
Ext ras 145 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 2 You can stop the recording for a while by pressing Pause and then sta rt again by press i ng Continu e . 3 To stop the recording, press Stop . To use the Menu button When you press the Menu button in the Voice recorder main view , the following commands beco m e available: Rename â Renames the selected recording. Copy to memory card â Copies the selected recording to the memory card. Copy from memory card â Copies the sele cted recording from the m emory card to you r communicator . Note: To recor d sound and speech you need to have the phone turned on and within ra nge of network coverage. Note: Sound files th at the voice recorder can play have a .WAV extension and support the f ollow ing audio format: 8, 11, 22 or 44khz , PCM/A-law, Stereo/Mono, 8bit.
Ext ras 146 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Phone 147 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 14. Phone When operating the phone, keys are pressed one at a time. T wo keys are never to be pressed simultaneously . The phone keypad is not functional when the device cover is open. â Switches the phone on and off. â Switches between different profiles. See âÂÂProfiles (Menu 3)â on page 158. â Scroll through m enus, submenus or settings. If there are no active calls, the scroll keys can be used to browse through the memory contents. When a call is active, pressing the scroll keys adjusts the volume level. â Dials a phone number an d answers a call. â Ends any a ctive call, cancels a dialled call, or clears the display . Figure 1
Phone 148 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 0 ... 9 â The number and alphabet keys. To call your voice mailbox, press and hold 1 . â Used for special purposes in cer tain functions. If you have subscribed to two phone lines, you can switch betwe en them by pressing and holding . â The func tion of these two sele ction keys depends on the text shown on the bottom lin e of the disp lay . See fi gure 2. To use the se lection key s When this manual instructs you to press a command key , press the selection key under the command name. For example, pressing Menu , i.e. the selection key under the text Me nu , gains access to the menu functions, and Names , i.e. the selection key under the text Name s , to the search functions. The commands vary according to the situation and previous selection. The selection must often be confirmed by pressing OK . Wh enever the Back command is shown, it can be used to return to th e previous menu level without making any changes. Display indi cators The display indicators inform you about the current opera tion of the phone. The indicators described below are shown when the phone is ready for use, with no characters entered by th e user on the display . Figure 2 Note: Hold the phone as y ou would any oth er telephone with the antenna pointed up and over your shoulder. As with any other radio transmitting device, do not touch the antenna unnecessarily when the phone is switched on. Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may cause the phone to operate at a higher power level than otherwis e needed.
Phone 149 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. OPERATOR Indicates in which cellular network the phone is currently used. and bar Indicates the current signal strength at your location. The more bars are visible, the stronger is the signal. and bar Indicates how much charge there is left in the battery . The more bars are visible, the more charge is in the battery To make a call Y ou can make and receive calls only wh en the phone is switched on , the communicator has a valid SIM card fitted, and it is located in the service area of the cellular ne tw ork. 1 Key in the area code and the phone number of the per son you wish to call. If you make a mistake, you can rem o ve the digits one at a tim e by pressing Clear repeatedly, or clear the whole display by pr essing and holding Cl ear . For international calls, start by pressing twice quickly. The international call character appears on the display, which informs the network centre to sele ct the country-specific international prefix. Enter the country code, ar ea code and the phone number. 2 Press to dial th e phone number. 3 When the phone number disappears and the text Call 1 is shown, the call is connected. When a call is active, you can use the and keys to lower or raise th e volume level of the earpiece. 4 After the conversation, end the call by pressing . Note: In some networks emergency calls to the international emergency number 112 may be made w ithout a SIM card. Check with your network operator. For more information about making emergency calls, see âÂÂEmergency callsâ on page 175. Note: The microphone and earpiece are on the rear of the de vice.
Phone 150 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To an swer a c all 1 When you receive a call, the phone gives a ringin g tone and the text C all flashes on the display. If you have selected a silent profile in Menu 3, only the keypad and display lights will flash. If the caller can be identified, the callerâÂÂs name or phone number, and the text Calling will be displayed. 2 To answer th e call, press . You can answer th e call even while using the search or menu functions. If you do not w ant to answer the call, simply press . The caller wi ll hear the alerting tone change to a busy tone. 3 After the conversation, end the call by pressin g . To manage ca lls The re are a nu mber of f unct ions you c an use during a call . To access t he functions, simply press Options , scroll to the function and press Sele ct . Menu â You can access Menu . Answer â Y ou can answer an incoming call. Reje ct â Y ou can reject an incoming call. Reco rd â Y ou can record your conversation with this option. See âÂÂRecorder (Menu 6)â on page 164. Hold / Unhold â Hold allows you to put the current call on hold, so that another call can be made. The original call can be activated again by selecting Unhold . If the held call is the only call, you can unhold it by pressing or the Unhold command. Swap â This function makes a he ld call active and put a currently active call on hold. Y ou can thus alternate be tween two calls. New call â Puts the active call on hold and dials a new phone number . Send DTMF â Trans m its DTMF tones. See âÂÂTo send D TMF tonesâ on page 152. End this call â Ends the ac tive call. End all calls â Ends both the active and the held call. Mute / Unmute â Switches the microphone of th e communicator off or on. If the communicator is connected to a handsfree car kit, Mute als o turns of f the microphone of the car kit. Confer ence â If you have one call active and another call on h old, this option merges th em into a con ference call. Confer ence / One to one â Conference includes a new participant in a conference call. During a confe rence call, One to one allows yo u to convers e privately with a selected participant. Tran sfe r â The voic e call tran sfer enables you to co nnect two vo ice call s
Phone 151 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. togeth er and d isconnect yourself from bot h calls. See âÂÂMul tiple call sâ on pag e 62. N ote tha t not all netw ork operato rs suppo rt thi s functi on. Data â When you h ave an alternating call active, this option changes the mode of the call from voice to fax. Se e âÂÂMultiple callsâ on page 62. V oice â W hen you have an alternating call active, this optio n changes the mode of the call from fax to voice. Play last â Plays th e last recording made with the recorder . The other party will also hear the recording. To search for phone numbers Y o u may fe tch ph one num bers from me mory by the n ame with whic h the re quired phone nu mber was store d. Note that the phone uses memory (S IM or Teleph one) whic h is cho sen i n the Telephon e appl icati on by pres sing Me nu and Select . 1 Press Names . 2 Key in the name of the person whom you want to call, or the first letter(s) of the name. 3 Press OK . The name closest to the ke yed in characters will appear. 4 If the name found was not the one you searched for, scroll th r ough the names with or until you reach the correct one. 5 To call the person, press . If the person has severa l phone numbers, scroll the selection frame onto the on e you want a nd press . To view the phone number stored with the name 1 When the desired name is on th e display, press Detail . Th e phone number is displayed. If the person has several phone numbers, scroll through the numbers with or until you reach th e correct on e . 2 To call the number, pre ss . To use sp eed dialling Speed diall ing is a handy way to cal l frequentl y-used phone n umbers. You can define up to eight speed dial numbers in t he communicator memory . For informat ion on how to set spe ed dials, see âÂÂTo make contact car dsâ on page 51. 1 Key in the n umber of the speed dial location wh ere you have stored the Tip: If you have one active and one held call, press Swap to make the he ld call active and to put th e currently active call on hold. I n this way, you may converse with one party withou t ending the other call. You can also press to swap between the calls if no numbers have been keyed in.
Phone 152 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. phone number . 2 Pre ss . The p hone will display th e phone number br iefly, an d then dial it. Speed dialling i s not possible during a call. Last numb er redial The communicator stores the last ph one numbers you have dialled. 1 If ther e are any character s on the display, clear the display by p ressing . 2 Press . T he last dialled number will appear on the display. 3 You can scroll the numbers with or until the desired number is displayed. 4 Press to dial the number. Y ou can also recall recent received calls and recent missed calls, see âÂÂCall register (Menu 2)â on page 156. To send DTMF tones If yo u nee d to s en d lo ng DT MF st r ing s , it i s mo r e c on ve ni en t t o se nd t he m v i a the communicator in terface, see âÂÂMultiple callsâ on page 62. To send DTMF tones manual ly 1 Make a call to the desired phone number. 2 Key in the digits you want to send as DTMF tones. The digits are sent on e by one to the network. DTMF tones ca n be transmitted even when the phone key click is set off . Keypad l ock The keypad lock prevents the keypad keys being accidentally pressed when the communicator is, for e xample, in your pocket. When the keypad is locked, you can answer calls normally by pr e ssing . During a call, the keypad is unlocked and the communicator can be operated in the usual way . After t h e call, the keypad is automatically locked again. The keypad will be automatically unlocked when the communicator is connected to a car kit. When th e communicator is removed from the car kit, without having been switched off, the keypad will be locked automatically again. Note: Number 1 is the speed dial location of your voice m ailbox. To call your voice mailbox, press 1 and then , or ju st press and hold 1 .
Phone 153 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To lock the keypad 1 Press Menu and then the key within 3 seconds. While the keypad is locked, the icon and the Unlock command are displayed. To un lock th e keyp ad 1 Press Unlock and then the key within 3 secon ds. Help Most menu functions are provided with a help text, which gives a b rief description of the displayed function. To vi ew the he lp tex t 1 Scroll to the menu function a bout which you want help. 2 Wait for 10 seconds. The first page of the help text will appear. The text scrolls automatically. However, if you want to scroll it manually, press the scroll keys or Mo re . 3 To exit from the help function, pre ss Back . To use the menus The phone offers a set of menu functions that allow you to tailor the phone to your particular use. I n each menu and submenu, y ou can check and alter th e settings of functions. The menus a n d submenus can be entered by scr olli ng the menu or using t h e appropriate shortcuts. You can access the me nu fun ctions even during a call. To scroll the menus 1 Press Menu . 2 Press either or to scroll the list of menus until you reach the desired menu. 3 Press Select to enter the menu . If the menu contains any submen us, reach the one you want with either or . 4 Press Select . T he selection frame is on th e curr ent setting. Note: When the keypad is locked, calls may be possible to the emergency number programmed into your communicator (e.g. 112 or other official emerge ncy number).
Phone 154 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 5 Scroll the list of setting op tions until the selection frame is on the desired option. 6 Press OK to selec t th e option. If you do not want to change the s e tting, you can return to th e pr evious menu level by pressi ng Back . To use m enu shortcu ts All the menus, submenus and settings are numbered. This number is shown in the upper right corner of the display . 1 Press Menu . 2 Key in the num ber of the main menu under which the desired submenu is located. 3 Key in the number of the submenu where the fu nction can be found. 4 Key in the number of the desired setting option. For instance, to change the incoming call alert in the general profile to ring only once (Me nu 3-1 -2-1-3) : press Menu to enter the menu facility , 3 to enter the Profiles menu, 1 to select the G e neral profile, 2 to personalise the profile, 1 to modify th e alert tones, and 3 to select Ring on ce . To exit from the menu 1 Press or press and hold Back . Menu structure The following menu table lists the names of the main menus and their submenus. Third-level menus are not shown here. Menu Function Submenus MENU 1 MESSAGES 1 Received short messa ges, 2 Info service, 3 Servi ce command editor, 4 V oice messages MENU 2 CALL REGIST ER 1 Miss ed calls , 2 Receive d calls , 3 Dialled c alls, 4 Erase re cent call lis ts, 5 Show c all duration , 6 Show call co sts , 7 Call cost settings MENU 3 PROFILES 1 General, 2 Sile nt, 3 Meeting, 4 O utdoor, 5 Pager, 6 Flight, 7 Headse t, 8 Car MENU 4 SETTINGS 1 Call settings, 2 Phone settings, 3 Security settings, 4 Restore factory settings MENU 5 CALL DIVERT 1 Divert all voice ca lls, 2 Divert when busy, 3 Divert when no t answered, 4 Divert if not rea chable, 5 Divert all fax calls, 6 Divert all data calls, 7 Cancel all diverts MENU 6 R ECORDER
Phone 155 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Some menu functions are network ser vices, indicated by the sym bol in the menu table. T o use such a function, your n e twork must su ppor t it and you must subscribe to it. Note that network ser vices are specific to each SIM card. If you change the SI M card, and you have not obtained the service for the ne w card, you will not be able to us e the service. Messag es (Menu 1) The Short Message Service (SMS) is a network service. Contact your serv ice provider for details. The phone can be used for listening to voice messages in voice mailboxes and for reading received short messages. However , reading short messages is more convenient via the larger display of the communicator interface. To send short messa ge s, use the SMS application of the communicator . Received short messag es (Menu 1- 1) When you r eceive a short message, the text Message received and the indicator will be displayed a n d a ton e will sound, u n less the communicator is set to a silen t pr ofile. A note is also shown when you receive faxes or mail. To read received faxes or mail, you must use the r espective applications of the communicator interface. 1 To read the message immediately, press Read . To read the mes sage later, press Exit . 2 Press Read again to view the received message . The messages are li sted in the or der they wer e received. To r ead the se cond message on the list, pr e ss to s elect it and then press Read . Once you have read the message, you can press Back or Op tion . The options available in the ph on e are: Erase â Erases the s elected message f rom the memory. Use numb er â Copies the phone number from the messa ge and m o ves it onto the phone display . Y ou can now call t he number with . Details â Shows the senderâÂÂs name or number , the date and time the message was se nt, and the n umber of th e message cen tre. Info servic e (M enu 1- 2) This network service allows you to receive short messages on various topics. Y ou may read messa ge s on topics th at you have pre-defined on th e communicator interface, see âÂÂSMS settingsâ on page 82. 1 Press Select to view the list of available choices. Tip: You can dial the phone number in the message by pressing while viewin g the messa ge.
Phone 156 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 2 Use or to scroll through the choice list. To get a list of messages, press Read . Pressing Select gives you the follow ing options: On â Sets info m e ssage reception on. Off â Turns info message reception off. Topic index â Fetches a list of available topics from the network. Read â Shows a list of received info messages. Scroll to the one you want to read and press OK . Language â Sets the language for the messages. Scroll to the desired language and press Mark . Servic e command edit or (Menu 1-3) In this menu, you can sen d service requests, such as activation commands for network services, to your service pr ovider . Key in the sequence you w ant, and press Send . Voice mess ages (Menu 1-4) Listen to voice messages (Menu 1- 4-1) When you enter this menu, the com municator dials the phone number stored in menu 1-4-2. If required, key in the access code for your mailbox or answering machine when the connection has bee n made. Voice mailbo x number (Menu 1-4-2) The phone number that you enter h e re will be dialled when you sel ect the Listen to voice mess ages function in Menu 1-4-1. A voice m ailbox can be a network service or you r personal answering machine. Y ou may enter a new or edit an existing phone number . The number will be used until you change the n umber again. Call re gister ( Menu 2) In this menu, you can check and erase ph on e numbers of calls that you h ave missed (Menu 2-1), received (Menu 2-2) or dialled (Menu 2-3). N ote that the Received calls and Missed ca l ls functions are network services which work only in networks that allow you to view th e callerâ s phone number . Note: The communicator on l y registers missed calls when the phone is switched on and within network coverage.
Phone 157 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Erase recent call lists (Menu 2-4) Caut ion: The phone numbers are erased without warning. You cannot undo the operation. Show call duration ( Menu 2-5) In this menu, you can view the duration of you r outgoing and incoming calls and reset the tim e rs. Last call dur ation (Menu 2-5- 1) Shows the duration of the last outgoin g or incoming call in hours, minutes and sec onds, e.g. 00:02:15 . All call sâ duration (M enu 2-5-2) Shows the total duration of all calls made or r eceived with any SIM card that you have used w ith the communicator. Received c allsâ du ration (Menu 2-5 -3) Shows the total duration of calls received with an y SIM card that you have used with the communicator. Dial led cal lsâ dur ati on (Men u 2-5- 4) Shows the total duration of calls made with any SIM card that you have used with the communicator. Clear timer s (Menu 2-5-5) Resets all timers. There is no way to undo the reset operation. Show call costs (Menu 2-6) This network service allows y ou to check various ca ll costs. The costs are shown in charging un its or units of currency that you ha ve set in Menu 2-7-2. The call cost is shown for each SIM card separately . For th ese settings you need the PIN2 code. Contact your ser vice provider for m ore information. Last call co st (Menu 2-6-1) Shows the cost of t h e last, or curr e nt, call. All call sâ cost (Menu 2-6- 2) Shows the total cost of all calls made with the current SIM card. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls and services by your ser vice provider may vary, depending u pon network features, rounding-off f or billing, taxes and so for th.
Phone 158 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Clear coun ters (Menu 2-6-3) Resets all cost counters. Resetting requires the PIN2 c ode . This service is not available with SIM cards that do not support the PIN2 code. There is no way to undo the r eset operation. Call c ost set tings (Men u 2-7) Call costs â limit (Menu 2-7-1 ) This function allows you to limit the total costs of outgoing calls to a specified number of charging units or units of the currency that you have set in Menu 2-7-2. For this service you n eed the PIN2 code. Changi ng the call co st li mit also requi res t he PIN 2 code. To tur n the limit o n, selec t On . Key in the cost limit in c har ging units or currency units. If you define the li mit in cur r ency units, yo u can press or to ins ert a decim al point. After the limit has been turned on, th e number of th e remaining units is shown on the display when in idle mode. When all units h ave been used, no calls can be made. To turn the limit off, select Off . Show costs i n (Menu 2 -7-2) You may select whether the call costs an d call cost limits will be displayed in currency or charging u n its. Contact your n e twork operator for the prices of charging units. Changing the call cost unit requires the PIN 2 code. To show the li mits in currency u nits, select Currency , or Units to show the limits i n charging units. If you select ed Curren cy , key in the charging unit price. Use or to insert a decima l point. Ne xt, enter the currency name. Profil es (Menu 3) The profile settings are used for selecting the operating environment for the communicator , and for modifying the profile features. One profile is always in use. To set on a prof ile 1 Press Menu . 2 Scroll with and to Profiles and press Select . Note: In some networks calls t o the emergency numbe r programmed into your communicator (e.g. 112 or other of f icial emergency number) may be made even if there are n o charging units left.
Phone 159 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 3 Scroll to the desired profile, for example Meeting . 4 Press Opti ons . 5 Scroll to Activate and press OK . The name of the selecte d profile is shown on the display, except when the general profile is selected. For more information about the diffe rent profiles, see âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. To change the profi le settings 1 Go to the Profiles menu an d press Select . 2 Scroll to the desired profile and press Options . 3 Scroll to Personalise and press OK . For more infor m ation about the various profile settings, see âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. Settings (Menu 4) Call settings (Men u 4-1) Anykey answer (Menu 4-1-1) When set on, you can answ e r an incomin g call by pressing any key on the phone keypad, except or . Automatic redialli ng (Menu 4 -1-2) When this function is set on an d you call a number that is busy or does n ot answer, the communicator will attempt to call the number until the call is connected. Press to end the call attempts. Speed dialling (Me nu 4-1-3) When set on, you can dial phone numbers stored in the speed dial locations by simply pressing and holding the assigned speed dial key. Call waitin g (Menu 4-1-4 ) Call waiting is a n etwork service. Contact your operator for su bscription. See âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. Tip: A qu ick way to set on a pr ofile is to press the ke y on the phone keypad. Press the key again u ntil the selection frame is on the desired profile. To select the profile, press and hold .
Phone 160 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Choose Activate to enable call waiting, Cancel to disable call waiting, or Status to show ca l l types with wh ich call w aiting may be used. Own number s ending (Menu 4-1-5) You can set your phone number to be displayed or hidden from the recipient of your call. This function works only in ne tw orks that allow you to view callersâ phone nu mbers, provided that this service h as been activated for your SIM card. Do not use this function unless it has been activated for you r SIM card. Choose Pr eset , On, Of f , Next on , or Next off. Preset selects the setting, On or Off , that y ou have agreed upon with your network operator. When you change the SI M card, the Pr eset settin g is automatically selected. Phone line i n use (Menu 4-1-6) If your network supports this service, you can have two phone lines in your commun icato r. You c an sele ct which l ine you wa nt to us e for mak ing cal ls. For more information, see âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. Phone settings (Me n u 4-2) Clock (Menu 4 -2-1) You can select whether the tim e is shown on the display. Cell i nfo display (Me nu 4-2-2) When t his f unction i s set on, the ph one wil l indic ate whe n it is u sing a network cell b ased on Mi cro-Cellular Network te chnology. T he setting w ill remain in ef fect even if the SI M card is changed or the phon e is switched off . Name list (Menu 4 -2-3) When searching for names and numbers, you can select whether to show three names, or one name at a time on the display. List of ow n numbers (Menu 4-2-4 ) You can store and manage phone numbers assigned to your SIM card. This function is a memory aid, from which you can ch eck your own phone numbe rs. Welcome no te (Menu 4-2-5) You can write a message of up to 36 c haracters which appears on the display when you switch on the phone. Note: The communicator consumes m ore power when the Cel l info display is on.
Phone 161 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 1 Scroll to the W elcome note settin g and press Select . 2 Key in the message. 3 Press Opti ons and scroll to Save and press OK . Network selection (Me nu 4-2-6) The communicator can be s e t to select automatically one of the cellular networks available in your area. You ma y also select th e desir ed network manually in this menu. When the Automatic option is sele cted, the communicator tries to utilise the network on wh ich it was last registered. Outside of the home netwo rk service area, the communicator will select one of the networks that have a roaming agreement with the home network. In th e Manual mode, when you pick up a n etwork manually from the network list, the communicator will always attempt to register on that network. If the communicator cannot reach, or loses contact w ith, the selected network, you ar e prompted to select another network. Security settings (Me nu 4-3) The purpo se of the security sy stem is to pr event unauthor ised use or altering of important settings. In most cases, activating or changing the security options requires the appropriate access code. Se e âÂÂSecurityâ on page 127. PIN co de requ est (M enu 4- 3-1) On or Of f . See âÂÂSecurityâ on page 127. Voice call barring (Me nu 4-3-2) Call barring is a network service; contact your operator for su bscription. See âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. 1 Scroll to one of the following ba rr ing modes and pr ess Select . All outgoing calls Tip: Network selection comes in hand y when you w ant to select a particular network, e.g. due to lower call charges. Note: When s ecurity feat ures which restrict calls are in use (call diverting, call barring, fixed dialling, closed user gr oup, or system lock), calls may be possible to cer tain emergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 112 or oth er official emerge ncy number).
Phone 162 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. All international calls International exce pt to home country All incoming calls Incoming calls when abroad Cancel all barrings 2 If you want to take th e selected barring mode into use, scroll to Activate ; if you want to disable the selected barring mode, select Canc el , or if you want to check the status of the barring mode, sele ct Status , and press OK . Fixed dialling (Menu 4-3-3) You may restrict your outgoing calls to a pre-determined set of phone numbers, if supported by your SIM card. When the f unction is set on, you can only call a phone number which is included in the fixed dialling list or which begins with the same di gits as a ph on e number on the list. You are prompted for the PIN2 code when you try to put Fixed dialling on or off, or if you wish to delete, add or edit any phone number on th e fixed dialling list. If you select Numbers , the foll owing options become available: Search , Add entry or Erase all . If you select Add entry , you are required to en ter your PIN2 code and key in both the name and number you wish to a dd to the fixed dialling list. To edit or erase a phone num ber on the fixed dialling list, select Search and key in the name of the person , or th e first letter(s) of the name. Press OK and Detail to view the numbe r. Select Options , enter your PIN2 code and you are given the choice of either Edit and Erase . Close d use r group ( Menu 4-3-4 ) This network service allows you to set th e communicator to accept calls to and from a selected group of people. For details o n creating a u ser group and activating this service, contact your network operator . You may be a member of up to 10 user groups. Select one of th e following options: Preset â Uses a user group that the S IM card owner has agreed upon with the network operator. On â Uses a particular user group. Calls can be made to or received from the members of the selected group only. Off â Calls can be made and received in the normal way. You can use th is option only if you a re entitle d to do so. Note: The SIM card contents cannot be accessed if the Fixed dialling is on.
Phone 163 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. SIM change secur ity (Menu 4-3-5) The same settings can be found in the Security settings. See âÂÂSecurityâ on page 127. Change access c odes (Me nu 4-3-6) In this submenu, you can c hange the lock code, the PIN code, the PIN2 code and the barring password. Se e âÂÂSecurityâ on page 127 . The access codes may only include the digits 0 to 9. System lock (Menu 4-3- 7) To lock the communicator, press Select and enter yo ur lock code. The communicator locks immediately. Even if you remove an d r eplace the battery and switch on the phon e, the communicator will remain locked. To unlock the commun i cator, press Unlock and enter the lock code. Restore facto ry settings (Menu 4-4) Y ou can reset the settings of the menu functions to their original values. When you activate this setting, you will be prompted for your five-digit lock code. This function will not affect stored phone numbers and names, access codes, earpiece volume setting, call timers , cost counters, selected application tones or short messages. Call dive rt (Me nu 5) The call divert network service allows you to direct your in coming voice calls to another phone number when you do not want to be disturbed, or when the phone is switched off or outside the network coverage area. The call diverting functions are described in more detail in âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. 1 Scroll to one of the following diver t options and press Select : Divert all voice calls Divert when busy Divert when not answered Divert if not reachable Divert all fax calls Divert all data calls Cancel all diver ts 2 Scroll to Activate . You will be asked for the phone number to which you wish to divert th e incoming calls. The Cance l option sets the divert mode off. Status shows what kind of calls are being diver ted.
Phone 164 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Reco rder (Men u 6) With the Recorder you can record your te lephone conversations and voice memos, and listen to them . The maximum length of a r ecording is 30 seconds. See also âÂÂV oice reco rderâ on page 144. To record your own speech 1 In th e Record er menu , press Select . 2 Scroll to Record and press Select . 3 To stop the r ecording, press Stop . To reco rd your Tel ephone con versation 1 When you have an active call, press Rec ord . When the recordi ng starts, you will hear a t one. 2 To stop the r ecording, press Stop . To record your telephone conversation when you have more than one call 1 If you h ave for example one call active and another on hold, press Options . 2 Scroll to Recor d and press Select . W hen the recording starts, you will h ear a tone. 3 To stop the r ecording, press Stop . To play a re cording 1 In th e Record er menu , press Select . 2 Scroll to Lis t and pr e ss Se le ct . 3 Scroll to the recording you want to listen to, press Option s an d the n Play . To play a recording when you have an active call 1 Press Op tion . 2 Scroll to Play last and press Select . Or, if you want to play an older record- ing, follow the steps above. The other party will also hear the recording. Note: Local laws may apply to recording conversations. Do not use this feature illegally.
Troubleshooting 165 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 15. Troubleshooting Tip: Club Nokia Careline answers questions and off e rs instructions over the phone. Y ou can visit http://club .nokia.com to find the Club Nokia Careline phone numbers. See also the Accessories guide for further information on Cl ub Nokia Careline. Y ou can also visit Nokia Wireless Dat a Forum at http:// www .forum.nokia.com for information and support material related to the communicator . 1. Phone or communicator interface doe s not start; both displays remain bl ank Make sure that th e battery is properly installed and charged. Make sure that the contacts on the battery and the charging stand are clean. The battery charge may be too low for oper ation. Check the display and listen for the low battery warning tones. Charge the battery as described in âÂÂBatteryâ on page 27. If the NOT CHARGING m essage is displayed, th e charging is suspended. In that case, check that the temperature of th e battery is not above 45ðC ( 1 13ðF). Wait for a while, disconnect the charger , connect it again a n d retry . If ch arging still fails, contact your loca l Nokia dealer . 2. Power comes on, but the phon e does not work Reboot the communicator by removing th e battery and r eplacing it aga i n. Try charging the communicator . If you see the battery charging in dicator on the phone but the phone does not wor k, contact your loc al Nokia dealer . Check the field strength indicator: you might be outside th e network service area. See the answer to pr oblem number 6. Make sure that the tele phone service is activated for your SIM car d. Check if there is an error message on the display after switching on. If so, contact your loca l dealer. Check that the SIM card is cor rectly installed, see âÂÂFir st start-upâ on page 17. 3. Communicator interface does not activate or applicatio ns stop respondi ng Close the cover and ope n it aga in . If this does not help, close the cover and remove the battery . Repl ace the battery and open the cover again. Wait while the communicator performs a self-test and starts. Tr y charging the communicator . See also problem 4.
Troubleshooting 166 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 4. Internal memory o r system errors Sometimes, for example, removing the battery in m id-operation may cause errors in the file system of the communicator . If you receive inter nal memory or system error messages and/or reboot pr om pts, or if the device does n ot respond to commands normally , resetting the communicator helps you recover from most of these problems. Try the reset operations in the order they have been listed: if checking the file system doe s not help, try removing temporary files, or format the file system. To reset the communicator 1 Close the cover. 2 Remove the battery. 3 Remo ve the memo ry card if i nserted. 4 Place the connector end of the battery in the battery cavity, but do not press the other end in pla ce yet. Do n ot let the batter y slip from its place. The connector end is the one with the four metal strips. 5 Open the cover. 6 Press and hold down the required key combi nation (see below in this topic 4) and simultaneously push the battery end of the communicator down, so that the battery clicks into place. Hold down the keys until you see progress messages or a confirmation prompt on the display. 7 In some cases you must confirm the action by pressing a command button. After the reset, the communica tor will reboot a n d start n ormally . To check the f ile syst em Symptoms: The Memory application in the System application gr oup shows too much (over 2 megabytes) or too little memory , even if you have j ust removed some documents, or the com m unicator applications crash when opening a document. Key combination: Shift-T ab-left arrow Caution: If there are problems in the file system, th e corrupted files w ill be removed. If there ar e no problems, this operation does not affect any documents or settings. To remove temporary files Symptoms: The communicator is in a reboot cycle or a note saying that an .ini file is corrupted is displayed. Key combination: Shift-T ab-right arrow Caution: All temporary files will be removed. The Docu ment outbox will be cleared, the default application settings restor ed, but for example, the SMS message centre number , Internet access point and Remote mailbox settings will be lost. Stored documents will not be affected.
Troubleshooting 167 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To format the f ile system Symptoms: The commu n icator is in a reboot cycle or does not boot up. First, check that you r battery is not empty . Key com bin ation: Shift-Ta b- F Caut ion: Formats the file system. All data you have entered will be lost. This operation will restore your communicator to the state it w as in at the time of purchase. Remember that backed up da ta can be restored in all cases . If these measures do not help, contact your local dealer . 5. Cannot make or receive calls Make sure that the ph one is n o t off. Close the cover an d switch on the phone. If you get the message INVALID SIM CARD, your SIM cannot be used in the communicator . Contact you dealer or network operator . Check the status of your call barrings and diverts, see âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 65. The phone may be busy: data or fax is being sent or received, or the communicator is being used as a fax modem. Wait for the data/fax transmission to end, or drop the call by pressing the key on the phone keypad. 6. Ca ll qua lity is poor Y our location may not allow better call quality . This pr oblem may occur especially in a moving car or train . Move to a location where the radio signal reception is better . See âÂÂFacts about cellular data transmissionâ on page 14. Reception is usually better above ground level, outdoors and while stationary . Sometimes even moving the communicator slightly will im prove reception. Y ou can also try using the communicator in the handsfree mode, see âÂÂHandsfree modeâ on p age 6 1. Remember to turn the antenna t o an upright position. 7. Cannot d ivert or bar voice , fax or data calls Y ou may have not subscribed to the service in question, or it is not supported by the network, or the message centre number and the number to which you want to divert your calls may be missing or incorrect. Fax diverts and barr in gs are set in the settings of the Fax application. Data barring is set in the Internet settings. Data calls cannot be diver ted. 8. Cannot select a contact If you cannot select a contact in th e Telephone, Fax, SMS or Mail directory , the contact card does not have a telephone number , fax number , wireless phone number or an e-mail address. Add the missing information to the contact card in the Contacts application .
Troubleshooting 168 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 9. Cannot send or recei ve faxes, short messages or mail Make sure that you have subscribed to these n etwork services. The p hone may be off , or the com municator is low on memo ry . See pr oblem 16. The number format you use may be invalid, or the called number has not answered within 10 tries, or you are calling to a wrong phone number . The phon e may be busy: data or fax is being sen t or receive d, the communicat or is bein g used as a fax m odem. Wait for the data/fax transmission to end, or drop the call b y pressing the key on the p hone keypad. Fax/data barrings or fax diverts may be active. Fax barrings/diverts are set in the settings of the Fax a ppl ication, data barrings are set in th e Internet settings. Fax reception: Y our SIM card may not have a f a x number . Mail reception: Y our SIM card may not hav e a phone number fo r data connections. Contact your service provider . Mail sending : Y ou have not subscribed to a remote mailbox service, or the mail server delivering your mail does not comply with the SMTP pr otocol. Contact your e-mail ser vice provider . If you are using the Upon request sending option, mail must be sent in the Document outbox, see âÂÂTo send mailâ on page 92. If you have problem s sending mail with attachments, select Canc el Send ing and try again. If this does not help, try the key combination Shift-T ab- right arrow . Some mail attachments ca n take up a significant amount of memory and therefore freeing some memory by deleting something from your communicator memory might also h el p. Short message sendin g: You have not subscribed to the Sh or t Message Service or the message centre number is missing or incorrect. Contact your service provider . The reason for failure may also de pend on the network: the network does not support SMS, fax, or data/mail; the network is out of order or busy; the field strength is not adequate for sen ding. 10. Cann ot establis h a Terminal o r Internet conn ection The Internet, Mail, WWW , or T e rminal settings and configurations may be missing or incorrect. C heck your Internet access point configuration s in the Internet main settings. Contact you r Internet service provider f or the correct settings. See âÂÂInternet settingsâ on page 86 . If you receive internal error messages, remove and replace the battery and try again. If the problem persists, see problem 4. If you receive service provider error messages when connecting to your Remote mailbox, contact your remote mailbox ser vice provider . Y ou r Remote mailbox may contain corrupted mail messages or the mail server settings may be incorrect.
Troubleshooting 169 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 11. In frared proble m s The communicator may be connected to a PC, laptop, printer , digital camera, wireless phone or another communicator via the infrared link. If you are using the PC Suite for Nokia 91 1 0 Communicator program on your PC, or if you want to receive data from another communicator or a digital camera, you will have to start the Infrared activation application on your communicator before the connection is made. See âÂÂInfrared activationâ on page 13 1. If you are using the Nokia Communicator Server program on the PC, the infrared connection is established automa tically when you u se one of the PC connectivity applications of the communicator . The PC to which you want to establish the connection must have an IrDA compatible infrared port; installed and activated IrDA drivers; and Microsoft Windows 95. For more information on IrDA drivers and th eir use in Windows 95, con tact Mi cro sof t. For further information, see the Documentation s e ction on the CD-ROM in th e sales package of the communicator . 12. Pr intin g prob lems If you are using the infrared connection, the infrared port of th e printer must be compatible to the I rDA standard. See âÂÂDocument featuresâ on page 34. If you fail to establish an infrared connection, tr ansfer the file to a PC and use the PC to print the docu ment. Alternatively , you can fax the document to th e nearest fax machine . See âÂÂTo send faxesâ on page 7 1. Check that yo ur printin g settings are correct, see â System settin gsâ on page 1 25. Y ou may be us ing an incorrec t printer driv er , see âÂÂDocumen t featuresâ on pa ge 34. 13. PC connectivity problems Make sure that the correct PC connectivity program is installed and running on your PC. Se e chapter 4 "Computer connectivity" on page 39. Check the cable or infrared connection used. If you use an infrared connection, the IR ports must be f acing each other . Check that you are u s ing the correct COM port. 14. Fax modem p roblems When you u se the commu nicator as a f ax modem, make sure tha t the communicator and the PC use the same baud rate. If you use the infrared connection, the baud rate is set automatically . If you use the cable connection, set the baud r a te in the F ax modem settings. For the PC, the baud rate is set in t he conn ectivity software of the PC. If you use the cable connection, fully compatible oper ation with all PC fax and terminal software cannot be guaranteed. Consult your dealer . If you have problems with your PC fax software, use the infra r ed connection.
Troubleshooting 170 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. If you have problems establishing a data connection with the remote m odem, try fixing the data tra n smission rate by u sing an AT command. C ommon A T commands based on the ETSI 0 7.0 7 standard and supported by the Nokia 9 1 1 0 Communicator are listed in the atcomm.txt file on the diskette supplied with the communicator . For information on how to use the AT commands, consult the documentation of the tele communication or fax application that you use on your PC. 15. Access code problems The lock code is included in the sales package of the communicator . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your communicator dealer . If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network operator . For information about Internet or T erminal passwords, contact your Internet service provider . 16. Lo w on mem ory If you notice that the memory of your communicator is getting low , or you receive a warning note about insufficient memory , ch eck the Memory application. 1 Press Detail s to see w hat kind of data takes up most memory. See âÂÂMemoryâ on page 130. 2 Make a backup of a l l important dat a. 3 Remove ite ms which use a lot of memory, such as documents, received faxes, or old calendar data, either manually or with the Data removal application. See âÂÂMemoryâ on page 130. Or you can transfer th e items to your memor y card. 17. Distorted characters in Terminal If the data bits/stop bits / parity settings ar e different from those defin e d to the data service by the oper ator , characters may look distorted on the d isplay . 18. ISDN connection If you use an ISDN connection, go to the Internet settings and select In ternet access . Select the access point you use or define a new one. In the Adv a nc e d settings , go to Modem initialisation . Enter the AT command A T CBST =7 1 on the dotted line. Note: Downloaded images, received faxes, and recordings may take up significant amounts of m emory space.
Care and main tenance 171 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 16. Care and maintenance Y our Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be tr eated with care. The suggestions below will help you to fulfil any warranty obligations and to enjoy this product for many years. When using your communicator , battery , charger OR any accessory: Keep it and all its parts and accessories out of small children's reach . Keep it dry . Precipitation, humidity and liqu ids contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. Do not use or store it in dusty , dirty areas. Its moving parts can be damaged. Do not store it in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics . Do not store it in cold areas. W hen the communicator warms up (to its n ormal temperature), moisture can form inside the communicator , wh ich may damage electronic circuit board s. Do not attempt to open it. Non-expe rt handling of the device may damage it. Do not drop, knock or shake it. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards. Do not use har sh chemicals, cleanin g solvents, or st rong detergents to clean it. Wipe it with a soft cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution. Do not paint it. P aint can clog the deviceâÂÂs moving parts and prevent p roper operation. Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorised antennas, modifications or attachments could damage the communicator and may violate regulation s governing radio devices. If the communicator , battery , charger or any accessory is not working properly , take it to your nearest qu alified service facility . The personnel there will assist you a nd, if neces sary , arra nge for servi ce.
Care and main tenance 172 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved.
Impor tant safety infor mation 173 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. 17. Important safety information Traffic safety Do not use a communicator while driving a vehicle. I f using a communicator , park the vehicle first. Always secure the comm u nicator in its holder; do not place the communicator on the passenger seat or wh ere it can break loose in a collision or sudden stop. The use of an alert device to ope rate a vehicle's lights or horn on public roads is not permitted. Rememb er road safety al ways comes first! Operat ing environm ent Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and a lw ays switch off the p hone of your communicator w henever it is forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or danger . When connecting th e communicator or any accessory to an other device, read its userâÂÂs guide for detailed safety instructions. Do n ot connect incompatible products. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for the satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of pe rsonnel, it is recommended that the e quipment should only be u sed in the normal operating position (held to your ear with th e antenna pointing ov e r your shoulder). Do not point the infrared be am at anyoneâÂÂs eye or allow it to interfer e with other infrared devices. Electronic devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radio frequ ency (RF) signals. However , certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from you r communicator . P acemakers: P acemaker manu facturers recomm end that a minim u m separation of 20 cm (6 inches) be maintained between a hand-held wireless phone and a pacemaker to av oid potential interference with the pacemaker . These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless T echnology Research. P ersons with pacemakers: Should always keep the communicator more than 20 cm (6 inches) from their pacemaker when the ph on e is switched on; Should not carry the communicator in a breast pocket; Should use the e ar opposite the pacemaker to minimise the pote ntial for in-
Impor tant safety infor mation 174 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. terfer ence. If you have any reason to suspect that interference is tak ing place, switch off the phone of your communicator immediately . Hearing aids: Some digital wireless phones may interfere w ith some hearing aids. In the even t of such interference, you m ay want to consult your service provider . Other med ical devices: O peration of any radio tra n smitting equipment, including communicators, may interfere with the fu nction ality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the m edical device to determine if the y are adequately shielded from exte rnal RF energy or if you have any qu estions. Switch off the phone of your communicator in health care facilities when any regulations posted in th ese areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be usin g equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy . Veh i c le s : RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles (e.g. electronic fuel injection systems, electronic anti-skid (anti-lock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, air bag systems). Ch e ck with the manufacturer or its representa tive regarding your vehicle. You should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to you r vehicle. Posted f acili ties : Switch off the phone of your communicator in any facility where posted n otices so require. Pot enti ally e xplos ive a tmos pher es Switch off the phone of your communicator w hen in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could caus e an explosion or fire r esulting in bodily injury o r even death. Users are advised to switch off the phone whe n at a refuelling point (service station). Users are rem inded of the need to obser ve restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel stor age and distribution areas), chemical plants or wh ere blasting operations are in progre ss. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats; chemical transfer or storage facilities; vehicles using liquified petroleum gas (su ch as propane or butane); areas where the air contains chemicals or par ticle s, such as grain, dust or metal powders; and any other area where you would normally be ad vised to turn off your vehicle engine. Vehicles Only qualified personnel should service th e communicator , or install the communicator in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty which may apply to t he unit. Check regularly that all wireless phone equ ipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly .
Impor tant safety infor mation 175 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases or expl osive materials in the same compartment as the communicator , its parts or accessories. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remem be r that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including both installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over th e air bag or in the air bag de ployment area. If in- vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Switch off the phone of your com m unicator before boarding an air craft. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the oper ation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network an d may be illegal. Failure to observe these instructions may lead to suspension or denial of telephone services to th e offender , or legal action or both. Emergency calls IMPORT ANT! The Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator , like any wireless phone, operates using radio signals, wireless and landline networks as well as user-programmed functions which cannot guarantee connection in all conditions. Therefore you should never rely solely upon any wireless phone for essential communications (e.g. medical emergencies). Remember , to make or receive any calls th e phone must be swi tched on and in a service area with adequate signal strength. Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless phone networks or when certain networ k services and/ or phone features are in use. Check with local service providers. To make an emergency call 1 If the device cover is open, close the co ver. 2 If the phone is not on, switch it on by pressing the key. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the communic ator . 3 Press and hold the key for several seconds to ready the phone for calls, and to end poss ibl e active data or fax calls. 4 Key in the em ergency number for your present lo cation (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). Emergency numbers vary by location . 5 Press the key. If certain features are in use (call barring, fixed dialling, closed user group, system lock, keypad lock, etc.), you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this document and your local cellular service provider. When making an emergency call, remember to give all the necessary information as accurat e ly as possible. Remember that your communicator may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident - do not cut off the call until given permission to do so.
Impor tant safety infor mation 176 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. To use this manu al The wireless phone described in this manual is approved for use in the GSM netw orks. A number of features included in this manual are ca lle d network services. They are special services provided by wireless service provider s. Before you can take advantage of any of these network services, y ou must subscribe to the service(s) you require from your ho m e service provider and obta in instructions for their use. Y ou can then activate these functions as described in this manual. The manual activation commands for various services ar e not presented in this manual (e.g., using the and characters for activating or deactivating services). The Nokia 9 1 10 Com municator , nevertheless, is capable of handling commands given in that for m. For these commands, please consult with your service providers. WAR NING! This apparatus is i ntended for use when sup plied with power from a Lithium-ion battery and chargers ACP-9E, ACP-9X and ACP-9A. Other usage will invalidate any ap p roval given to this apparatus and may be danger ous. Use only batteries, chargers , and accessories approved by the communicator manufacturer for use with this p articular communicator mode l. The use of any other typ es wil l invalida te any app roval or wa rranty applying to the communicator , and may be d angerous. For availabili ty of approved accessories , please check with your dealer . When you disconnect the power cord o f any accessory , grasp and pull the plug, not the cord.
Glos sary 177 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Glossary A AT commands Operations of a f ax m odem can be controlled by A T commands. These commands give the advanced user an opportunity to control all the features of the modem. A list of common AT commands based on the ETSI 0 7.0 7 standard and supported by the Nokia 9 1 10 Communicator are available in the atcomm.txt file on the diskette included in the sales package of your communicator . B Barring password The barring password is a 4-digit code needed to change fax and voice call barrings, see âÂÂTelephone settingsâ on page 6 5. The password is not located in your communicator or SIM card, but in the network. Y ou obtain the password from your n e twork operator when you subscribe to the call bar ring service. CC o o k i e s Cookies are little pieces of information, given by the s e rver to you, to store information about your visits to a we b site. When you accept cookies, the server is able t o evaluate your use of the web site; what you are inter ested in, what you want to read, etc. D Domain name and Host name The terms âÂÂdomain nameâ and âÂÂhost nameâ are sometimes, slightly inaccurately , used as synonyms. In a fully qualified domain name, e.g. www .forum.nokia.com , th e first part of the name i s the name of the host, and the following parts a r e names of domains to which the host belongs. Each host name corresponds to a certain IP address. Ho st names are used beca use they ar e easier to r emember than IP addr esses. DTMF (Dual Tone Mult i-Frequency) tones DTMF tones are the ton es you hear when you press the number keys on the phone keypad. DTMF tones allow you to commun icate w ith voice mailboxes, computerised telephony systems, etc. H H otspot A WWW page may contain hotspots, such as selection lists, text entry fields, and reset/submit bu ttons, which enable you to in put information into the W orld Wide Web .
Glos sary 178 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) A language used to define the appear ance and content of WWW doc umen ts. HT TP (Hy perte xt Tr ansfer P rot ocol) A document transfer protocol u sed in the WWW. Hyperlin k Hyperlinks are used to move from one WWW page to a n other . I IAP ( Internet Access Point) The point where your communicator connects to the Internet by way of a data call. An Internet access point can be provided, for example, by a commercial Internet serv ice provider or by your own company . Images , inline, external Images within a fetched WWW page are inline images. Larger images are often placed as external images and ha ve to be viewed separately . IMAP4 (Internet Mai l Access Protocol, ver sion 4) A protocol used for accessin g your Remote mailbox. IP (I nte rne t Prot ocol ) add res s All computers and other devices connected to the Internet usin g the Internet Pr otocol have their own individual addresses. The address consists of four n u mbers separated by points: for e xample, 13 1.227. 21 .167. L Lock code The lock code is a five-digit code needed to lock and unlock the communicator . The lock code is also required when you change certain settings. You w ill find the lock code on a sticker in the sales package of your communicator . Keep it s ecret and in a safe place, separate from the communicator . M MCN (Mic ro-Cel lula r Netw ork) tech nolo gy Microcells are used for increasing the capacity of wireless networks in u rban area s. MIME (Multipurpos e Internet Mail Extensions) A standard Internet format which pe rmits including multiple m ail objects in a single messa ge . The mail objects c an be, for e xample, formatted multifont text messages and non-textual elements, such as images and audio fragments.
Glos sary 179 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. P PIN ( Personal Id entity Number ) code The PIN code protects your phone from unauthorised use. The PIN code is supplied with the SIM car d. If the PIN code request is set on, the code is re qu ired each time th e phone is switched on . The PIN code must be 4 to 8 digits long. PIN 2 code The PIN2 code is supplied with some SIM cards. The PIN2 code is required to access certain functions supported by the SIM card. The length of the PIN2 code is 4 to 8 digits. Plug -in A plug-in is a dd-on software that can be dow nloaded from the WWW . The communicator uses plug-ins to display a document that the WWW application itself cannot show . POP3 (Po st Office Protocol , version 3) A common mail protocol that can be used for accessing the Remote mailbox. PPP (Poi nt to Point Prot ocol) A common networking software protocol which enables any computer with a modem and a phone line to connect directly to the Intern et. Proto co l A formal set of rules that govern how data is transferred betwee n two devices. Prox y In some networks, the connection between the WWW and the site you want to connect to is blocked by a firewall. The firewall protects the network from unau tho rised external access. A proxy is an intermediary program that enables access through the firewall. A proxy can also serve as a network cache to speed u p the fetching process. PUK ( PIN Unblo ckin g Ke y) cod e The PUK is an 8-digit code su pplie d with the SIM car d. The code is required when you want to change a disabled PIN code. If you enter an incorrect PUK code ten tim es in su cce ssion, the SIM card is rejected and you cannot make or receive any calls, except emergency calls. When the SIM is rejecte d, you will need a new SIM card. Y ou cannot change the PUK code. I f you lose the code, contact your network operator .
Glos sary 180 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. PUK2 code The PUK2 code is supplied with some SIM cards. The code is required when you want to change a disabled PIN2 code. If you enter an incorrect PUK2 code ten times in succession, you will not be able to access the functions which require the PIN2 code. T o use these functions again, you will need to obtain a new SI M card from your network operator . Y ou cannot change th e PUK2 code. S SIM (S ubscriber Identity Mo dule) card The SIM card cont ains all the information the cellular network needs t o ident i fy t he netwo rk user . The SIM card also contai ns secur ity-rel ated inf ormati on. SMTP (Si m ple Ma il Transport Proto col) An Internet protocol governing the transfer of ele ctronic mail. SSL (S ecure Soc ket Layer) A security protocol that prevents eavesdropping, tampering, or message forgery over the In ternet. Documents using SSL are identified with the prefix HTTPS. TT C P P o r t Identifies the data port of the destin ation computer . TCP/IP (Transmission C ontrol Protoco l/Internet Proto col) A protocol that governs data communication in the Internet and in the TCP/IP networks . U URL (Uniform Resource Locator) Link information required by the WWW to connect to a given WWW hos t compute r . The URL us ually sta rts with http:// followe d by www . For example, the Noki a Wireless Data Forum hom e page can be found at http://www.forum.nokia.com. URLs are often referred to with phrases like âÂÂHome page location,â âÂÂSite location,â â can be found at...â V Voice ma ilbox A voice mailbox is a network service or a personal answering machine where people can leave you voice messages.
Index 181 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Index A Alar ms Cale ndar 123 Clock 139 Alternate phone line service 160 AT co mmand s 133 , 177 Autolock 129 B Backlight Settings 126 Turning on 31 Barring password 130 Battery 27 Charging 27 Booking events 121 Cancelling and changing bookings 122 Business cards 81 C Cable connection 40 Cache 97 Emptying 103 Calendar Adding events 119 Alarms 123 Booking password 121 Cancelling and changing bookings 122 Memos 120 Receiving bookings 122 Sending bookings 121 Caller groups 66
Index 182 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Calls Alternate lines 160 Alternating calls 64 Answerin g 60, 150 Answering a waiting ca ll 64 Anykey answer 159 Automatic redialling 159 Barrin g 68, 161 Closed user group 162 Conference call 63, 150 Diverting 68, 163 Fixed dialling 162 Making a call 59, 149 Making a new call 63, 150 Making an emergency call 175 Poor call quality 14, 167 Putting on hold 150 Recording conversation 61, 150, 164 Showing costs 157 Showing duration 157 Switching between calls 62 Trans ferri ng 64, 150 Waiting call 69, 159 Chr ke y 113 Citi es Changing home city 141 Editing and addin g 140 Selecting destination city 140 Clea ning the commun icat or 171 Clock settings 141 Codes Lock code 130 PIN code 129 PIN2 code 129 PUK code 179 PUK2 code 180 Composing tunes 141 Confer ence call 63
Index 183 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Contact card Adding fields 51 Attaching an image 53 Cre ating 51 Customising fields 52 Setting an individual ringing tone 52 Template 50 Contact groups Cre ating 55 Cont rast control 127 Costs 60 D Date format 127 Delivery reports 83 Diverting calls 68 Document outbox 36 Documents Printing 112 Rea ding 111 Read- only d ocument s 114 Sending 114 Transfe rring via IR 112 Writing 111 Downloaded files Installing 104 Open ing 114 DTMF tones Sending 64, 152 Special characters 54 Storing 54 E Emergency calls 175
Index 184 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. F Fax Adding a logo 75 Adding a signat ur e 75 Barrin g 75 Cover page settings 74 Diverting 75 Forwarding 71 Printing 74 Receiving 73 Sending 72 Setting sending time 75 Writing 71 Fixed dialling 162 Flight profile Setting on 69 Folders Creating 112 Removing 112 Font 113 Formatting the file system 167 G General log 56 H Handsfree mode 61 Help Application help 32 Genera l hel p 32 Phone 153 I Image s Contact images 53 Trans ferri ng 131 WWW imag es 103 Import/Export Calendar 46 Contacts 46 Indicators 22 Individual log 56
Index 185 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Info se rvic e Rea ding 155 Settings 83, 156 Infrared conn ection Connecting to a communicator 131 Connecting to a PC 40 Connecting to a printer 35 Intern et Access requirements 85 Autodisconnect time 87 Data call barring 87 Defining an access poin t 86 K Keyboard 24 Keypad 147 L Lock code 130 Locking Comm unicat or 127, 16 3 Keypad 153 Logs 56 M Mail Adding a signature 92 Adding attachments 93 Fetching 94 Fetching attachments 91 Font 90 Forwarding 96 Opening attachments 95 Printing 96 Rea ding 95 Remote mailbox 94 Remo ving mess ages 95 Replying 96 Sending 92 Sending upon request 93 Timed fe tching 92 Writing 92 Margins 113
Index 186 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Memory Cache 97 Details 130 SIM memo ry 54 Memory ca rd 32 Inse rting 32 Menu button 31 Message centre n u mber 82 Messages Info me ssages 83, 155 Short messages 77, 155 Multiselection 33 N Netw ork Selecting 161 Settings 67 Nokia CareLine contact card 49, 117 Nokia Communicator Server Installing 46 Nokia Wireless Data Forum 165 Note s Sending 114 Writing 111 O Own num ber sen ding 67 , 160 P Passwords Barring password 130 Booking password 121 Internet password 88 Mail password 91 WWW pass word 99, 101 PC connectivity Cable connection 40 Infrared connection 40 PC Su ite fo r Noki a 9110 Comm unicato r Installing 40 PIN code 129 PIN2 code 129
Index 187 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. Printing 35 Cable connection 36 Documents 112 Faxes 74 Infrared connection 35 Mail messages 96 Settings 126 SMS messages 80 Profiles Modifying 65, 159 Setting on 158 PUK code 179 PUK2 code 180 R Read-only documents Open ing 114 Received communication note 37 Receiving Fax 73 Mail 94 SMS 79 Recorder Playing a recor din g 144 , 164 Recording 144, 164 Remote mailbox 89, 94 Resetting the communicator 166 Ringing tones Alternate ringing tone 125 Composing 141 Recording 144 Selecting 125 Sending 143 Setting individual tones 52 Settings 66
Index 188 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. S Safety information Electronic devices 173 Operating environment 173 Traff ic sa fety 173 Vehicles 174 Scre en blank er 127 Sea rch f ield 21, 49 Selection frame 20 Sending Documents 114 DTMF tones 64 Mail 92 SMS 78 Ser vice card s 80 Sho rtcu ts 34 Signal strength 15 Indicator 23, 149 SIM c ard Installing 17 , 32 Viewing contents 54 SMS Forwarding 80 Receiving 79, 155 Replying 80 Sending 78 Setti ng message cent re number 82 Writing 78 Special characters 113 Speed di alling Settings 53 Usin g 151 Standard mess ages 80
Index 189 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. T Telnet Defi ning c onnectio ns 107 Special keys 108 Term inal Defi ning c onnectio ns 105 Special keys 106 Text W eb Defi ning se rvic es 109 Fetching information 109 Time fo rmat 127 Tones Adding ringing tones 112 Application tones 126 Composing 141 Notification tone 126 Recording 144 Ringing tones 66, 125 Sending 143 Silencing 65 Trans ferri ng Calls 64 Data from other handheld devices 51 Text (Telnet, Termin al) 106 U Unit of measure 127 Unlocking Comm unicat or 128, 16 3 Keypad 153 V Voice mailbox Calling 69, 148, 15 2, 156 Setting number 69, 156 Volume Adjusting loudspeaker 61 Communicator key click 66 Phone key click 66 Ringing tone 66
Index 190 ï 1999 Nokia Mobile Phones . All Rights Reserved. W Welcome note 16 0 World t ime 140 World Wide We b Access requirements 97 Adding bookmarks 98 Copying text 102 Creating a bookmark folder 99 Downloading software 104 Fetching a page 98 Following a hyperlink 102 Navigation commands 102 Saving a page 103 Saving the HTML format 99 Timed fet ching 100 Viewing images 103 Z Zoom button 31